Clavis apocalyptica, or, A prophetical key by which the great mysteries in the revelation of St. John and the prophet Daniel are opened : it beeing made apparent that the prophetical numbers com to an end with the year of our Lord, 1655 : in two treatises: 1. Shewing what in these our times hath been fulfilled, 2. At this present is effectually brought to pass, 3. And henceforth is to bee expected in the year neer at hand : with an introductorie preface / written by a Germane D. ; and now translated out of High-Dutch.
         Hartlib, Samuel, d. 1662.
      
       
         
           1651
        
      
       Approx. 300 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 128 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2007-10 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A45748
         Wing H979
         ESTC R30751
         11467144
         ocm 11467144
         47780
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A45748)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 47780)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 1463:19)
      
       
         
           
             Clavis apocalyptica, or, A prophetical key by which the great mysteries in the revelation of St. John and the prophet Daniel are opened : it beeing made apparent that the prophetical numbers com to an end with the year of our Lord, 1655 : in two treatises: 1. Shewing what in these our times hath been fulfilled, 2. At this present is effectually brought to pass, 3. And henceforth is to bee expected in the year neer at hand : with an introductorie preface / written by a Germane D. ; and now translated out of High-Dutch.
             Hartlib, Samuel, d. 1662.
             Dury, John, 1596-1680.
          
           [6], 79, [3], 163, [2] p.
           
             Printed by William Du-Gard for Thomas Matthewes, and are to be sold by Giles Calvert ...,
             London :
             1651.
          
           
             Based on the Clavis apocalyptica of Joseph Mede - cf. preface.
             Epistole dedicatory addressed : "To the Right Honourable Oliver St-John, Lord Chief Justice of the Court of Common-Pleas."
             Includes: "An epistolical discours from Mr. John Durie to Mr. Sam. Hartlib, concerning this exposition of the revelation, by way of preface thereunto."
             Includes: "A list of things which are shortly to com to pass, collected out of the XI and XVI chapters of the Revelation."
             Includes: Apocalypsis reserata, or, the revelation of St. John opened ..., with special t.p.
             Reproduction of original in the Harvard University Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Bible. -- O.T. -- Daniel -- Commentaries.
           Bible. -- N.T. -- Revelation -- Commentaries.
        
      
    
     
        2005-11 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2005-11 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2006-09 Ali Jakobson
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2006-09 Ali Jakobson
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2007-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           
             Clavis
             Apocalyptica
          
           :
           OR
           ,
           A
           Prophetical
           KEY
           :
           BY
           WHICH
           The
           great
           Mysteries
           in
           the
           Revelation
           of
           St
           John
           ,
           and
           the
           Prophet
           Daniel
           are
           opened
           ;
           It
           beeing
           made
           apparent
           That
           the
           Prophetical
           Numbers
           com
           to
           an
           end
           with
           the
           year
           of
           our
           Lord
           ,
           1655.
           
        
         
           Written
           by
           a
           Germane
           D.
           and
           now
           translated
           out
           of
           High-Dutch
           .
        
         
           In
           two
           TREATISES
           .
        
         
           
             1.
             
             Shewing
             what
             in
             these
             our
             times
             hath
             been
             fulfilled
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             At
             this
             present
             is
             effectually
             brought
             to
             pass
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             And
             henceforth
             is
             to
             bee
             exspected
             in
             the
             years
             neer
             at
             hand
             .
          
        
         
           With
           an
           introductorie
           PREFACE
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           by
           
             William
             Du-Gard
          
           for
           
             Thomas
             Matthewes
          
           ,
           and
           are
           to
           bee
           sold
           by
           
             Giles
             Calvert
          
           ,
           at
           the
           Black-Spread-Eagle
           at
           the
           West-end
           of
           St
           Paul's
           ,
           1651.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           Right
           Honorable
           OLIVER
           St-JOHN
           Lord
           Chief
           Justice
           of
           the
           Court
           of
           Common-Pleas
           .
        
         
           
             My
             most
             Honored
             Lord
             !
          
        
         
           WHen
           I
           reflect
           (
           as
           oft
           times
           I
           have
           caus
           to
           do
           upon
           the
           Providence
           ,
           which
           hath
           been
           over
           mee
           since
           I
           have
           offered
           my self
           unto
           the
           Publick
           ;
           and
           upon
           the
           hand
           by
           which
           that
           Providence
           hath
           supported
           and
           directed
           mee
           in
           my
           waie
           ;
           I
           finde
           that
           it
           hath
           made
           use
           of
           none
           to
           carrie
           
           mee
           on
           to
           becom
           serviceable
           ;
           so
           much
           as
           of
           your
           Lordship's
           favor
           and
           affection
           .
           For
           as
           you
           were
           the
           first
           that
           took
           notice
           of
           my
           inclination
           ,
           to
           bee
           encouraged
           in
           the
           waies
           which
           I
           have
           followed
           ;
           so
           your
           eye
           hath
           been
           all
           along
           upon
           mee
           therein
           .
           In
           my
           straights
           ,
           whereinto
           my
           forwardness
           hath
           from
           time
           to
           time
           brought
           mee
           ;
           I
           have
           found
           the
           tenderness
           of
           your
           sens
           ,
           and
           bowels
           to
           bee
           like
           unto
           that
           of
           a
           Father
           .
           You
           have
           in
           private
           put
           to
           your
           hand
           ,
           and
           set
           your
           heart
           to
           free
           mee
           from
           them
           ;
           &
           in
           publick
           you
           have
           owned
           mee
           towards
           the
           Parlament
           ,
           and
           procured
           an
           aspect
           from
           that
           High
           and
           Honorable
           Court
           towards
           mee
           ,
           to
           set
           mee
           apart
           as
           an
           Agent
           for
           the
           Advancement
           of
           Universal
           Learning
           and
           the
           Publick
           Good
           ,
           which
           I
           confess
           is
           an
           Emploiment
           ,
           whereunto
           from
           my
           youth
           God
           God
           hath
           naturalized
           my
           affections
           .
           And
           since
           this
           Publick
           designment
           of
           my
           Emploiment
           ,
           it
           hath
           been
           your
           influence
           upon
           ,
           and
           concurrence
           with
           other
           noble
           and
           worthie
           Instruments
           ,
           whom
           you
           have
           quickned
           ,
           which
           hath
           made
           that
           settlement
           ,
           which
           
           doth
           promise
           so
           much
           inlargement
           to
           my
           steps
           ,
           in
           my
           future
           courses
           effectual
           .
           All
           this
           I
           am
           bound
           to
           observ
           and
           acknowledg
           with
           most
           heartie
           thankfulness
           unto
           God
           ,
           not
           onely
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           refreshments
           ,
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           thereby
           conveighed
           unto
           mee
           from
           your
           hand
           ,
           but
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Principle
           ,
           which
           moved
           you
           hereunto
           ,
           and
           the
           Aim
           which
           you
           have
           had
           therein
           ,
           which
           I
           know
           to
           have
           been
           none
           other
           but
           the
           Publick
           ;
           and
           therein
           the
           advancement
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Jesus
           Christ
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           hope
           which
           wee
           have
           to
           partake
           of
           the
           Salvation
           of
           Israël
           ,
           which
           shall
           com
           out
           of
           Sion
           by
           a
           Gospel-Reformation
           of
           this
           Age
           and
           Common
           wealth
           ,
           hath
           been
           the
           Center
           wherein
           our
           Aims
           have
           alwaies
           met
           .
           For
           I
           am
           persuaded
           that
           the
           ground
           of
           all
           the
           good
           will
           ,
           of
           the
           Bountie
           and
           of
           the
           Care
           ,
           which
           abundantly
           hath
           been
           bestowed
           upon
           mee
           ,
           hath
           been
           none
           other
           ,
           but
           the
           freeness
           of
           your
           spirit
           in
           the
           love
           of
           the
           things
           ,
           which
           are
           most
           excellent
           ,
           wherein
           you
           found
           mee
           conversant
           ,
           and
           which
           you
           are
           delighted
           to
           set
           forward
           .
           Whence
           it
           is
           that
           I
           conceiv
           
           it
           my
           dutie
           ,
           to
           present
           unto
           your
           Lordship
           in
           a
           more
           direct
           and
           eminent
           waie
           then
           unto
           others
           ,
           the
           fruits
           of
           my
           Negotiation
           ,
           chiefly
           such
           as
           relate
           immediately
           unto
           the
           great
           Object
           of
           our
           Hope
           ;
           of
           which
           kinde
           this
           present
           Treatise
           is
           a
           special
           and
           signal
           Discoverie
           .
           Therefore
           give
           mee
           leav
           to
           make
           of
           it
           a
           publick
           offer
           unto
           your
           Patronage
           ,
           not
           onely
           as
           a
           Testimonie
           of
           the
           forementioned
           Obligations
           ,
           by
           which
           my
           Spirit
           in
           the
           sight
           of
           Christ
           is
           entirely
           engaged
           towards
           his
           Grace
           in
           You
           ;
           but
           as
           a
           Subject
           of
           my
           Agencie
           to
           solicite
           ,
           that
           by
           the
           countenance
           of
           your
           Autoritie
           it
           may
           bee
           recommended
           to
           such
           ,
           as
           know
           what
           the
           Communion
           of
           Saints
           doth
           mean
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           that
           there
           may
           bee
           a
           reciprocation
           of
           love
           in
           the
           gifts
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           between
           us
           and
           others
           the
           Members
           of
           Jesus
           Christ
           abroad
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           things
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Preface
           ,
           as
           means
           to
           accomplish
           our
           hopes
           ,
           which
           yet
           lie
           under
           deck
           ,
           by
           the
           building
           up
           of
           the
           walls
           of
           Jerusalem
           in
           the
           mindes
           of
           Believers
           ,
           may
           bee
           drawn
           
           forth
           ;
           and
           the
           faithful
           and
           indefatigable
           Co-Agent
           therein
           ,
           beeing
           put
           in
           a
           capacitie
           to
           prepare
           his
           seed
           to
           bee
           sown
           by
           the
           working
           out
           of
           his
           proper
           tasks
           ;
           may
           finde
           opportunities
           which
           will
           oblige
           him
           seasonably
           to
           sow
           it
           ,
           by
           speaking
           out
           that
           which
           at
           present
           can
           bee
           but
           hinted
           ,
           and
           intimated
           in
           reference
           to
           the
           opening
           of
           the
           Principles
           ,
           upon
           which
           the
           building
           of
           the
           Temple
           in
           Heaven
           is
           raised
           ,
           and
           by
           which
           it
           will
           com
           down
           from
           the
           New
           Heaven
           upon
           the
           New
           Earth
           ,
           to
           bee
           the
           Tabernacle
           of
           God
           with
           men
           .
           Thus
           beseeching
           the
           Father
           of
           Lights
           to
           reveal
           more
           and
           more
           these
           glorious
           approaching
           Truths
           :
           and
           the
           Righteous
           Judg
           to
           give
           a
           Crown
           to
           all
           the
           labors
           of
           Love
           ,
           which
           you
           have
           ,
           or
           shall
           undergo
           for
           his
           name's
           sake
           ,
           I
           subscribe
           my self
        
         
           
             My
             most
             Honored
             Lord
          
           
             Your
             truly
             devoted
             Orator
             and
             faithful
             Servant
             Samuel
             Hartlib
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           ERRATA
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Preface
             .
          
           
             PAg.
             3.
             line
             26.
             for
             Batemans
             ,
             read
             Bohemians
             .
             p.
             5.
             l.
             2.
             f.
             22.
             r.
             2.
             p.
             38.
             l.
             penult
             .
             f.
             promised
             .
             r.
             premised
             .
             p.
             40.
             l.
             1.
             f.
             of
             anie
             ,
             r.
             anie
             .
             ibid.
             l.
             40.
             f.
             transaction
             ,
             r.
             transition
             .
             ibid.
             l.
             ult
             .
             f.
             transl●●ed
             ,
             r.
             transacted
             .
             ibid.
             f.
             leav
             ,
             r.
             have
             .
             p.
             47.
             l.
             6.
             f.
             partly
             ,
             r.
             partie
             .
          
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Book
             .
          
           
             PAg.
             1.
             line
             12.
             deliver
             them
             .
             p.
             6.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             
               
                 360.
                 daies
                 are
                 1.
                 year
                 or
                 time
              
               
                 720.
                 daies
                 are
                 2.
                 years
                 or
                 times
              
               
                 180.
                 daies
                 are
                 ½
                 year
              
               
                 1260.
                 daies
              
            
             
               
                 12.
                 
                 Mon.
                 
              
               
                 24.
                 
                 Mon.
                 
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 Mon.
                 
              
               
                 42.
                 
                 Mon.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 42
                 Moneths
                 .
                 at
                 the
                 rate
                 of
                 30.
                 daies
              
               
                 1260.
                 daies
                 .
              
            
          
           
             p.
             9.
             l.
             22
             ▪
             f.
             sixtie
             ,
             r.
             ninetie
             .
             ibid.
             l.
             25.
             f.
             sixtie
             ,
             r.
             ninetie
             .
             p.
             10.
             l.
             4.
             f.
             sixtie
             ,
             r.
             ninetie
             .
             p.
             24.
             l.
             11.
             f.
             Anglia
             ,
             r.
             Mysia
             .
             p.
             31.
             l.
             10.
             f.
             chap.
             2.
             r.
             ch
             .
             10.
             ibid.
             l.
             11.
             f.
             vers
             3.
             r.
             vers
             2.
             p.
             33.
             l.
             1.
             f.
             Ezekiah
             ,
             r.
             Zedekiah
             .
             ibid.
             l.
             13.
             
             Zedekiah
             for
             Ezekiah
             .
             p.
             34.
             l.
             8.
             
             &
             9.
             f.
             according
             to
             the
             supputation
             of
             ,
             r.
             when
             wee
             shall
             reckon
             .
             p.
             35.
             l.
             15.
             f.
             Burse
             ,
             r.
             Busse
             .
             p.
             45.
             l.
             16.
             f.
             Church
             ,
             r.
             Christ
             .
             p.
             48.
             l.
             ●
             .
             f.
             fifteen
             ,
             r.
             is
             .
             p.
             75.
             l.
             9
             ▪
             f.
             lib.
             and
             ,
             r.
             lib.
             21.
             and
             ibid.
             l.
             11.
             f.
             cata
             ,
             r.
             casa
             .
             p.
             76.
             l.
             ult
             :
             f.
             Truth
             ,
             r.
             Turk
             .
             p.
             112.
             f.
             demutation
             ,
             r.
             deputation
             .
             p.
             115.
             l.
             7.
             f.
             usual
             ,
             r.
             which
             .
             p.
             112.
             l.
             8.
             f.
             chap.
             vers
             ,
             r.
             chap.
             20.
             vers
             .
             p.
             138.
             l.
             8.
             f.
             was
             Musa
             ,
             r.
             was
             by
             Musa
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           AN
           Epistolical
           Discours
           ,
           from
           Mr
           John
           Durie
           to
           Mr
           Sam
           :
           Hartlib
           ,
           concerning
           this
           EXPOSITION
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           BY
           Waie
           of
           Preface
           thereunto
           .
        
         
           WHen
           I
           do
           reflect
           (
           loving
           friend
           !
           )
           upon
           the
           passages
           of
           Mr
           Comeniu'ss
           Letter
           ,
           which
           hee
           write's
           unto
           you
           ,
           when
           hee
           sent
           you
           this
           little
           Treatise
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           and
           consider
           withal
           what
           God's
           waie
           is
           at
           present
           in
           the
           earth
           ,
           both
           towards
           us
           ,
           and
           other
           Nations
           ,
           and
           what
           the
           Contents
           of
           this
           book
           do
           intend
           to
           make
           out
           ,
           unto
           those
           that
           read
           it
           with
           attention
           :
           I
           am
           much
           inclined
           to
           believ
           ,
           that
           God
           doth
           intend
           some
           special
           advantage
           to
           his
           Church
           by
           the
           publication
           thereof
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           is
           an
           effect
           of
           his
           good
           Providence
           towards
           us
           ,
           to
           have
           it
           put
           at
           this
           time
           into
           our
           hand
           .
           Therefore
           let
           mee
           discours
           
           a
           little
           with
           you
           about
           it
           ;
           that
           not
           onely
           the
           desire
           of
           our
           common
           friend
           ,
           who
           doth
           engage
           us
           to
           this
           publication
           of
           the
           Treatise
           ,
           and
           the
           declaration
           of
           our
           Judgment
           concerning
           the
           same
           ,
           may
           receiv
           som
           satisfaction
           ,
           when
           wee
           shall
           have
           occasion
           to
           write
           unto
           him
           ;
           but
           that
           others
           to
           whom
           this
           shall
           bee
           imparted
           ,
           may
           have
           also
           occasion
           to
           laie
           the
           matter
           thereof
           more
           seriously
           to
           heart
           ,
           then
           otherwise
           perhaps
           they
           would
           intend
           to
           do
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           Mr
           Comeniu's
           Letter
           which
           doth
           give
           mee
           this
           opportunitie
           to
           discours
           with
           you
           upon
           this
           Subject
           ,
           the
           words
           thereof
           concerning
           this
           matter
           are
           t●ese
           .
        
         
           My
           Son
           in
           Law
           hath
           been
           away
           these
           two
           weeks
           ,
           beeing
           sent
           to
           Warsaw
           ,
           and
           to
           Brieg
           ,
           hee
           bring
           's
           no
           news
           but
           terrors
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Peace
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           bee
           feared
           will
           afford
           nothing
           but
           new
           tortures
           to
           the
           consciences
           of
           those
           that
           are
           deserted
           by
           it
           ,
           and
           excluded
           from
           it
           .
           Nor
           are
           the
           forerunners
           hereof
           wanting
           .
           Behold
           ,
           here
           I
           impart
           unto
           you
           these
           Germane
           Treatises
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Periods
           
           of
           the
           Revelation-times
           ,
           drawing
           to
           an
           end
           (
           Godgrant
           they
           may
           not
           bee
           lost
           ,
           nor
           fall
           into
           other
           hands
           )
           but
           upon
           this
           condition
           ,
           that
           you
           shall
           let
           us
           know
           your
           Judgment
           thereof
           ;
           for
           to
           this
           effect
           ,
           hee
           that
           is
           the
           autor
           of
           them
           caused
           them
           to
           bee
           communicated
           unto
           us
           ,
           that
           whoëver
           should
           read
           ,
           should
           also
           judg
           and
           censure
           .
           I
           have
           heard
           a
           little
           while
           ago
           of
           this
           book
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           the
           true
           Revelation
           of
           the
           Revelations
           ;
           and
           that
           which
           will
           bee
           most
           comfortable
           (
           if
           hee
           hath
           hit
           right
           )
           is
           ,
           that
           wee
           are
           so
           near
           the
           terme
           prefixed
           .
           I
           praie
           you
           communicate
           this
           to
           your
           men
           ,
           if
           yet
           you
           have
           anie
           
             Joseph
             Medes
          
           amongst
           you
           ;
           but
           it
           must
           first
           bee
           translated
           into
           English
           .
        
         
           Thus
           much
           hee
           from
           Lissa
           in
           Poland
           ,
           where
           most
           of
           the
           exiled
           Bateman's
           have
           had
           their
           residence
           ,
           since
           the
           time
           of
           their
           banishment
           .
           And
           in
           these
           words
           I
           take
           notice
           ,
           not
           onely
           of
           the
           opinion
           which
           som
           among
           them
           have
           of
           this
           book
           in
           approving
           of
           it
           ;
           and
           of
           the
           Autor's
           Modestie
           ,
           and
           Ingenuitie
           who
           sent
           it
           to
           him
           ;
           in
           concealing
           his
           own
           name
           ,
           and
           submitting
           it
           to
           
           the
           censure
           of
           others
           ,
           that
           by
           the
           communion
           of
           Saints
           the
           measure
           of
           light
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           given
           to
           everie
           one
           may
           becom
           serviceable
           unto
           all
           ;
           but
           chiefly
           of
           the
           good
           hand
           of
           Providence
           ,
           reaching
           forth
           this
           Treatise
           unto
           them
           at
           this
           time
           :
           for
           it
           is
           a
           manifest
           demonstration
           of
           the
           Fatherlie
           care
           of
           God
           over
           them
           ,
           to
           support
           their
           hearts
           in
           their
           approaching
           trials
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           not
           faint
           under
           the
           burden
           thereof
           .
           It
           is
           a
           true
           saying
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           whereunto
           the
           experience
           of
           all
           Saints
           ,
           in
           all
           ages
           doth
           bear
           witness
           ;
           
             That
             God
             is
             faithful
             ,
             who
             will
             not
             suffer
             us
             to
             bee
             tempted
             above
             what
             wee
             are
             able
             ,
             but
             will
             with
             the
             temptation
             also
             make
             a
             waie
             to
             escape
             ;
             that
             wee
             may
             bee
             able
             to
             bear
             it
             .
          
           And
           as
           this
           is
           a
           truth
           in
           God's
           waie
           towards
           particular
           Saints
           ,
           in
           their
           several
           occasions
           ;
           so
           wee
           may
           conclude
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           universal
           dispensation
           of
           trials
           ,
           towards
           the
           whole
           Bodie
           of
           his
           Church
           ,
           his
           cours
           will
           not
           bee
           different
           ,
           but
           altogether
           consonant
           unto
           this
           promise
           ,
           that
           as
           
             the
             sufferings
             of
             Christ
             abound
             in
             the
             Church
             which
             is
             his
             Bodie
             ;
             so
             the
             consolations
             of
             the
             church
             shall
             also
             abound
             in
             Christ
             who
             is
             her
             head
             .
          
           So
           that
           if
           the
           trials
           whereunto
           particular
           Saints
           are
           put
           ,
           
             shall
             bee
             found
             unto
             prais
          
           ,
           
             and
             honor
             ,
             and
             glorie
             at
             the
             appearing
             of
             Jesus
             Christ
             :
          
           far
           more
           shall
           this
           bee
           verified
           of
           the
           whole
           Congregation
           ,
           and
           general
           assemblie
           
           of
           the
           Holie
           ones
           ,
           whose
           names
           are
           written
           in
           Heaven
           .
        
         
           I
           look
           then
           upon
           this
           book
           which
           doth
           open
           to
           the
           Bohemian
           exiled
           ,
           and
           Germane
           Churches
           ,
           the
           counsel
           of
           God
           foretold
           so
           long
           ago
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           now
           shortly
           to
           bee
           accomplished
           ;
           as
           a
           special
           cordial
           sent
           unto
           them
           from
           heaven
           ,
           in
           their
           present
           affliction
           ,
           and
           to
           support
           their
           hearts
           against
           the
           approaching
           visitation
           ,
           wherewith
           God's
           Providence
           will
           farther
           visit
           those
           parts
           ,
           before
           hee
           make
           an
           end
           of
           his
           work
           amongst
           them
           .
           And
           that
           it
           is
           now
           also
           at
           this
           juncture
           of
           time
           sent
           from
           thence
           unto
           us
           ,
           to
           mee
           it
           doth
           signifie
           ,
           that
           which
           is
           very
           considerable
           in
           several
           respects
           ,
           which
           I
           shall
           briefly
           point
           at
           before
           I
           com
           to
           speak
           of
           the
           Treatise
           it self
           .
        
         
           First
           then
           wee
           may
           observ
           from
           hence
           ,
           that
           the
           same
           spirit
           who
           doth
           rais
           the
           exspectation
           of
           the
           Saints
           in
           these
           parts
           ,
           doth
           also
           work
           the
           like
           thoughts
           elswhere
           :
           as
           it
           is
           observable
           ,
           that
           about
           the
           time
           of
           Christ's
           comming
           in
           the
           flesh
           ,
           there
           was
           much
           waiting
           for
           the
           consolation
           of
           Israël
           ,
           and
           looking
           for
           the
           Redemption
           of
           Jerusalem
           ,
           as
           Luke
           doth
           intimate
           ,
           
             chapter
             22.
             vers
             25.
             38.
          
           
           So
           it
           is
           now
           worth
           our
           consideration
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           more
           then
           an
           ordinarie
           looking
           out
           for
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           the
           promises
           ,
           wherein
           the
           Revelation
           of
           
           Jesus
           Christ
           hath
           caused
           us
           to
           hope
           .
           You
           know
           that
           som
           moneths
           ago
           ,
           one
           came
           of
           purpose
           (
           as
           he
           said
           )
           out
           of
           Germanie
           ,
           through
           the
           Low-Countries
           into
           this
           Citie
           ,
           to
           make
           enquirie
           ,
           whether
           anie
           were
           here
           ,
           who
           did
           look
           after
           the
           fulfilling
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           his
           design
           by
           this
           enquirie
           was
           ,
           that
           som
           ground
           of
           communication
           ,
           and
           good
           intelligence
           might
           bee
           enterteined
           amongst
           us
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           understanding
           of
           God's
           waies
           ,
           and
           the
           observation
           of
           his
           footsteps
           ,
           in
           working
           out
           his
           great
           work
           for
           the
           Churches
           ;
           and
           to
           this
           effect
           hee
           left
           som
           books
           here
           with
           him
           whom
           you
           know
           ,
           and
           since
           his
           return
           into
           the
           Low-Countries
           ,
           hee
           hath
           by
           Letters
           promised
           a
           further
           communication
           with
           us
           ,
           upon
           that
           Subject
           ,
           in
           the
           name
           of
           his
           Collegue
           .
           Thus
           wee
           have
           had
           a
           call
           both
           from
           Germanie
           ,
           and
           Poland
           ,
           to
           entertein
           these
           thoughts
           ;
           as
           for
           the
           Low-Countries
           ,
           you
           know
           that
           there
           are
           manie
           there
           ,
           whose
           eies
           are
           opened
           to
           look
           this
           waie
           ;
           and
           in
           France
           I
           know
           som
           (
           though
           not
           so
           manie
           as
           elswhere
           ,
           )
           whose
           heads
           are
           lifted
           up
           ,
           becaus
           their
           deliverance
           is
           at
           hand
           .
           Nor
           do
           wee
           Christians
           onely
           exspect
           shortly
           som
           great
           change
           of
           affairs
           ,
           but
           even
           the
           Jews
           ,
           almost
           everie
           where
           ,
           are
           also
           made
           sensible
           of
           the
           approaching
           change
           of
           their
           condition
           .
           So
           that
           seeing
           there
           is
           an
           universal
           concurrence
           of
           thoughts
           towards
           this
           object
           ,
           wee
           may
           rationally
           conclude
           ,
           that
           the
           Lord
           is
           hastening
           to
           finish
           his
           work
           in
           righteousness
           :
           and
           becaus
           it
           is
           apparent
           ,
           that
           on
           all
           sides
           the
           enemie
           is
           about
           to
           
           lift
           himself
           up
           like
           a
           flood
           ,
           wee
           may
           also
           see
           it
           herein
           manifest
           ,
           ,
           that
           
             the
             Spirit
             of
             the
             Lord
          
           according
           to
           his
           promise
           ,
           is
           preparing
           
             to
             lift
             up
             a
             Standard
             against
             him
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           this
           Call
           which
           is
           given
           to
           us
           from
           so
           far
           ,
           doth
           signifie
           unto
           mee
           two
           things
           ;
           First
           ,
           somwhat
           of
           God's
           waie
           to
           accomplish
           his
           design
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           somwhat
           of
           our
           dutie
           in
           subordination
           thereunto
           .
           God's
           waie
           to
           accomplish
           his
           design
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           is
           ,
           and
           will
           bee
           the
           communion
           of
           Saints
           in
           the
           mysterie
           of
           Godliness
           ,
           when
           everie
           member
           acted
           by
           the
           same
           Spirit
           towards
           God
           ,
           and
           each
           to
           other
           ;
           shall
           draw
           from
           him
           ,
           and
           supplie
           one
           to
           another
           ;
           that
           which
           hee
           will
           give
           to
           everie
           one
           ,
           for
           the
           edifying
           of
           the
           whole
           in
           love
           :
           and
           although
           they
           have
           not
           such
           an
           exact
           contrivance
           of
           correspondencie
           setled
           one
           with
           another
           ,
           as
           the
           politick
           Jesuits
           have
           in
           their
           waie
           ;
           yet
           the
           Spirit
           by
           which
           they
           are
           led
           ,
           acting
           the
           same
           thing
           in
           them
           all
           ,
           will
           make
           the
           effect
           of
           their
           counsels
           ,
           and
           actings
           to
           correspond
           ,
           without
           anie
           special
           contrivance
           of
           their
           own
           ;
           that
           the
           work
           in
           the
           issue
           may
           appear
           to
           bee
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           men
           :
           for
           
             Sion
             asso●●
             as
             shee
             travelleth
             ,
             nay
             ,
             before
             shee
             travelleth
             ,
             and
             her
             pain
             come's
             :
             shee
             shall
             bee
             delivered
             ,
             and
             bring
             forth
             a
             Nation
             at
             once
             .
          
           Isa
           .
           66.
           7
           ,
           8.
           
           God
           by
           the
           Communion
           of
           Saints
           in
           one
           and
           the
           same
           spirit
           ,
           shall
           do
           this
           ,
           by
           his
           contrivance
           of
           his
           own
           
           waie
           amongst
           them
           ;
           Nor
           shall
           anie
           gathering
           together
           of
           enemies
           (
           which
           shall
           not
           bee
           wanting
           )
           nor
           anie
           violent
           attempts
           ,
           or
           destructive
           weapons
           and
           endevors
           (
           which
           will
           bee
           set
           afoot
           )
           bee
           able
           to
           obstruct
           the
           effect
           of
           this
           communion
           which
           will
           bring
           the
           Bodie
           of
           Christ
           to
           to
           the
           stature
           of
           a
           perfect
           man.
           
        
         
           Our
           dutie
           in
           subordination
           to
           this
           waie
           of
           God
           is
           cleerly
           this
           ;
           that
           wee
           should
           with
           all
           readiness
           of
           minde
           ▪
           applie
           our
           selvs
           to
           entertein
           all
           spiritual
           motions
           ,
           tending
           to
           mutual
           and
           universal
           edification
           :
           not
           onely
           by
           praiers
           ,
           to
           strive
           for
           all
           the
           Saints
           ;
           and
           with
           them
           to
           stand
           stedfast
           in
           the
           fight
           against
           all
           spiritual
           adversaries
           ;
           but
           by
           counsel
           and
           endevors
           ,
           as
           the
           occasion
           is
           offered
           to
           reciprocate
           with
           those
           that
           provoke
           us
           to
           love
           ,
           and
           to
           good
           works
           ,
           and
           to
           react
           with
           mutual
           zeal
           towards
           them
           by
           imparting
           unto
           them
           the
           Manifestations
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           and
           the
           fruits
           of
           all
           the
           grace
           which
           God
           hath
           bestowed
           upon
           us
           ;
           wee
           know
           not
           how
           much
           an
           occasional
           and
           small
           concurrence
           may
           do
           in
           God's
           waie
           ,
           when
           hee
           is
           pleased
           to
           make
           it
           seasonable
           ,
           and
           bless
           it
           ;
           one
           single
           act
           of
           correspondence
           at
           an
           adventure
           ,
           will
           do
           more
           to
           make
           his
           design
           effectual
           ,
           then
           a
           whole
           years
           contrived
           and
           setled
           intelligence
           ,
           and
           agencie
           of
           manie
           Statesmen
           for
           politick
           designments
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           thing
           ,
           which
           the
           sending
           of
           this
           
           book
           from
           Poland
           hither
           to
           bee
           translated
           ,
           and
           the
           calling
           upon
           us
           to
           communicate
           our
           thoughts
           to
           them
           concerning
           it
           ,
           doth
           signifie
           unto
           mee
           ;
           is
           a
           warning
           unto
           us
           ,
           as
           from
           the
           Spirit
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           waken
           us
           from
           securitie
           ;
           and
           to
           move
           us
           to
           exspect
           ,
           as
           those
           of
           Poland
           saie
           they
           do
           ,
           both
           a
           further
           trial
           of
           our
           faith
           and
           patience
           ,
           and
           also
           a
           gracious
           deliverance
           to
           follow
           thereupon
           ,
           whereof
           wee
           shall
           partake
           ,
           if
           wee
           hold
           fast
           the
           beginning
           and
           confidence
           of
           our
           hope
           ,
           firm
           unto
           the
           end
           with
           joie
           .
           Wee
           know
           that
           no
           man
           shall
           bee
           crowned
           ,
           but
           hee
           that
           first
           strive's
           lawfully
           ;
           and
           that
           none
           shall
           reign
           with
           Christ
           ,
           but
           hee
           that
           suffer's
           with
           him
           :
           as
           for
           mee
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           that
           our
           warfare
           is
           yet
           ,
           as
           som
           would
           have
           it
           (
           and
           to
           their
           own
           particular
           Station
           think
           it
           to
           bee
           )
           at
           an
           end
           ;
           those
           upon
           that
           account
           having
           embraced
           the
           pleasures
           of
           brutishness
           ,
           and
           sensualitie
           in
           this
           present
           world
           ,
           have
           also
           made
           it
           a
           part
           of
           their
           happiness
           ,
           to
           dethrone
           God
           and
           Christ
           in
           their
           ranting
           ,
           and
           blasphemous
           Imagination
           :
           and
           so
           are
           justly
           given
           over
           unto
           a
           Reprobate
           minde
           ;
           but
           as
           I
           have
           caus
           to
           griev
           at
           the
           dishonor
           which
           they
           do
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Holie
           profession
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           certaintie
           of
           their
           endless
           miserie
           under
           the
           notion
           of
           a
           present
           perfection
           and
           felicitie
           ;
           so
           I
           am
           awakened
           thereby
           to
           wait
           for
           the
           overflowing
           scourge
           ,
           and
           the
           storm
           of
           Hail
           ,
           which
           shall
           sweep
           away
           the
           refuge
           of
           such
           lies
           ,
           and
           the
           flood
           of
           waters
           which
           
           shall
           drown
           the
           hiding
           places
           thereof
           .
           I
           am
           therefore
           inclined
           to
           exspect
           still
           before
           the
           times
           of
           refreshmentt
           (
           which
           shall
           com
           from
           the
           presence
           of
           the
           Lord
           )
           the
           last
           assault
           of
           the
           power
           of
           darkness
           ,
           and
           of
           this
           world
           against
           the
           Saints
           ;
           which
           shall
           bee
           of
           all
           other
           the
           heaviest
           and
           fiercest
           ;
           and
           this
           I
           am
           induced
           to
           believ
           from
           the
           Analogie
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           bee
           between
           the
           sufferings
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           flesh
           ;
           and
           the
           sufferings
           of
           his
           members
           ,
           under
           the
           power
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           before
           hee
           com's
           to
           his
           end
           .
           Christ's
           last
           sufferings
           ,
           immediately
           before
           his
           unchangeable
           state
           of
           glorie
           ,
           were
           the
           greatest
           which
           befel
           unto
           him
           in
           all
           his
           life
           ;
           nor
           was
           hee
           raised
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           sit
           at
           his
           right
           hand
           till
           hee
           was
           first
           laid
           in
           the
           grave
           :
           so
           must
           it
           also
           fare
           with
           his
           Bodie
           the
           Church
           ,
           it
           must
           bee
           conformable
           to
           him
           in
           his
           death
           ,
           as
           it
           shall
           bee
           in
           his
           resurrection
           ;
           therefore
           the
           last
           conflict
           which
           it
           shall
           have
           with
           the
           Beast
           ,
           shall
           bee
           the
           most
           grievous
           ,
           and
           before
           it
           can
           bee
           raised
           to
           sit
           in
           glorie
           ,
           it
           must
           in
           som
           sort
           bee
           triumphed
           over
           ,
           and
           trampled
           upon
           by
           the
           world
           .
           Let
           us
           therefore
           not
           deceiv
           our
           selvs
           with
           carnal
           fancies
           ,
           as
           the
           humor
           of
           those
           is
           ,
           who
           feed
           greedily
           upon
           present
           enjoyment
           ,
           and
           make
           themselvs
           drunk
           therewith
           ;
           but
           beeing
           watchful
           and
           sober
           ,
           let
           us
           take
           this
           call
           from
           our
           brethren
           ,
           as
           a
           warning
           ,
           to
           prepare
           to
           suffer
           with
           them
           ,
           the
           last
           encounter
           of
           our
           and
           their
           enemies
           ;
           and
           readily
           to
           communicate
           unto
           them
           ,
           at
           their
           desire
           ,
           the
           graces
           of
           the
           spirit
           ,
           
           which
           are
           given
           to
           us
           to
           profit
           withal
           ,
           that
           wee
           may
           bee
           all
           fitted
           for
           the
           comming
           of
           the
           bridegroom
           ,
           and
           the
           wedding
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           
        
         
           These
           observations
           upon
           the
           passages
           of
           Comenius's
           letter
           in
           reference
           to
           this
           book
           ,
           are
           uppermost
           in
           my
           thoughts
           ,
           and
           obviously
           incident
           to
           the
           contemplation
           of
           our
           present
           condition
           ;
           and
           of
           God's
           counsel
           manifested
           unto
           us
           in
           the
           Revelation
           .
        
         
           Now
           to
           speak
           somwhat
           of
           this
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Apocalyptical
           Prophesie
           ,
           I
           shall
           confess
           that
           it
           come's
           neerer
           to
           my
           sens
           ,
           then
           anie
           which
           I
           remember
           ,
           I
           have
           read
           upon
           that
           part
           of
           God's
           word
           :
           And
           to
           us
           I
           conceiv
           it
           ought
           to
           bee
           the
           more
           commendable
           ,
           and
           of
           better
           acceptance
           ,
           by
           how
           much
           it
           come's
           neerer
           to
           that
           which
           God
           hath
           heretofore
           made
           known
           to
           our
           own
           men
           before
           others
           :
           for
           in
           effect
           I
           finde
           that
           it
           is
           an
           abridgment
           of
           our
           friend
           Mr
           Mede
           (
           now
           with
           God
           )
           his
           interpretation
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           with
           som
           additions
           confirming
           the
           truth
           thereof
           ,
           and
           applying
           the
           same
           to
           the
           present
           State
           of
           affairs
           in
           Europe
           and
           in
           Asia
           ,
           more
           closely
           ,
           and
           circumstantially
           then
           hee
           did
           ,
           to
           shew
           the
           distinct
           events
           which
           are
           shortly
           to
           bee
           fulfilled
           ;
           hee
           hath
           grounded
           all
           upon
           the
           Synchronisms
           which
           God
           directed
           Mr
           Mede
           to
           observ
           ,
           which
           certainly
           are
           demonstrable
           ,
           and
           a
           true
           keie
           to
           the
           opening
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           ;
           and
           hee
           hath
           taken
           
           from
           him
           all
           along
           the
           chief
           heads
           of
           interpretations
           ,
           concerning
           the
           opening
           of
           the
           Seals
           ,
           and
           the
           sounding
           of
           the
           Trumpets
           :
           but
           withal
           ,
           hee
           hath
           somthing
           of
           his
           own
           ,
           which
           is
           considerable
           ,
           as
           a
           more
           special
           keie
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           not
           found
           in
           others
           with
           so
           much
           perspicuitie
           ,
           applyable
           to
           our
           present
           times
           :
           that
           which
           hee
           hath
           concurrent
           with
           Mr
           Mede
           ought
           to
           bee
           look't
           upon
           as
           the
           fruit
           of
           God's
           grace
           sprung
           up
           elswhere
           ,
           from
           the
           seed
           which
           was
           sown
           here
           ,
           whereat
           wee
           should
           rejoice
           ,
           as
           at
           a
           seal
           of
           approbation
           set
           unto
           the
           truth
           ,
           which
           formerly
           was
           attested
           ,
           and
           that
           which
           hee
           hath
           peculiar
           of
           his
           own
           ,
           as
           raised
           upon
           these
           grounds
           ,
           and
           applyed
           circumstantially
           ,
           to
           shew
           the
           time
           when
           Antichrist's
           prevailing
           power
           shall
           com
           to
           an
           end
           ,
           should
           bee
           look't
           upon
           (
           as
           the
           Autor
           modestly
           desire's
           us
           to
           do
           )
           with
           judgment
           and
           discretion
           ;
           to
           examine
           that
           which
           hee
           saith
           without
           prejudice
           and
           partialitie
           ;
           for
           hee
           doth
           not
           arrogate
           unto
           himself
           anie
           infallibilitie
           :
           but
           onely
           hath
           offered
           that
           which
           seemeth
           most
           likely
           to
           him
           to
           bee
           the
           minde
           of
           God
           in
           the
           Prophesie
           :
           whereof
           the
           truth
           will
           soon
           bee
           known
           ,
           whether
           his
           conjecture
           bee
           right
           or
           no
           ,
           becaus
           hee
           bring
           's
           the
           matter
           within
           the
           compass
           of
           five
           years
           to
           bee
           tried
           by
           the
           event
           ;
           which
           is
           no
           long
           time
           of
           exspectation
           ,
           and
           whether
           hee
           hath
           hit
           right
           in
           this
           or
           no
           ,
           it
           can
           bee
           no
           prejudice
           to
           us
           ,
           to
           take
           warning
           to
           bee
           readie
           alwaies
           ;
           for
           wee
           are
           sure
           the
           time
           is
           not
           far
           :
           Let
           this
           bee
           to
           us
           ,
           
             a
             crie
             made
             at
             
             midnight
             ,
          
           
             behold
             the
             Bridgroom
             commeth
             ,
             go
             yee
             out
             to
             meet
             him
             .
          
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           Mysteries
           themselvs
           ,
           which
           are
           conteined
           in
           the
           Apocalyptical
           visions
           ;
           I
           have
           alwaies
           thought
           them
           to
           have
           a
           deeper
           sens
           then
           what
           most
           Interpreters
           have
           endevored
           to
           make
           out
           :
           nor
           have
           I
           ever
           been
           able
           to
           finde
           satisfaction
           in
           the
           attempts
           ,
           which
           som
           (
           as
           Doctor
           Alabaster
           ,
           and
           others
           of
           that
           strain
           )
           have
           made
           to
           laie
           open
           these
           Mysteries
           :
           I
           confess
           Mr
           Mede
           ,
           and
           upon
           his
           grounds
           ,
           this
           unknown
           autor
           ,
           ,
           hath
           made
           the
           visions
           in
           reference
           to
           the
           outward
           events
           ,
           in
           their
           several
           times
           ,
           so
           plain
           ,
           that
           I
           think
           no
           rational
           man
           can
           finde
           caus
           to
           contradict
           what
           they
           saie
           ;
           but
           becaus
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           kinde
           of
           Interpretation
           doth
           depend
           upon
           an
           exact
           knowledg
           of
           the
           Historie
           of
           the
           times
           ,
           and
           the
           Chronologie
           of
           events
           ,
           since
           the
           daies
           of
           Christ
           and
           his
           Apostles
           ;
           and
           upon
           the
           knowledg
           of
           the
           Prophetical
           style
           ,
           which
           doth
           express
           harmonically
           the
           form
           and
           constitution
           of
           the
           societies
           of
           mankinde
           ,
           in
           the
           civil
           and
           Ecclesiastical
           parts
           thereof
           ;
           together
           with
           the
           Changes
           incident
           thereunto
           ,
           by
           the
           similitude
           of
           the
           parts
           ,
           properties
           ,
           and
           Changes
           which
           in
           their
           visions
           to
           them
           appeared
           to
           fall
           out
           ,
           in
           the
           outward
           Heavens
           and
           Earth
           ,
           and
           Sea
           ,
           and
           things
           contemed
           therein
           :
           therefore
           
           the
           certaintie
           of
           that
           interpretation
           is
           not
           obvious
           to
           everie
           one
           ;
           and
           although
           it
           might
           bee
           so
           fully
           made
           out
           ,
           to
           bee
           an
           undoubted
           truth
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           becom
           demonstrable
           to
           everie
           ordinarie
           capacitie
           ;
           yet
           to
           my
           understanding
           ,
           that
           would
           not
           exhaust
           the
           Mysterie
           ,
           which
           the
           Spirit
           of
           God
           doth
           recommend
           unto
           us
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           vision
           ;
           for
           although
           a
           man
           should
           fully
           believ
           ,
           and
           bee
           able
           demonstratively
           to
           prove
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           Accomplishment
           of
           all
           the
           events
           ,
           as
           this
           autor
           doth
           make
           them
           to
           mee
           verie
           probable
           ;
           yet
           hee
           might
           fall
           short
           of
           that
           spiritual
           understanding
           whereunto
           this
           promise
           is
           made
           ,
           
             Chapter
             1.
             vers
             3.
             
             Blessed
             is
             hee
             that
             readeth
             ,
             and
             they
             that
             hear
             the
             words
             of
             this
             Prophesie
             ,
             and
             keep
             those
             things
             which
             are
             written
             therein
             .
          
           I
           shall
           therefore
           saie
           ,
           that
           there
           must
           bee
           a
           certain
           reading
           ,
           and
           hearing
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           ,
           which
           bring
           's
           a
           blessednes
           with
           it
           ,
           so
           that
           hee
           who
           read's
           and
           hear's
           in
           that
           kinde
           ,
           is
           inabled
           to
           keep
           the
           things
           which
           are
           written
           therein
           :
           and
           as
           there
           is
           such
           a
           reading
           and
           hearing
           ,
           so
           there
           must
           bee
           a
           sens
           ,
           and
           an
           interpretation
           of
           that
           sens
           ,
           which
           is
           able
           to
           fit
           a
           man
           for
           the
           keeping
           of
           the
           things
           which
           are
           written
           therein
           :
           and
           if
           there
           must
           bee
           such
           an
           interpretation
           for
           that
           kinde
           of
           hearing
           ,
           then
           there
           must
           also
           bee
           a
           keie
           and
           Rule
           of
           interpretation
           answerable
           to
           that
           sens
           ,
           which
           is
           immediately
           subordinate
           unto
           the
           promise
           of
           blessedness
           ;
           for
           that
           this
           bare
           Historical
           sens
           of
           the
           Accomplishment
           of
           the
           visions
           ,
           is
           not
           that
           whereupon
           properly
           the
           promise
           of
           blessedness
           
           is
           intailed
           is
           cleer
           ,
           becaus
           a
           man
           may
           bee
           fully
           convicted
           of
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           ,
           and
           believ
           it
           ,
           and
           demonstrate
           it
           unto
           others
           ;
           and
           yet
           himself
           not
           keep
           the
           things
           which
           are
           written
           in
           this
           Prophesie
           :
           moreover
           ,
           that
           reading
           and
           hearing
           whereunto
           the
           promise
           of
           a
           blessing
           is
           annexed
           ,
           must
           needs
           bee
           proportionate
           to
           the
           capacitie
           of
           all
           men
           ,
           that
           make
           sincerely
           profession
           of
           Christianitie
           ;
           but
           this
           reading
           and
           hearing
           ,
           which
           is
           thus
           grounded
           upon
           the
           Historical
           and
           Chronological
           interpretation
           of
           the
           visions
           is
           not
           proportionate
           to
           the
           capacitie
           of
           all
           sincere
           professors
           ;
           and
           therefore
           it
           cannot
           bee
           taken
           for
           that
           reading
           and
           hearing
           whereunto
           the
           promise
           of
           a
           blessing
           is
           annexed
           ;
           and
           consequently
           there
           must
           bee
           som
           other
           interpretation
           found
           ,
           which
           is
           immediately
           subordinate
           unto
           this
           effect
           .
        
         
           That
           which
           I
           am
           now
           intimating
           is
           this
           ;
           that
           the
           Prophetical
           visions
           of
           the
           Revelation
           have
           a
           main
           matter
           of
           Mysterie
           in
           them
           ,
           beyond
           what
           is
           here
           ,
           or
           any
           where
           that
           I
           know
           by
           anie
           Interpreter
           directly
           insisted
           upon
           ;
           for
           I
           conceiv
           ,
           this
           which
           is
           here
           delivered
           to
           bee
           indeed
           a
           true
           opening
           of
           the
           Mystical
           vision
           ,
           as
           to
           one
           part
           of
           it
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           prediction
           of
           the
           Historical
           events
           and
           Changes
           of
           things
           ,
           which
           should
           befal
           unto
           the
           Government
           of
           the
           worldlie
           Empire
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           visible
           State
           of
           the
           Church
           therein
           :
           but
           besides
           this
           part
           of
           the
           Mystical
           vision
           ,
           which
           I
           call
           the
           Historical
           presignification
           of
           events
           ;
           there
           is
           in
           the
           matter
           
           presignified
           ,
           a
           deeper
           Mysterie
           wrapt
           up
           ,
           which
           require's
           another
           keie
           to
           open
           it
           ,
           then
           that
           which
           shew's
           the
           bare
           accomplishment
           of
           events
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           ,
           in
           opposition
           to
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           Iniquitie
           ;
           for
           this
           is
           mainly
           to
           bee
           taken
           notice
           of
           in
           the
           events
           which
           are
           foretold
           ,
           and
           do
           fall
           out
           :
           now
           hee
           that
           read's
           ,
           and
           hear's
           ,
           and
           keep
           's
           the
           things
           written
           in
           this
           Prophesie
           concerning
           this
           Mysterie
           ,
           hee
           is
           truly
           blessed
           indeed
           ;
           but
           except
           wee
           can
           read
           and
           hear
           the
           sens
           of
           this
           Mysterie
           in
           it
           ,
           I
           know
           not
           what
           advantage
           the
           knowledg
           of
           the
           Historical
           Mysterie
           can
           bring
           to
           us
           further
           ▪
           then
           to
           convict
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           penman
           thereof
           was
           truly
           inspired
           by
           God
           when
           hee
           wrote
           it
           ,
           becaus
           hee
           did
           truly
           foretel
           things
           to
           com
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           warnings
           ,
           threatnings
           ,
           promises
           ,
           precepts
           ,
           and
           doctrines
           conteined
           therein
           ,
           deserv
           to
           bee
           heeded
           more
           ,
           then
           the
           words
           of
           a
           bare
           man.
           And
           truly
           ,
           although
           I
           have
           much
           valued
           the
           gift
           and
           studie
           of
           those
           that
           have
           set
           themselvs
           ,
           to
           unfold
           by
           the
           observation
           of
           Histories
           the
           Mystical
           presignification
           of
           events
           ;
           yet
           I
           could
           never
           bring
           my
           spirit
           much
           to
           applie
           it self
           to
           anie
           such
           search
           ;
           becaus
           I
           found
           ,
           that
           both
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           this
           book
           ,
           (
           in
           the
           place
           forementioned
           ,
           
             chapter
             1.
             vers
             3.
          
           )
           and
           in
           the
           end
           thereof
           
             (
             chapter
             22.
             vers
             7.
             14.
             
             )
          
           the
           promise
           of
           blessedness
           is
           made
           ,
           to
           another
           kinde
           
           of
           studie
           then
           this
           ;
           and
           the
           name
           and
           scope
           of
           the
           whole
           Prophesie
           ,
           which
           is
           
             the
             Revelation
             of
             Jesus
             Christ
          
           ,
           and
           
             a
             record
             of
             the
             testimonie
             of
             Jesus
             Christ
             (
             chap.
             1.
             vers
             1
             ,
             2.
             )
          
           doth
           import
           to
           mee
           somthing
           more
           ,
           then
           what
           is
           in
           the
           outward
           visible
           events
           ;
           which
           everie
           rational
           man
           ,
           who
           can
           read
           Histories
           ,
           and
           understand
           Symbolical
           speeches
           ,
           is
           able
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           ,
           and
           discern
           to
           bee
           fulfilled
           as
           they
           were
           foretold
           :
           therefore
           although
           ,
           to
           manifest
           the
           Truth
           of
           God
           ,
           the
           events
           are
           very
           useful
           ,
           if
           not
           necessarie
           ,
           to
           bee
           look't
           after
           ;
           yet
           I
           am
           cleer
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           neither
           useful
           to
           us
           ,
           nor
           necessarie
           to
           bee
           known
           ,
           but
           as
           they
           are
           subordinate
           unto
           this
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           ,
           and
           Testimonie
           of
           Christ
           ;
           the
           knowledg
           and
           keeping
           of
           which
           doth
           give
           us
           a
           right
           unto
           the
           tree
           of
           life
           ,
           and
           an
           entrie
           thorow
           the
           Gates
           into
           the
           Citie
           .
           This
           then
           is
           the
           Mysterie
           which
           I
           look
           after
           ;
           viz.
           to
           finde
           the
           Manifestation
           of
           the
           spiritual
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           Nature
           of
           man
           ,
           and
           in
           humane
           societies
           so
           advanced
           ,
           that
           the
           works
           of
           the
           Devil
           are
           destroied
           therein
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           salvation
           of
           Israël
           doth
           thereby
           effectually
           com
           out
           of
           Sion
           ,
           to
           bring
           back
           the
           captivitie
           of
           the
           people
           of
           the
           Lord
           ;
           and
           to
           make
           the
           whole
           Creâtion
           partaker
           of
           the
           glorious
           libertie
           of
           the
           Sons
           of
           God
           ;
           for
           to
           shew
           unto
           the
           eie
           of
           our
           Faith
           ,
           by
           what
           means
           and
           waies
           this
           is
           to
           bee
           brought
           to
           pass
           in
           the
           Regenerate
           souls
           of
           men
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           state
           of
           Regeneration
           in
           the
           outward
           societies
           and
           professions
           of
           believers
           ;
           
           I
           conceiv
           the
           visions
           were
           mainly
           sent
           unto
           the
           Prophet
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           was
           his
           principal
           aim
           ,
           by
           describing
           of
           them
           ,
           to
           declare
           this
           unto
           us
           ;
           if
           then
           by
           the
           representation
           of
           bare
           outward
           events
           ,
           wee
           are
           not
           made
           capable
           of
           partaking
           this
           Mysterie
           ,
           whereby
           Christ
           beeing
           apprehended
           in
           his
           testimonie
           ,
           doth
           becom
           in
           us
           the
           hope
           of
           glorie
           ;
           all
           our
           discoveries
           will
           bee
           of
           no
           great
           advantage
           unto
           our
           happiness
           ,
           nor
           shall
           wee
           reach
           the
           aim
           ,
           which
           the
           Holie
           Ghost
           had
           in
           sending
           this
           Prophesie
           unto
           us
           :
           wee
           must
           therefore
           consider
           what
           the
           keie
           is
           ,
           whereby
           the
           secret
           of
           that
           dispensation
           ,
           which
           bring
           's
           with
           it
           felicitie
           doth
           stand
           ,
           is
           opened
           .
           I
           shall
           now
           briefly
           (
           till
           God
           grant
           a
           fitter
           opportunitie
           to
           bee
           larger
           )
           touch
           this
           matter
           onely
           ,
           to
           let
           you
           know
           ,
           that
           as
           the
           keie
           of
           the
           Historical
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           visions
           is
           the
           discoverie
           of
           Paralel
           events
           by
           Syncronisms
           ,
           and
           the
           understanding
           of
           the
           Symbolical
           speeches
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           wherein
           the
           harmonie
           between
           the
           great
           and
           little
           world
           is
           expressed
           :
           So
           the
           keie
           of
           the
           spiritual
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           visions
           must
           bee
           the
           discoverie
           of
           the
           paralel
           perfections
           ,
           which
           are
           found
           to
           bee
           between
           Christ
           as
           the
           head
           ,
           and
           the
           Church
           as
           the
           Bodie
           ,
           which
           is
           
             the
             fulness
             of
             him
             that
             filleth
             all
             in
             all
          
           ;
           and
           the
           understanding
           of
           the
           harmonical
           properties
           of
           things
           visible
           ,
           and
           invisible
           ,
           wherein
           the
           correspondencie
           between
           
           the
           outward
           and
           inward
           man
           ;
           the
           temporarie
           and
           eternal
           natures
           of
           things
           ;
           and
           the
           state
           of
           true
           life
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           present
           in
           the
           first
           fruits
           ,
           and
           as
           it
           is
           to
           com
           in
           the
           full
           harvest
           ,
           are
           expressed
           .
        
         
           Now
           to
           finde
           these
           keies
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           properly
           fitted
           to
           open
           the
           locks
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           ,
           as
           it
           should
           bee
           our
           studie
           ;
           so
           when
           wee
           have
           found
           them
           ,
           our
           care
           must
           bee
           to
           use
           them
           discreetly
           .
           This
           Prophesie
           is
           not
           shut
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           matter
           ;
           but
           yet
           that
           matter
           is
           not
           obvious
           to
           the
           capacitie
           of
           everie
           one
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           dispensation
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           certain
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           counsel
           of
           God
           ,
           whereby
           wee
           are
           made
           partakers
           of
           the
           Divine
           nature
           ;
           if
           weelook
           upon
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           Truth
           ,
           it
           is
           made
           manifest
           by
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           without
           vail
           ,
           and
           with
           much
           plainness
           of
           speech
           ,
           as
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           
             2
             Cor.
             3.
             vers
             6.
             till
             the
             end
             of
             the
             chapter
          
           ;
           but
           here
           the
           wonderful
           waie
           ,
           and
           manner
           of
           dispensing
           of
           that
           nature
           to
           the
           Church
           ;
           and
           working
           out
           the
           counsel
           of
           God
           in
           all
           the
           world
           ;
           as
           this
           world
           is
           to
           bee
           made
           subordinate
           to
           Christ
           and
           his
           Saints
           ;
           is
           laid
           open
           in
           the
           Apocalyptical
           visions
           ,
           which
           ,
           although
           they
           are
           not
           covered
           with
           anie
           vail
           ,
           which
           doth
           hide
           the
           glorie
           of
           God's
           work
           ,
           as
           Moses's
           face
           was
           :
           yet
           they
           represent
           it
           onely
           to
           us
           as
           in
           a
           glass
           with
           Images
           ,
           wherein
           the
           face
           of
           Christ
           doth
           appear
           by
           waie
           of
           reflexion
           ,
           and
           
           through
           a
           medium
           ,
           till
           wee
           com
           to
           behold
           directly
           his
           glorie
           ,
           face
           to
           face
           ,
           without
           a
           medium
           ,
           and
           to
           apprehend
           him
           in
           it
           ,
           so
           as
           wee
           are
           apprehended
           by
           him
           ;
           wee
           may
           not
           then
           call
           those
           visions
           dark
           Mysteries
           ,
           without
           injurie
           to
           the
           Spirit
           of
           Christ
           ;
           but
           they
           are
           livelie
           figures
           of
           the
           truth
           of
           God's
           presence
           in
           his
           Saints
           ,
           and
           over
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           represent
           it
           to
           those
           that
           have
           eies
           to
           see
           it
           ;
           and
           to
           help
           our
           weak
           eie-sight
           ,
           which
           may
           bee
           dazled
           at
           the
           resplendencie
           of
           the
           glorie
           thereof
           ;
           wee
           should
           make
           use
           of
           the
           prospective
           waies
           which
           are
           offered
           unto
           us
           in
           the
           word
           elswhere
           ;
           which
           are
           applyable
           to
           these
           visions
           ,
           either
           as
           keies
           to
           unlock
           the
           dispensation
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           ,
           conteined
           therein
           ;
           or
           rather
           as
           directing
           and
           multiplying
           glasses
           ,
           through
           which
           our
           understanding
           may
           bee
           led
           ,
           and
           enlarged
           to
           reflect
           upon
           the
           spiritual
           objects
           ,
           properly
           so
           called
           ,
           which
           concern
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           ,
           which
           is
           inwardly
           everlasting
           in
           it self
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Reasonings
           of
           men
           ,
           invisible
           ,
           and
           incomprehensible
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           prospective
           waies
           to
           bee
           made
           use
           of
           ,
           for
           the
           discoverie
           of
           this
           Mysterie
           are
           of
           two
           sorts
           ;
           som
           relate
           unto
           the
           Matter
           it self
           ,
           conteined
           in
           the
           visions
           ;
           som
           to
           the
           dispensation
           of
           that
           matter
           by
           waie
           of
           vision
           ;
           the
           waies
           relating
           to
           the
           matter
           it self
           are
           the
           cleer
           ,
           and
           universal
           Rules
           of
           Scriptural
           and
           Prophetical
           interpretation
           ;
           and
           the
           waies
           relating
           to
           the
           dispensation
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           by
           waie
           of
           vision
           ,
           are
           the
           special
           rules
           
           of
           Interpretation
           leading
           us
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           the
           peculiar
           characters
           and
           circumstances
           of
           each
           vision
           ;
           as
           they
           are
           subordinate
           unto
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           ,
           which
           is
           administred
           by
           Jesus
           Christ
           unto
           the
           end
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           end
           of
           this
           world
           .
        
         
           If
           I
           should
           enter
           upon
           these
           Subiects
           at
           large
           ,
           you
           may
           perceiv
           that
           I
           would
           bee
           obliged
           to
           write
           ,
           not
           a
           brief
           epistolical
           discours
           ,
           as
           now
           my
           purpose
           is
           ,
           but
           a
           whole
           Treatise
           :
           therefore
           I
           shall
           onely
           give
           you
           the
           summarie
           heads
           of
           that
           which
           might
           (
           and
           somtime
           must
           )
           bee
           more
           largely
           spoken
           to
           :
           that
           by
           the
           hints
           which
           shall
           (
           God
           willing
           )
           bee
           suggested
           ,
           you
           may
           exercise
           your
           thoughts
           ,
           to
           dive
           into
           the
           Mysterie
           by
           your self
           ,
           as
           the
           Lord
           shall
           guid
           you
           :
           for
           none
           of
           us
           can
           profit
           in
           these
           things
           any
           further
           then
           God's
           Spirit
           doth
           lead
           us
           forth
           ,
           to
           meditate
           through
           faith
           upon
           Christ
           ;
           and
           to
           improve
           practically
           our
           talents
           about
           the
           work
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           our
           union
           with
           him
           .
        
         
           Thus
           then
           in
           reference
           to
           the
           matter
           ,
           the
           universal
           Rules
           of
           Prophetical
           Interpretation
           are
           generally
           known
           to
           bee
           these
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           ,
           that
           wee
           must
           prophesie
           according
           to
           the
           Analogie
           of
           Faith.
           
             Rom.
             12.
             v.
             6.
          
           
        
         
           The
           second
           ,
           that
           wee
           must
           keep
           the
           form
           of
           sound
           words
           delivered
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           
             2.
             
             Tim.
             1.
             13.
          
           
        
         
           The
           third
           ,
           that
           wee
           must
           analyse
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           resolv
           
           and
           divide
           the
           text
           aright
           ,
           
             2
             Tim.
             2.
             15.
          
           and
           to
           the
           effect
           that
           wee
           may
           bee
           able
           to
           do
           this
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           minde
           of
           the
           Holie
           Ghost
           ,
           the
           Apostle
           Peter
           tel's
           us
           :
           
             2
             Petr.
             1.
             20.
          
           that
           wee
           must
           not
           make
           the
           Scriptures
           speak
           
             in
             a
             private
             sens
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           wee
           must
           not
           analyse
           and
           interpret
           them
           so
           ,
           as
           if
           the
           Prophesies
           thereof
           did
           relate
           onely
           to
           the
           particular
           occasions
           ,
           and
           circumstances
           of
           times
           ,
           of
           places
           ,
           and
           of
           persons
           ,
           in
           ,
           by
           ,
           and
           to
           whom
           they
           were
           at
           first
           uttered
           :
           and
           the
           ground
           why
           they
           may
           not
           bee
           so
           taken
           ;
           but
           must
           bee
           understood
           in
           a
           more
           publick
           ,
           common
           ,
           and
           general
           sens
           ,
           is
           given
           by
           the
           Apostle
           ▪
           
             vers
             21.
          
           becaus
           saith
           hee
           ,
           
             the
             Prophesie
             came
             not
             by
             the
             will
             of
             man
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           it
           was
           not
           anie
           particular
           chois
           ,
           or
           inclination
           of
           humane
           reasoning
           which
           brought
           forth
           the
           prophetical
           (
           that
           is
           the
           scriptural
           )
           word
           ,
           but
           
             they
             were
             moved
             by
             the
             Holie
             Ghost
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           universal
           Spirit
           (
           whose
           wisdom
           is
           above
           all
           private
           concernments
           ;
           and
           doth
           penetrate
           through
           all
           beeing
           from
           the
           center
           to
           the
           circumference
           )
           did
           put
           words
           in
           their
           mouth
           which
           they
           did
           utter
           ,
           and
           therefore
           these
           words
           must
           bee
           understood
           as
           universally
           ,
           and
           abstractedly
           from
           particular
           concernments
           ,
           as
           they
           were
           meant
           by
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           who
           delivered
           them
           unto
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           as
           for
           instance
           ;
           when
           a
           Law
           was
           given
           for
           oxen
           that
           did
           tread
           out
           the
           Corn
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           not
           bee
           muzzeled
           ;
           the
           Apostle
           tel's
           us
           ,
           
             1
             Cor.
             9.
             9.
             10.
          
           that
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Law-giver
           was
           not
           to
           take
           care
           for
           Oxen
           ,
           but
           that
           this
           was
           said
           for
           man's
           sake
           :
           So
           
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           
             Gal.
             4.
             vers
             21.
             till
             the
             end
             ,
          
           doth
           according
           to
           this
           Rule
           ,
           interpret
           the
           Historie
           of
           the
           
             Son
             of
             the
             bondwoman
             ,
             who
             was
             to
             bee
             cast
             out
             with
             her
             Son
             ,
             who
             could
             not
             bee
             heir
             with
             the
             son
             of
             the
             free
             woman
             :
          
           and
           by
           this
           Rule
           ,
           the
           dark
           speeches
           ;
           
             I
             have
             called
             my
             son
             out
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             and
             hee
             shall
             bee
             called
             a
             Nazareth
             ,
             &c.
          
           will
           becom
           plain
           .
        
         
           These
           Rules
           in
           their
           use
           are
           complicated
           ,
           and
           becom
           one
           prospective
           of
           the
           sens
           ,
           although
           their
           Notions
           bee
           thus
           distinguished
           ;
           therefore
           in
           their
           applications
           to
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           if
           they
           do
           not
           go
           hand
           in
           hand
           together
           ,
           wee
           shall
           never
           reach
           the
           sens
           thereof
           ,
           nor
           bee
           able
           to
           divide
           the
           word
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           spiritual
           rationalitie
           thereof
           ,
           nor
           to
           shew
           the
           division
           thereof
           demonstrably
           ,
           either
           to
           our
           own
           ,
           or
           other's
           just
           satisfaction
           ;
           and
           truly
           the
           want
           of
           humilitie
           ,
           and
           ingenuitie
           ,
           to
           seek
           after
           the
           full
           knowledg
           of
           these
           Rules
           ;
           and
           the
           neglect
           of
           the
           right
           use
           of
           them
           ,
           in
           the
           knowledg
           which
           wee
           have
           thereof
           :
           together
           with
           the
           presumptuous
           rashness
           and
           confidence
           ,
           by
           which
           wee
           are
           hurried
           to
           determin
           all
           things
           ,
           according
           to
           our
           own
           self-conceited
           notions
           and
           knowledg
           ;
           which
           wee
           ambitiously
           strive
           with
           tooth
           and
           nail
           to
           maintein
           ,
           is
           the
           caus
           of
           all
           our
           darkness
           and
           confusion
           in
           matters
           of
           Divinitie
           .
        
         
           Here
           again
           ,
           if
           I
           should
           enter
           upon
           this
           Subject
           ,
           to
           shew
           how
           a
           demonstrative
           scriptural
           
           Anaysis
           ,
           by
           the
           spiritual
           use
           of
           right
           reason
           ,
           is
           atteinable
           ,
           and
           will
           bee
           the
           onely
           waie
           ,
           (
           next
           to
           the
           gracious
           and
           immediate
           illumination
           of
           the
           spirit
           ,
           writing
           the
           Law
           in
           the
           hearts
           )
           to
           compose
           our
           controversies
           ,
           to
           end
           our
           needless
           and
           sinful
           waies
           of
           disputing
           ,
           and
           to
           banish
           out
           of
           Christ's
           Church
           ,
           the
           high
           conceit
           of
           our
           Doctoral
           school-Divinitie
           ;
           if
           (
           I
           saie
           )
           I
           should
           enter
           upon
           these
           thoughts
           ,
           you
           see
           that
           not
           a
           Treatise
           onely
           ,
           but
           a
           volume
           should
           bee
           written
           thereof
           to
           do
           it
           satisfactorily
           ;
           but
           I
           am
           resolved
           not
           to
           ingulf
           my self
           beyond
           the
           scope
           of
           this
           present
           discours
           ,
           which
           tend's
           onely
           to
           point
           at
           matters
           ,
           that
           you
           may
           bee
           stirred
           up
           ,
           to
           think
           upon
           them
           by
           your self
           :
           therefore
           thus
           much
           shall
           suffice
           for
           the
           finding
           of
           the
           universal
           keie
           of
           all
           prophetical
           Mysteries
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           rationally
           discoverable
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ;
           yet
           above
           this
           ,
           though
           not
           without
           it
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           neerer
           prospect
           to
           bee
           had
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           in
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           which
           without
           such
           a
           disquirie
           doth
           lead
           us
           thereinto
           .
           This
           neerer
           prospect
           is
           the
           inward
           
             Testimonie
             of
             Jesus
          
           ,
           in
           whom
           as
           in
           the
           fountain
           are
           
             hidden
             all
             the
             treasures
             of
             wisdom
             and
             of
             knowledg
             ,
          
           and
           who
           is
           to
           all
           that
           believ
           in
           him
           the
           immediate
           
             wisdom
             and
             the
             power
             of
             God.
          
           Therefore
           the
           Angel
           who
           brought
           the
           great
           vision
           of
           the
           Marriage
           of
           the
           Lamb
           unto
           John
           (
           who
           thereat
           was
           so
           
           ravished
           that
           hee
           intended
           to
           have
           worshipped
           the
           Angel
           )
           put
           's
           him
           in
           minde
           (
           to
           take
           him
           off
           from
           giving
           him
           anie
           divine
           worship
           )
           that
           hee
           was
           no
           more
           but
           one
           of
           his
           equals
           ,
           who
           had
           the
           Testimonie
           of
           Jesus
           ;
           for
           (
           saith
           hee
           )
           
             the
             Testimonie
             of
             Jesus
             is
             the
             spirit
             of
             Prophesie
             .
          
           Such
           then
           as
           have
           this
           Testimonie
           dwelling
           in
           them
           ,
           have
           this
           Spirit
           ;
           and
           by
           this
           Spirit
           they
           may
           bee
           led
           (
           if
           God
           bee
           pleased
           so
           to
           carrie
           them
           )
           a
           neerer
           waie
           then
           this
           is
           ,
           to
           see
           in
           Jesus
           himself
           the
           whole
           Mysterie
           ,
           and
           to
           partake
           of
           it
           as
           from
           him
           ,
           in
           the
           wisdom
           and
           power
           of
           God
           ;
           yet
           this
           must
           bee
           noted
           ,
           that
           although
           they
           should
           bee
           admitted
           to
           this
           neerer
           waie
           for
           som
           special
           fits
           ;
           nevertheless
           they
           shall
           still
           bee
           led
           so
           ,
           as
           that
           their
           Testimonie
           must
           bee
           liable
           (
           in
           case
           of
           doubt
           proposed
           by
           others
           ,
           or
           incident
           to
           themselvs
           )
           to
           bee
           examined
           by
           the
           Testimonie
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ;
           and
           their
           Spirit
           must
           bee
           subject
           to
           bee
           tried
           not
           onely
           by
           the
           Spirit
           which
           was
           in
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           Prophets
           and
           Evangelists
           .
           
             1
             John
             1.
             3.
             and
             chap.
             4.
             6.
             and
             John
             17.
             20
          
           but
           by
           the
           spirit
           which
           is
           in
           their
           brethren
           the
           Prophets
           of
           these
           times
           ,
           who
           have
           the
           testimonie
           of
           Jesus
           no
           less
           then
           they
           .
           
             1
             Cor.
             14.
             29
             ,
             30
             ,
             31
             ,
             32.
             
          
        
         
           Here
           then
           to
           com
           neerer
           by
           the
           address
           of
           these
           Rules
           ,
           to
           the
           prospect
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           represented
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           let
           us
           make
           use
           of
           the
           keie
           which
           the
           Angel
           hath
           given
           us
           ,
           which
           is
           that
           wee
           should
           observ
           in
           
           the
           peculiar
           circumstances
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           and
           scope
           thereof
           ,
           and
           in
           all
           the
           characters
           of
           each
           manifestation
           ;
           the
           special
           relation
           which
           they
           have
           to
           Jesus
           ,
           to
           bear
           witness
           of
           him
           ;
           for
           so
           much
           as
           each
           dispensation
           by
           it's
           peculiar
           Characters
           ,
           shall
           bee
           found
           to
           speak
           of
           this
           testimonie
           ,
           so
           much
           it
           doth
           reveal
           unto
           us
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           godliness
           .
           If
           then
           wee
           ought
           not
           to
           proceed
           without
           an
           eie
           to
           our
           fore-mentioned
           Rules
           (
           for
           although
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           already
           hinted
           ,
           the
           testimonie
           of
           Jesus
           in
           our
           Spirit
           ,
           is
           the
           Spirit
           of
           Prophesie
           ,
           which
           may
           somtime
           in
           the
           enlightned
           frame
           of
           a
           believing
           soul
           swallow
           up
           all
           the
           rational
           Acts
           of
           contemplation
           by
           a
           direct
           intuitive
           representation
           of
           the
           light
           of
           life
           in
           Christ
           ;
           yet
           that
           Testimonie
           is
           neither
           in
           it self
           inconsistent
           with
           ,
           nor
           in
           the
           orderlie
           waie
           of
           declaring
           it
           unto
           others
           ,
           to
           bee
           separated
           from
           the
           prospective
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           ,
           which
           is
           atteinable
           by
           the
           Rules
           of
           scriptural
           Interpretation
           )
           if
           then
           (
           I
           saie
           )
           wee
           ought
           not
           to
           put
           these
           Rules
           out
           of
           our
           eie
           ;
           then
           let
           us
           take
           up
           ,
           and
           carrie
           along
           with
           us
           ,
           as
           the
           ground
           of
           our
           faith
           ,
           the
           Rule
           unto
           which
           ,
           in
           our
           apprehension
           ,
           all
           these
           Prophetical
           visions
           in
           their
           Mystical
           circumstances
           are
           to
           bee
           made
           proportionate
           ,
           which
           is
           that
           Apostolical
           Testimonie
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           Godliness
           ,
           which
           hee
           cal's
           great
           and
           without
           all
           Controversie
           in
           
             1
             Tim.
             3.
             16.
             
             That
             
             God
             was
             manifest
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             justified
             in
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             seen
             of
             Angels
             ,
             preached
             unto
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             believed
             on
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             received
             up
             into
             glorie
             :
          
           to
           these
           heads
           then
           of
           the
           knowledg
           of
           Christ
           ,
           which
           in
           plain
           ,
           proper
           ,
           and
           significant
           words
           express
           the
           summe
           of
           all
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           bee
           known
           of
           him
           ;
           our
           sens
           of
           this
           whole
           Prophesie
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           the
           parts
           thereof
           must
           bee
           proportionate
           ;
           so
           that
           when
           wee
           look
           upon
           the
           visions
           ,
           wee
           must
           cast
           our
           eie
           at
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           to
           observ
           ,
           how
           both
           in
           the
           whole
           ,
           and
           parts
           that
           which
           is
           offered
           therein
           ,
           is
           all
           along
           relative
           hereunto
           .
        
         
           If
           therefore
           you
           will
           first
           look
           upon
           the
           whole
           in
           the
           bulk
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           and
           scope
           of
           the
           Prophesie
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           general
           contexture
           ,
           and
           tenor
           of
           the
           visions
           thereof
           ;
           you
           shall
           finde
           nothing
           els
           mentioned
           therein
           ;
           but
           what
           is
           directly
           tending
           to
           make
           out
           the
           heads
           of
           this
           mysterie
           of
           God
           in
           Christ
           ,
           that
           hee
           may
           bee
           known
           more
           and
           more
           fully
           unto
           the
           world
           ;
           till
           hee
           bee
           so
           fully
           revealed
           that
           all
           the
           earth
           shall
           bee
           filled
           with
           the
           knowledg
           of
           his
           name
           ,
           even
           as
           the
           waters
           that
           cover
           the
           Sea.
           For
           by
           the
           contexture
           of
           the
           Apocalyptical
           visions
           it
           is
           not
           onely
           demonstrable
           ,
           that
           this
           promise
           shall
           bee
           accomplished
           ;
           but
           moreover
           ,
           the
           waie
           how
           it
           shall
           bee
           brought
           about
           is
           plainly
           discoverable
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           Bulk
           of
           the
           matter
           and
           scope
           of
           everie
           
           book
           rationally
           written
           ,
           may
           bee
           gathered
           ordinarily
           from
           the
           Title
           ,
           the
           Preface
           ,
           the
           Conclusion
           ,
           and
           the
           main
           heads
           of
           matters
           hand
           led
           therein
           ,
           if
           their
           contexture
           and
           coherence
           bee
           observed
           with
           a
           respect
           unto
           their
           main
           scope
           .
           Let
           us
           then
           look
           briefly
           upon
           these
           things
           ,
           in
           this
           book
           ,
           to
           see
           what
           light
           they
           will
           afford
           us
           .
        
         
           The
           Title
           tell
           's
           us
           ,
           
             vers
             1.
          
           that
           the
           book
           contein's
           a
           
             Revelation
             of
             Jesus
             Christ
          
           .
           Jesus
           Christ
           then
           is
           the
           subject-matter
           whereof
           it
           speak's
           ;
           and
           to
           make
           him
           manifest
           is
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           book
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           called
           a
           Revealing
           of
           him
           ,
           and
           that
           this
           matter
           and
           scope
           may
           bee
           the
           more
           heeded
           ;
           to
           this
           title
           of
           the
           book
           ,
           three
           things
           are
           further
           added
           ,
           who
           the
           Autor
           of
           this
           Revelation
           of
           Christ
           is
           :
           to
           what
           use
           it
           is
           given
           him
           :
           and
           by
           what
           means
           it
           is
           put
           forth
           to
           this
           use
           .
        
         
           The
           autor
           of
           it
           is
           God
           ,
           
             which
             God
             gave
             him
          
           ,
           which
           add's
           to
           the
           matter
           and
           scope
           an
           obligation
           of
           belief
           ,
           upon
           a
           discoverie
           of
           divine
           properties
           to
           bee
           seen
           therein
           .
        
         
           The
           use
           for
           which
           God
           gave
           it
           to
           Christ
           is
           ;
           
             to
             shew
             unto
             his
             servants
             the
             things
             which
             must
             shortly
             com
             to
             pass
             ,
          
           which
           is
           a
           neerer
           scope
           relating
           to
           us
           ,
           as
           wee
           are
           obliged
           to
           respect
           the
           knowledg
           of
           the
           glorie
           of
           Christ
           .
        
         
           The
           means
           by
           which
           the
           manifestation
           of
           
           Christ
           is
           put
           forth
           to
           this
           use
           are
           ,
           
             that
             hee
             sent
             and
             signified
             it
             by
             his
             Angel
             unto
             his
             Servant
             John
             ,
          
           by
           all
           which
           wee
           see
           ,
           that
           here
           nothing
           is
           aimed
           at
           ,
           but
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           godlines
           spoken
           of
           by
           Paul
           ,
           and
           our
           Salvation
           in
           partaking
           of
           the
           knowledg
           thereof
           .
        
         
           Next
           to
           the
           Title
           the
           Preface
           is
           observable
           it
           extend's
           from
           
             vers
             2.
             till
             8.
          
           and
           doth
           address
           the
           book
           ,
           either
           generally
           to
           all
           ,
           or
           particularly
           to
           the
           seven
           Churches
           .
           The
           general
           preface
           tell
           's
           us
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           what
           John
           did
           in
           declaring
           this
           Revelation
           ,
           viz.
           
             hee
             bare
             record
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Testimonie
             of
             Jesus
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             things
             which
             hee
             saw
             .
             vers
             2.
          
           for
           the
           word
           of
           God
           brought
           with
           it
           to
           the
           ears
           of
           his
           minde
           ,
           the
           Testimonie
           of
           Jesus
           ;
           and
           that
           Testimonie
           was
           clothed
           ,
           and
           represented
           to
           his
           eies
           by
           the
           things
           which
           hee
           saw
           :
           and
           of
           these
           as
           an
           ear
           and
           eie-witness
           of
           the
           Manifestation
           of
           Christ
           ,
           hee
           did
           bear
           record
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           it
           tell
           's
           us
           of
           what
           use
           and
           Importance
           this
           record
           of
           John
           is
           ,
           to
           all
           that
           read
           and
           hear
           ,
           and
           keep
           the
           things
           declared
           therein
           ;
           viz.
           it
           will
           make
           them
           blessed
           .
           
             v.
             3.
          
           all
           which
           is
           again
           fully
           relative
           to
           the
           fore-mentioned
           Mysterie
           of
           Godliness
           ,
           and
           our
           Salvation
           thereby
           .
        
         
           The
           particular
           Preface
           to
           the
           seven
           Churches
           ,
           tell
           's
           us
           :
           that
           this
           book
           was
           peculiarly
           inscribed
           and
           sent
           unto
           them
           by
           John
           ;
           in
           the
           name
           of
           the
           Father
           ,
           of
           his
           seven
           Spirits
           ,
           
             vers
             4.
          
           and
           of
           Jesus
           Christ
           ,
           who
           is
           described
           .
        
         
         
           First
           ,
           by
           the
           properties
           and
           effects
           of
           his
           comming
           into
           the
           flesh
           ,
           which
           were
           to
           bee
           ,
           First
           ,
           the
           
             faithful
             VVitness
             (
             viz.
          
           of
           the
           Father's
           wisdom
           ,
           Truth
           ,
           Power
           ,
           and
           love
           .
           )
           Secondly
           ,
           
             the
             first
             begotten
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             Prince
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             earth
             (
             viz.
          
           by
           suffering
           and
           rising
           again
           ;
           and
           receiving
           the
           Kingdom
           in
           that
           nature
           which
           suffered
           and
           ●ose
           again
           .
           )
           Thirdly
           ,
           to
           shew
           his
           love
           to
           us
           ,
           
             who
             loved
             us
          
           ,
           by
           redeeming
           us
           ,
           
             and
             washed
             us
             from
             our
             sins
             in
             his
             own
             blood
             ,
             v.
             5.
          
           and
           by
           exalting
           us
           to
           a
           glorious
           estate
           ;
           
             and
             hath
             made
             us
             Kings
             and
             Priests
             unto
             God
             ,
             and
             his
             Father
             :
          
           for
           which
           wee
           are
           bound
           to
           give
           him
           glorie
           and
           prais
           ;
           
             to
             him
             bee
             glorie
             and
             honor
             for
             ever
             and
             ever
             .
             Amen
             .
             vers
             6.
             
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           hee
           is
           described
           by
           the
           properties
           and
           effects
           of
           his
           comming
           again
           from
           heaven
           to
           judgment
           ,
           wherein
           hee
           shall
           manifest
           himself
           as
           man
           to
           all
           men
           ,
           even
           to
           those
           who
           have
           pierced
           him
           .
           
             vers
             7.
          
           and
           as
           God
           blessed
           for
           ever
           and
           almightie
           .
           
             Vers
             8.
          
           
        
         
           Upon
           this
           Preface
           and
           address
           of
           the
           book
           (
           wherein
           wee
           see
           nothing
           but
           what
           is
           most
           fully
           consonant
           to
           the
           fore-named
           Mysterie
           )
           doth
           follow
           the
           Narrative
           of
           the
           visions
           from
           
             vers
             9.
             of
             chap.
             1.
             till
             vers
             6.
             of
             chap.
             22.
             8.
          
           and
           thereupon
           the
           conclusion
           of
           the
           book
           doth
           shut
           up
           the
           visions
           ,
           declaring
           in
           
             chap.
             22.
          
           
        
         
           First
           ,
           the
           certaintie
           of
           the
           things
           conteined
           therein
           ,
           
             vers
             6.
          
           with
           the
           importance
           and
           use
           thereof
           ,
           
             vers
             7.
          
           
        
         
         
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           effect
           which
           the
           manifestation
           thereof
           wrought
           upon
           
             John
             ,
             viz.
          
           that
           it
           moved
           him
           to
           such
           admiration
           ,
           that
           hee
           was
           inclined
           to
           worship
           the
           Angel
           ,
           
             vers
             8.
          
           but
           that
           the
           Angel
           forbad
           him
           to
           do
           so
           ,
           becaus
           hee
           acknowledged
           himself
           to
           bee
           nothing
           more
           then
           they
           who
           should
           keep
           the
           sayings
           of
           this
           book
           .
           
             v.
             9.
          
           
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           command
           which
           hee
           received
           ,
           not
           to
           seal
           the
           Prophesies
           of
           this
           book
           ,
           and
           the
           reasons
           wherefore
           ,
           
             v.
             10.
             till
             16.
          
           
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           the
           Autoritie
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           is
           held
           forth
           in
           the
           conclusion
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           By
           the
           Autor
           thereof
           who
           is
           Christ
           .
           
             vers
             16.
          
           
        
         
           2.
           
           By
           the
           Approbation
           of
           the
           intent
           thereof
           ,
           which
           it
           hath
           from
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           from
           the
           Bride
           ,
           from
           all
           believers
           ,
           and
           from
           all
           that
           desire
           the
           good
           things
           promised
           therein
           .
           
             v.
             17.
          
           
        
         
           3.
           
           By
           the
           perfection
           thereof
           which
           is
           such
           ,
           that
           nothing
           may
           bee
           added
           to
           it
           ,
           nor
           taken
           from
           it
           .
           
             vers
             18
             ,
             19
             ,
             20
             ,
             21.
             
          
        
         
           By
           all
           which
           wee
           see
           that
           the
           matter
           and
           scope
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           Bulk
           thereof
           ,
           is
           none
           other
           ,
           but
           to
           set
           forth
           the
           glorie
           of
           Christ
           ,
           as
           manifested
           in
           the
           flesh
           ,
           and
           justified
           in
           the
           Spirit
           ;
           as
           seen
           of
           Angels
           ,
           and
           preached
           unto
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           as
           believed
           on
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           exalted
           by
           the
           perfection
           of
           his
           Church
           ,
           (
           which
           hee
           filleth
           with
           his
           glorie
           )
           unto
           the
           fulness
           of
           glorie
           ,
           both
           in
           himself
           ,
           and
           in
           all
           his
           members
           .
           Wee
           conclude
           therefore
           ,
           that
           the
           whole
           Mysterie
           of
           Godliness
           is
           intended
           here
           to
           bee
           manifested
           
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           waie
           ,
           by
           which
           it
           is
           to
           bee
           carried
           on
           unto
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           fully
           accomplished
           at
           the
           end
           thereof
           ,
           by
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           that
           Kingdom
           ,
           which
           hee
           erected
           in
           the
           nature
           of
           man
           ,
           over
           the
           whole
           Creätion
           ,
           by
           the
           renewing
           of
           all
           things
           for
           the
           elect's
           sake
           ,
           to
           put
           them
           in
           full
           possession
           thereof
           ,
           as
           is
           promised
           ,
           
             Revel
             ▪
             21.
             5
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
          
           and
           by
           uniting
           them
           to
           God
           for
           ever
           ,
           
             Revelations
             22.
             4.
             5.
          
           
        
         
           This
           beeing
           the
           full
           intent
           and
           purpose
           of
           the
           Prophesie
           ;
           let
           us
           now
           briefly
           look
           upon
           the
           heads
           of
           matters
           handled
           therein
           ,
           to
           see
           how
           suitable
           the
           particulars
           are
           to
           reach
           this
           main
           aim
           ,
           and
           bow
           this
           design
           is
           thereby
           made
           known
           to
           bee
           carried
           on
           .
        
         
           The
           things
           handled
           in
           the
           Prophesie
           are
           of
           three
           kinds
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           in
           the
           first
           vision
           by
           Christ
           himself
           commanded
           to
           bee
           written
           ,
           
             chap.
             1.
             vers
             19.
             
             Write
          
           (
           saith
           hee
           )
           
             the
             things
             which
             thou
             hast
             seen
             ;
             and
             the
             things
             which
             are
             ;
             and
             the
             things
             which
             shall
             bee
             hereafter
             .
          
        
         
           The
           things
           which
           hee
           had
           seen
           are
           written
           ,
           
             Ch●p
             .
             1.
          
           
        
         
           The
           things
           which
           then
           were
           ,
           are
           written
           in
           
             chap.
             2.
             and
             3.
          
           
        
         
           And
           the
           things
           which
           should
           bee
           afterward
           are
           from
           
             chap.
             4.
             till
             chap.
             22.
             vers
             6.
             
          
        
         
           The
           things
           which
           John
           saw
           in
           
             chap.
             1.
          
           are
           
           Christ's
           presence
           with
           his
           Churches
           ,
           revealed
           in
           the
           first
           vision
           ,
           whereof
           the
           properties
           shew
           him
           to
           bee
           .
        
         
           First
           the
           Mediator
           and
           High-Priest
           of
           the
           Churches
           ,
           administring
           the
           affairs
           thereof
           in
           things
           perteining
           to
           God
           ,
           by
           his
           walking
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           the
           golden
           Candlesticks
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           King
           who
           hath
           all
           power
           to
           support
           the
           Rulers
           thereof
           ;
           as
           holding
           the
           seven
           Stars
           of
           the
           Churches
           in
           his
           right
           hand
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           Prophet
           of
           the
           Churches
           ,
           who
           dispenseth
           the
           word
           of
           God
           unto
           them
           ,
           which
           as
           a
           two-edged
           sword
           com's
           out
           of
           his
           mouth
           .
           
             chap.
             1.
             vers
             .
             12.
             till
             17.
             
          
        
         
           These
           are
           the
           chief
           properties
           of
           his
           presence
           relating
           to
           the
           Churches
           ,
           which
           are
           heightned
           with
           other
           circumstantial
           perfections
           of
           his
           head
           ,
           eies
           ,
           feet
           ,
           and
           whole
           countenance
           ,
           &c.
           and
           withal
           ,
           there
           are
           other
           properties
           of
           glorie
           expressed
           ,
           which
           relate
           to
           his
           person
           in
           himself
           considered
           ;
           by
           which
           hee
           is
           manifested
           to
           
             bee
             the
             first
             and
             the
             last
             ,
             hee
             that
             was
             dead
             and
             is
             alive
             ,
             and
             living
             for
             evermore
             ,
          
           and
           having
           
             all
             power
             of
             hell
             and
             death
             .
             vers
             11.
             17
             ,
             18.
             
          
        
         
           This
           vision
           then
           tend's
           cleerly
           ,
           to
           set
           him
           forth
           in
           his
           Mediatorie
           office
           by
           the
           properties
           of
           his
           inherent
           and
           relative
           glorie
           .
        
         
           
             The
             things
             which
             then
             were
             ,
             are
             the
             seven
             Churches
             under
             Christ's
          
           What
           Christ's
           intent
           in
           the
           seven
           Epistles
           written
           to
           the
           Churches
           is
           ,
           and
           how
           it
           is
           gathered
           from
           the
           matter
           and
           words
           of
           them
           .
           
           care
           and
           administration
           ,
           which
           are
           set
           forth
           in
           the
           seven
           Epistles
           ,
           which
           by
           Christ's
           appointment
           and
           inditement
           are
           written
           unto
           them
           ,
           
             in
             Chap.
             2.
             
             &
             3.
          
           wherein
           I
           conceiv
           ,
           that
           under
           the
           Characters
           of
           perfection
           ,
           and
           imperfection
           given
           to
           the
           Churches
           ,
           and
           under
           the
           threatnings
           and
           promises
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           admonitions
           ,
           reproofs
           ,
           exhortations
           ,
           and
           commandements
           annexed
           thereunto
           ;
           all
           the
           degrees
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           defection
           from
           Grace
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           progress
           in
           Grace
           ,
           which
           our
           nature
           is
           capable
           of
           ;
           together
           with
           the
           changeable
           conditions
           ,
           under
           which
           the
           Churches
           should
           bee
           ,
           till
           the
           Marriage
           of
           the
           Lamb
           com
           to
           pass
           ,
           are
           set
           forth
           .
           For
           if
           wee
           should
           call
           to
           minde
           the
           Rule
           of
           scriptural
           interpretation
           ,
           heretofore
           mentioned
           ;
           that
           
             no
             Prophesie
             is
             of
             private
             interpretation
          
           ;
           it
           will
           appear
           from
           the
           words
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           that
           these
           Epistles
           are
           by
           Christ
           intended
           ,
           not
           onely
           to
           those
           particular
           Churches
           ,
           or
           to
           the
           Angels
           thereof
           alone
           ,
           which
           are
           named
           ;
           but
           to
           all
           the
           Churches
           ,
           which
           then
           were
           elswhere
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           which
           should
           bee
           in
           all
           ages
           till
           his
           second
           comming
           ;
           and
           to
           all
           the
           men
           of
           any
           spiritual
           understanding
           that
           should
           hear
           thereof
           till
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           .
           Becaus
           it
           is
           not
           onely
           certain
           that
           Christ
           still
           hold's
           the
           seven
           Stars
           in
           his
           right
           hand
           ,
           and
           walk's
           between
           the
           seven
           Candlesticks
           ,
           and
           speak's
           unto
           them
           ;
           but
           it
           is
           evident
           by
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           promises
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           universally
           appliable
           unto
           all
           the
           professors
           ,
           in
           all
           ages
           ,
           who
           
           shall
           overcom
           ,
           and
           bee
           faithful
           unto
           the
           end
           and
           the
           peculiar
           admonitions
           at
           the
           close
           of
           everie
           Epistle
           do
           intimate
           no
           less
           ;
           for
           to
           my
           understanding
           these
           words
           ,
           
             Hee
             that
             hath
             an
             ear
             ,
             let
             him
             hear
             what
             the
             Spirit
             saith
             unto
             the
             Churches
          
           ;
           doth
           speak
           this
           much
           ;
           that
           others
           ,
           even
           all
           who
           ever
           should
           hear
           the
           tenor
           of
           these
           Epistles
           ,
           ought
           to
           think
           themselvs
           spoken
           to
           ,
           and
           concerned
           therein
           ;
           although
           they
           should
           bee
           no
           visible
           members
           of
           these
           particular
           Churches
           .
           For
           what
           els
           can
           bee
           the
           meaning
           of
           that
           expression
           ,
           
             hee
             that
             hath
             an
             ear
          
           ;
           but
           that
           everie
           one
           should
           take
           that
           to
           himself
           which
           is
           said
           of
           and
           to
           these
           ?
           And
           then
           if
           wee
           observ
           the
           expression
           to
           run
           in
           the
           plural
           number
           ;
           
             what
             the
             Spirit
             saith
             unto
             the
             Churches
             ,
          
           this
           will
           make
           it
           yet
           more
           manifest
           ;
           that
           these
           seven
           are
           here
           put
           in
           stead
           of
           all
           :
           for
           no
           doubt
           the
           Spirit
           then
           spake
           effectually
           ,
           and
           doth
           still
           speak
           to
           more
           Churches
           then
           to
           these
           :
           and
           therefore
           wee
           may
           conclude
           ,
           that
           the
           things
           spoken
           off
           to
           them
           are
           taken
           as
           relative
           unto
           all
           ,
           both
           men
           and
           Churches
           ,
           not
           at
           that
           time
           onely
           ,
           but
           at
           all
           times
           ,
           so
           long
           as
           the
           seven
           Candlesticks
           should
           bee
           on
           earth
           ,
           and
           the
           Spirit
           hath
           a
           voice
           to
           speak
           unto
           them
           ;
           for
           
             to
             daie
             if
             you
             will
             hear
             his
             voice
             ,
          
           out
           of
           
             Psal
             .
             95.
          
           was
           not
           onely
           meant
           for
           that
           daie
           ,
           but
           for
           this
           also
           ,
           as
           the
           Apostle
           make's
           it
           plain
           ,
           
             Heb.
             3.
          
           
           If
           then
           the
           narrow
           limits
           of
           this
           discours
           would
           give
           mee
           leav
           ;
           it
           might
           bee
           made
           out
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           cases
           of
           these
           seven
           Stars
           and
           Churches
           as
           here
           they
           are
           described
           ;
           all
           the
           varieties
           
           of
           the
           conditions
           of
           Professors
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           fundamental
           defects
           of
           Church-societies
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           Churches
           which
           have
           been
           since
           the
           Apostle's
           times
           ,
           are
           set
           forth
           ;
           and
           that
           in
           the
           promises
           made
           unto
           them
           ,
           all
           the
           degrees
           of
           perfection
           atteinable
           in
           this
           life
           by
           single
           believers
           ,
           or
           Societies
           ,
           are
           expressed
           ;
           but
           this
           would
           bee
           a
           matter
           of
           inlargement
           beyond
           my
           present
           purpose
           :
           I
           shall
           therefore
           leav
           it
           till
           another
           season
           ;
           onely
           this
           may
           bee
           further
           observed
           as
           a
           translation
           from
           this
           first
           to
           the
           second
           vision
           :
           that
           in
           the
           first
           ,
           John
           saw
           the
           Administration
           of
           Christ's
           Kingdom
           ,
           as
           then
           it
           was
           on
           earth
           :
           but
           in
           the
           following
           vision
           which
           begin's
           chapter
           4th
           ,
           hee
           is
           taken
           up
           from
           earth
           into
           Heaven
           ,
           to
           see
           the
           administration
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           there
           also
           ,
           and
           from
           thence
           how
           it
           should
           bee
           managed
           over
           the
           whole
           world
           for
           the
           Churche's
           sake
           in
           time
           to
           com
           :
           So
           that
           wee
           ought
           to
           take
           notice
           that
           the
           Manifestation
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           in
           him
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           Godliness
           doth
           fill
           not
           onely
           the
           Churches
           on
           Earth
           ,
           but
           the
           Church
           also
           in
           Heaven
           ;
           and
           that
           God
           by
           him
           ,
           as
           hee
           is
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           both
           in
           heaven
           and
           earth
           ,
           doth
           govern
           the
           world
           for
           Christ's
           interest
           ,
           towards
           the
           fulfilling
           of
           his
           own
           counsel
           ;
           which
           tend's
           mainly
           to
           reveal
           the
           glorie
           of
           Christ
           over
           all
           ,
           and
           the
           felicitie
           of
           those
           that
           partake
           with
           him
           in
           his
           glorie
           ;
           as
           also
           by
           what
           means
           the
           world
           is
           subdued
           under
           him
           ,
           and
           conquered
           by
           him
           for
           the
           good
           of
           his
           Church
           ;
           
           for
           this
           is
           the
           issue
           of
           all
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           close
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           doth
           appear
           by
           the
           coming
           down
           of
           the
           
             New
             Jerusalem
          
           from
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           the
           making
           of
           all
           things
           new
           ,
           to
           give
           unto
           the
           Saints
           their
           inheritance
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           vision
           then
           doth
           shew
           distinctly
           four
           things
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           what
           the
           frame
           and
           constitution
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           Heaven
           is
           ;
           How
           it
           is
           ordered
           round
           about
           the
           throne
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           set
           in
           his
           presence
           that
           it
           should
           take
           notice
           of
           the
           passages
           of
           his
           glorie
           ,
           to
           acknowledg
           and
           declare
           the
           same
           .
           
             chap.
             4.
          
           
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           what
           the
           administration
           of
           affairs
           in
           heaven
           ,
           and
           Government
           of
           the
           Church
           is
           over
           the
           world
           ;
           how
           the
           decrees
           and
           counsels
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           by
           whom
           they
           are
           brought
           to
           an
           issue
           ?
           Here
           it
           is
           shewed
           unto
           the
           Prophet
           ;
           that
           the
           whole
           administration
           of
           the
           government
           is
           put
           into
           the
           hand
           ,
           and
           upon
           the
           shoulder
           of
           Jesus
           Christ
           alone
           ;
           who
           by
           the
           Sacrifice
           of
           himself
           ,
           as
           of
           a
           lamb
           without
           spot
           ,
           did
           meritoously
           purchase
           to
           himself
           this
           honor
           ;
           and
           by
           his
           seven
           eies
           of
           wisdom
           ,
           and
           seven
           horns
           of
           almightie
           power
           ,
           is
           alone
           able
           to
           discharge
           so
           great
           a
           Trust
           ,
           as
           to
           open
           all
           the
           Seals
           of
           God's
           decrees
           in
           their
           due
           times
           and
           seasons
           ,
           concerning
           the
           government
           of
           the
           whole
           world
           for
           the
           good
           of
           his
           Church
           .
           
             chap.
             5.
          
           
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           what
           changes
           are
           brought
           forth
           in
           the
           affairs
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           what
           the
           condition
           
           of
           the
           Church
           and
           Saints
           is
           therein
           ;
           by
           the
           opening
           of
           six
           of
           the
           Seals
           ,
           where
           is
           shewed
           ,
           how
           after
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           through
           the
           world
           ;
           great
           troubles
           and
           terrible
           wars
           arise
           in
           the
           earth
           amongst
           men
           :
           in
           which
           the
           witnesses
           of
           Christ
           are
           slain
           ,
           and
           lie
           as
           sacrifices
           at
           his
           Altar
           ;
           but
           they
           are
           comforted
           with
           the
           hope
           of
           just
           vengeance
           to
           bee
           executed
           upon
           the
           earth
           for
           their
           sakes
           ,
           after
           a
           season
           ;
           and
           the
           enemies
           of
           Christianitie
           are
           terrified
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           execution
           of
           Christ's
           wrath
           against
           them
           
             chap.
             6.
          
           
           And
           lest
           the
           Judgments
           which
           were
           to
           bee
           executed
           against
           the
           enemies
           ,
           should
           take
           hold
           of
           the
           friends
           of
           Christ
           ;
           there
           is
           a
           careful
           Provision
           made
           for
           the
           preservation
           of
           these
           from
           danger
           ,
           and
           the
           Hopes
           of
           future
           glorie
           are
           assured
           unto
           them
           by
           the
           first
           fruits
           thereof
           .
           
             chap.
             7.
          
           
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           what
           the
           destruction
           is
           which
           at
           the
           opening
           of
           the
           seventh
           Seal
           is
           brought
           upon
           the
           world
           ;
           and
           what
           the
           glorie
           and
           settlement
           is
           ,
           which
           is
           brought
           unto
           the
           Church
           of
           Saints
           therein
           :
           for
           the
           seventh
           Seal
           doth
           contein
           ,
           and
           produce
           all
           what
           ever
           doth
           follow
           till
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Here
           then
           seven
           Angels
           with
           seven
           Trumpets
           ,
           are
           appointed
           to
           sound
           and
           declare
           the
           Judgments
           of
           God
           over
           the
           Earth
           ,
           which
           accordingly
           are
           executed
           ,
           where
           the
           four
           first
           trumpets
           are
           remarkably
           distinguished
           from
           the
           three
           last
           ;
           becaus
           to
           the
           last
           three
           ,
           a
           warning
           of
           great
           wo
           is
           promised
           by
           an
           Angel
           over
           the
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           As
           
           for
           the
           four
           first
           ;
           they
           all
           tend
           to
           deprive
           the
           world
           of
           the
           third
           part
           of
           the
           Creatures
           ,
           which
           are
           great
           comforts
           to
           the
           life
           of
           mankinde
           ;
           as
           of
           trees
           the
           third
           part
           ,
           and
           
             of
             all
             green
             grass
          
           ,
           which
           in
           proportion
           may
           bee
           the
           third
           part
           of
           lesser
           plants
           ;
           the
           third
           part
           
             of
             the
             Sea
          
           ,
           and
           of
           
             Creatures
             living
             therein
          
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             ships
             that
             sail
             thereon
          
           ;
           the
           third
           part
           of
           
             the
             Rivers
             and
             fountains
             of
             waters
          
           ;
           and
           the
           third
           part
           of
           
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moon
             ,
             and
             Stars
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             light
             of
             the
             daie
             and
             night
             :
          
           where
           wee
           may
           take
           notice
           of
           a
           gradual
           progress
           from
           the
           lesser
           to
           the
           greater
           judgments
           ,
           from
           earth
           rising
           up
           to
           heaven
           :
           and
           from
           the
           effects
           to
           the
           causes
           .
           
             Chap.
             8.
          
           
           As
           for
           the
           woes
           ,
           the
           first
           of
           them
           by
           Locusts
           is
           a
           tormenting
           judgment
           ;
           not
           putting
           men
           to
           death
           ,
           but
           vexing
           them
           :
           so
           that
           they
           should
           seek
           death
           and
           not
           finde
           it
           :
           and
           the
           second
           of
           them
           by
           horsmen
           is
           a
           destroying
           judgment
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           third
           part
           of
           men
           on
           earth
           are
           cut
           off
           .
           
             Chap.
             9.
          
           
        
         
           Thus
           then
           by
           the
           second
           vision
           is
           shewed
           what
           in
           heaven
           is
           sealed
           in
           the
           hand
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           what
           from
           thence
           is
           published
           to
           all
           the
           world
           ;
           by
           the
           progress
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ;
           by
           the
           sufferings
           of
           the
           Saints
           and
           their
           comforts
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           Judgments
           befalling
           to
           the
           world
           for
           their
           hatred
           to
           the
           Gospel
           :
           for
           their
           Idolatrie
           ,
           and
           for
           their
           other
           sins
           of
           Murder
           ,
           witchcraft
           ,
           fornication
           and
           theft
           :
           of
           which
           they
           repented
           not
           :
           and
           therefore
           the
           third
           wo
           is
           to
           bee
           brought
           upon
           them
           ,
           when
           the
           seventh
           Angel
           shall
           sound
           :
           for
           at
           the
           time
           of
           his
           sounding
           ,
           
           there
           shall
           bee
           to
           time
           of
           forbearance
           of
           anie
           more
           ;
           but
           the
           full
           mysterie
           ,
           both
           of
           wrath
           against
           the
           wicked
           ,
           and
           of
           Mercie
           to
           the
           godlie
           ,
           shall
           bee
           fulfilled
           towards
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           towards
           the
           Church
           ,
           both
           in
           heaven
           and
           earth
           .
        
         
           Here
           then
           to
           shew
           this
           ,
           the
           third
           and
           last
           vision
           is
           given
           to
           the
           Prophet
           ;
           which
           hee
           again
           receiveth
           on
           earth
           by
           the
           hand
           of
           the
           mightie
           Angel
           ,
           which
           come's
           from
           heaven
           with
           the
           open
           book
           ;
           and
           stands
           both
           upon
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           upon
           the
           earth
           where
           I
           observ
           ▪
        
         
           First
           for
           a
           Translation
           from
           the
           two
           former
           to
           this
           last
           vision
           ;
           that
           as
           there
           are
           but
           three
           substantial
           differences
           of
           things
           revealed
           to
           the
           Prophet
           :
           so
           there
           are
           but
           three
           substantial
           diversities
           of
           places
           mentioned
           ,
           where
           they
           are
           revealed
           ,
           and
           three
           main
           changes
           in
           the
           frame
           of
           his
           Spirit
           in
           receiving
           them
           .
           The
           first
           substantial
           matter
           of
           vision
           is
           Christ's
           administration
           of
           his
           offices
           on
           earth
           amongst
           his
           Churches
           .
           The
           second
           is
           his
           administration
           of
           his
           offices
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           over
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           propagate
           and
           preserv
           his
           Church
           :
           And
           the
           third
           is
           his
           administration
           both
           in
           Heaven
           and
           earth
           ,
           to
           make
           an
           end
           of
           all
           wickedness
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           to
           perfect
           the
           glorie
           and
           happiness
           of
           his
           Church
           ;
           each
           of
           these
           matters
           are
           shewed
           to
           the
           Prophet
           ,
           in
           the
           places
           where
           they
           were
           chiefly
           to
           bee
           translated
           ;
           for
           to
           leav
           the
           
           sight
           of
           the
           first
           hee
           was
           on
           earth
           ,
           as
           amongst
           men
           :
           at
           the
           sight
           of
           the
           second
           ,
           hee
           was
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Saints
           perfected
           ,
           and
           of
           Angels
           .
           At
           the
           sight
           of
           the
           third
           hee
           is
           on
           earth
           again
           ;
           but
           so
           ,
           as
           communicating
           still
           with
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           looking
           into
           it
           back
           again
           ,
           as
           one
           com
           down
           from
           thence
           ,
           and
           having
           still
           a
           relation
           to
           it
           .
           The
           frames
           of
           his
           spirit
           appear
           to
           mee
           diversified
           sutably
           unto
           these
           matters
           and
           places
           .
           For
           in
           the
           first
           vision
           hee
           is
           meerly
           passive
           ,
           as
           a
           dead
           man
           to
           bee
           quickned
           .
           In
           the
           second
           hee
           is
           Actively
           passive
           (
           as
           I
           may
           so
           say
           )
           that
           is
           ,
           as
           one
           concerned
           in
           the
           businesses
           ,
           which
           are
           transacted
           :
           hee
           is
           an
           inquisitive
           observer
           of
           the
           passages
           thereof
           .
           And
           in
           the
           third
           hee
           is
           effectually
           emploied
           as
           a
           coagent
           ,
           to
           help
           to
           fulfil
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           God
           by
           the
           spirit
           of
           Prophesie
           :
           and
           in
           each
           of
           these
           Manifestations
           Christ
           is
           represented
           to
           him
           ,
           sutably
           to
           the
           administration
           which
           is
           revealed
           .
           In
           the
           first
           as
           a
           Man
           ▪
           in
           dealing
           with
           men
           ;
           in
           the
           second
           ,
           as
           a
           Lamb
           offered
           up
           to
           God
           in
           dealing
           with
           God
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           third
           ,
           as
           a
           mightie
           Angel
           ,
           in
           dealing
           with
           Satan
           and
           his
           Angels
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           powers
           of
           darkness
           in
           the
           world
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           the
           opening
           of
           the
           matter
           of
           this
           vision
           ,
           I
           observ
           ,
           that
           the
           summe
           of
           all
           is
           ,
           to
           shew
           when
           and
           how
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           God
           ,
           which
           hee
           hath
           spoken
           by
           the
           Prophets
           should
           bee
           finished
           ;
           and
           to
           shew
           
           this
           .
           First
           two
           means
           are
           used
           to
           lead
           John
           to
           the
           knowledg
           thereof
           :
           then
           secondly
           ,
           the
           thing
           it self
           is
           summarily
           related
           ,
           by
           word
           of
           mouth
           unto
           him
           ,
           and
           afterward
           thirdly
           it
           is
           represented
           in
           several
           visions
           .
           The
           means
           leading
           to
           the
           knowledg
           of
           the
           finishing
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           ,
           are
           two
           .
           First
           ,
           an
           open
           little
           Book
           inable's
           him
           to
           prophesie
           .
           
             Chap.
             10.
          
           
           Secondly
           ,
           a
           Reed
           given
           him
           like
           unto
           a
           Rod
           ,
           to
           measure
           the
           Temple
           ,
           the
           Altar
           and
           those
           that
           worship
           therein
           .
        
         
           The
           summarie
           relation
           of
           the
           whole
           business
           by
           word
           of
           mouth
           ,
           doth
           concern
           the
           time
           of
           the
           treading
           of
           the
           utter
           court
           under
           foot
           ,
           the
           power
           of
           prophesiing
           given
           to
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           during
           that
           time
           ;
           the
           war
           which
           the
           Beast
           shall
           make
           with
           them
           while
           's
           they
           prophesie
           ,
           and
           the
           issue
           of
           that
           war
           set
           forth
           in
           the
           circumstances
           of
           their
           death
           and
           resurrection
           ;
           and
           that
           which
           immediately
           doth
           follow
           thereupon
           ,
           both
           in
           earth
           and
           in
           Heaven
           .
           In
           earth
           ,
           there
           was
           an
           earthquake
           which
           made
           the
           tenth
           part
           of
           the
           Citie
           to
           fall
           ,
           and
           killed
           seven
           thousand
           men
           ,
           and
           frighted
           the
           rest
           .
           The
           second
           wo
           doth
           pass
           ;
           and
           the
           seventh
           Angel
           doth
           sound
           his
           Trumpet
           .
           In
           Heaven
           there
           is
           great
           joie
           and
           and
           thanksgiving
           offered
           unto
           God
           ,
           becaus
           hee
           hath
           taken
           the
           Kingdom
           to
           himself
           ,
           and
           doth
           reign
           over
           the
           Kingdoms
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           give
           rewards
           unto
           his
           servants
           .
           
             chap.
             11.
          
           
        
         
           Hitherto
           the
           whole
           Series
           of
           matters
           concerning
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           God
           ,
           hath
           been
           related
           in
           plain
           terms
           ;
           to
           shew
           the
           things
           by
           which
           it
           
           should
           bee
           accomplished
           :
           now
           followeth
           the
           description
           of
           the
           visions
           ;
           by
           which
           the
           particulars
           of
           the
           things
           summarily
           mentioned
           in
           this
           Narrative
           are
           more
           at
           large
           reveled
           :
           whereby
           the
           Prophet
           is
           made
           to
           understand
           concerning
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           God
           (
           which
           is
           ,
           
             Christ
             in
             the
             Church
             .
             Ephes
             .
             5.
             32.
          
           or
           which
           is
           all
           one
           ,
           
             Christ
             in
             us
             the
             hope
             of
             glorie
             .
             Colos
             .
             1.
             27.
             
             )
          
           what
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           was
           in
           Heaven
           at
           that
           time
           ;
           and
           what
           it
           should
           afterward
           bee
           on
           earth
           ,
           during
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Churche's
           abode
           in
           the
           Wilderness
           ;
           during
           the
           time
           of
           her
           comming
           out
           of
           the
           wilderness
           ;
           and
           during
           the
           time
           of
           her
           Reign
           over
           the
           earth
           ,
           as
           the
           Spous
           of
           the
           Lamb
           with
           her
           bridegroom
           .
        
         
           At
           that
           time
           the
           temple
           of
           God
           in
           Heaven
           beeing
           opened
           ,
           and
           the
           Ark
           of
           the
           Testament
           therein
           beeing
           seen
           ;
           the
           Church
           as
           shee
           was
           constituted
           by
           the
           Apostles
           appeared
           ,
           and
           brought
           forth
           a
           Man-child
           ,
           against
           whom
           the
           Dragon
           did
           set
           himself
           to
           devour
           it
           ;
           but
           the
           child
           was
           to
           bee
           caught
           up
           to
           Heaven
           ;
           and
           the
           Dragon
           to
           bee
           cast
           out
           of
           Heaven
           upon
           the
           earth
           ;
           where
           hee
           set's
           himself
           to
           persecute
           the
           woman
           which
           fled
           into
           the
           Wilderness
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           war
           with
           the
           remnant
           of
           her
           seed
           .
           
             chap.
             12.
          
           
        
         
           During
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Churche's
           abode
           in
           the
           
           Wilderness
           the
           mysterie
           of
           iniquitie
           is
           set
           up
           ,
           and
           come's
           to
           it's
           perfection
           in
           the
           earth
           ,
           &
           God
           send
           's
           his
           judgments
           upon
           it
           when
           it
           is
           com
           to
           it's
           height
           .
           
             c.
             13
             till
             19
             ▪
          
        
         
           This
           Mysterie
           of
           Iniquitie
           hath
           two
           parts
           ;
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Woman
           riding
           upon
           the
           Beast
           .
           The
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Beast
           ruling
           over
           the
           earth
           ,
           is
           seen
           in
           one
           Beast
           coming
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           with
           ten
           horns
           ;
           and
           another
           coming
           out
           of
           the
           earth
           with
           two
           horns
           .
           
             Chap.
             13.
          
           during
           the
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           and
           reigning
           of
           these
           Beasts
           over
           the
           earth
           ,
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           upon
           Mount
           Sion
           ,
           and
           God's
           administrations
           for
           the
           knowledg
           of
           his
           will
           thereby
           unto
           the
           world
           ;
           concerning
           the
           everlasting
           Gospel
           concerning
           the
           future
           fall
           of
           Babylon
           ;
           and
           concerning
           the
           punishment
           of
           those
           that
           adhere
           unto
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           for
           the
           waie
           of
           gathering
           up
           the
           harvest
           and
           vintage
           of
           the
           earth
           ;
           are
           revealed
           .
           
             chap.
             14.
          
           
        
         
           God's
           Judgments
           upon
           the
           Beast
           are
           poured
           out
           in
           the
           Phials
           of
           his
           last
           wrath
           ,
           whereunto
           seven
           Angels
           are
           appointed
           ,
           and
           prepared
           .
           
             Chap.
             15.
          
           and
           commanded
           to
           put
           the
           Judgments
           in
           execution
           .
           
             Chap.
             16.
          
           
        
         
         
           The
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           riding
           upon
           the
           Beast
           ,
           is
           shewed
           to
           the
           Prophet
           .
           
             chap.
             17.
          
           and
           the
           Judgment
           which
           befalleth
           unto
           her
           ,
           for
           her
           destruction
           is
           described
           ▪
           
             chap.
             18.
          
           
        
         
           The
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           her
           comming
           out
           of
           the
           Wilderness
           ,
           is
           described
           in
           the
           congratulatorie
           acclamations
           ,
           given
           to
           God
           in
           Heaven
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           preparations
           of
           the
           wife
           of
           the
           Lamb
           for
           the
           Marriage-Supper
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           war
           which
           the
           Armies
           of
           Heaven
           under
           Christ's
           conduct
           do
           make
           against
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           ,
           and
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           For
           by
           this
           means
           the
           power
           of
           all
           her
           adversaries
           beeing
           destroied
           ,
           shee
           is
           fitted
           to
           appear
           visibly
           upon
           the
           stage
           of
           the
           world
           .
           
             Chap.
             19.
          
           
        
         
           The
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           during
           her
           Reign
           with
           Christ
           on
           earth
           ,
           is
           before
           the
           last
           Judgment
           a
           thousand
           years
           ;
           and
           after
           the
           universal
           Resurrection
           ,
           both
           in
           Heaven
           and
           earth
           ,
           for
           ever
           and
           ever
           .
           
             Chap.
             20.
             21.
             and
             22.
             till
             vers
             6.
             
          
        
         
           Thus
           wee
           see
           the
           contexture
           and
           coherence
           of
           the
           matter
           and
           parts
           of
           the
           whole
           Book
           :
           if
           then
           wee
           should
           consider
           how
           these
           particulars
           relate
           unto
           the
           main
           scope
           of
           the
           Prophesie
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           reveal
           Jesus
           Christ
           unto
           us
           ,
           in
           the
           
           Mysterie
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           ,
           wee
           see
           that
           everie
           thing
           is
           most
           directly
           subordinate
           thereunto
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           whole
           doth
           most
           completely
           reach
           a
           full
           discoverie
           of
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           ,
           whereof
           the
           brief
           summe
           is
           this
           .
        
         
           That
           the
           professors
           of
           the
           name
           of
           Jesus
           Christ
           ;
           by
           their
           sufferings
           for
           his
           sake
           ;
           by
           their
           testimonie
           of
           him
           in
           opposition
           to
           the
           Dragon
           ,
           to
           the
           Beasts
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Whore
           ;
           by
           the
           Judgments
           of
           God
           against
           all
           these
           ,
           to
           destroie
           their
           power
           ,
           by
           the
           war
           of
           the
           Saints
           against
           them
           ,
           by
           the
           setling
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           his
           Saints
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           Manifestation
           of
           the
           Glorie
           of
           the
           heavenlie
           Jerusalem
           ,
           comming
           unto
           them
           from
           Heaven
           to
           earth
           ▪
           whereinto
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           earth
           shall
           bring
           their
           glorie
           ;
           shall
           get
           the
           full
           victorie
           over
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           purchase
           of
           the
           Inheritance
           of
           all
           things
           in
           the
           New
           Heavens
           ,
           and
           the
           New
           earth
           ;
           they
           shall
           have
           the
           enjoiment
           of
           the
           presence
           of
           God
           for
           ever
           .
           In
           all
           which
           at
           this
           time
           ,
           as
           to
           our
           present
           condition
           the
           opposition
           which
           the
           Beast
           hath
           to
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           to
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           ,
           and
           the
           Whore
           to
           the
           Bride
           ;
           and
           the
           manner
           of
           their
           warfare
           is
           most
           considerable
           :
           for
           in
           the
           opposite
           properties
           of
           their
           Natures
           and
           waies
           ,
           the
           Mysteries
           of
           Iniquitie
           and
           of
           Godliness
           are
           
           most
           completely
           revealed
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           war
           which
           is
           between
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           issue
           thereof
           ;
           the
           state
           and
           relation
           wherein
           our
           inward
           man
           doth
           stand
           ,
           as
           to
           either
           of
           the
           Mysteries
           ,
           will
           bee
           seen
           :
           that
           wee
           may
           not
           onely
           know
           what
           partly
           to
           chuse
           in
           this
           quarrel
           ,
           but
           also
           what
           to
           judg
           of
           the
           advancement
           of
           the
           partie
           wherein
           wee
           are
           found
           ,
           towards
           the
           atteinment
           of
           the
           Hope
           which
           is
           set
           before
           us
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           .
        
         
           These
           things
           are
           worth
           a
           larger
           discours
           and
           discoverie
           ;
           then
           my
           design
           is
           at
           this
           time
           to
           bestow
           upon
           them
           :
           but
           in
           reference
           to
           what
           hath
           been
           said
           already
           ;
           and
           to
           that
           which
           is
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           following
           Treatise
           somthing
           is
           fit
           to
           bee
           added
           ,
           though
           but
           very
           briefly
           ,
           to
           give
           you
           matter
           of
           further
           thoughts
           .
        
         
           If
           it
           bee
           expedient
           then
           for
           us
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           Iniquitie
           ,
           and
           of
           Godliness
           as
           they
           are
           now
           working
           ;
           and
           have
           been
           long
           ago
           wresling
           against
           one
           another
           in
           the
           publick
           transactions
           of
           this
           present
           world
           ;
           wee
           must
           look
           out
           for
           the
           Beast
           to
           finde
           him
           by
           the
           Properties
           of
           his
           Nature
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           effects
           of
           the
           Government
           which
           hee
           hath
           exercised
           ,
           and
           doth
           exercise
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ;
           and
           for
           the
           Lamb
           to
           finde
           him
           by
           the
           same
           Characters
           .
        
         
           The
           Beastlie
           nature
           of
           the
           life
           of
           man
           ,
           is
           that
           which
           the
           Dragon
           doth
           exalt
           ,
           and
           impower
           with
           all
           his
           might
           ,
           as
           his
           vice-gerent
           ,
           to
           have
           Dominion
           over
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           
           for
           by
           this
           nature
           hee
           can
           onely
           have
           access
           now
           to
           us
           ,
           and
           power
           over
           us
           :
           seeing
           hee
           is
           cast
           out
           of
           our
           heavenlie
           places
           ,
           and
           overcom
           there
           in
           our
           nature
           ,
           by
           the
           blood
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           The
           general
           properties
           of
           this
           brutish
           nature
           are
           these
           .
           First
           to
           bee
           led
           without
           reason
           by
           meer
           sens
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           to
           satisfie
           the
           sensual
           imaginations
           and
           lusts
           of
           the
           flesh
           ;
           and
           thirdly
           ,
           to
           do
           all
           things
           by
           a
           Brutish
           and
           bodilie
           violence
           and
           force
           ,
           rather
           then
           in
           a
           friendlie
           and
           amiable
           waie
           ;
           And
           fourthly
           ,
           in
           case
           of
           opposition
           ,
           to
           destroie
           without
           mercie
           all
           that
           stand's
           in
           the
           waie
           of
           his
           will.
           Hence
           it
           is
           that
           in
           the
           13th
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           this
           beastlie
           nature
           is
           said
           ,
           to
           bee
           like
           a
           Leopard
           full
           of
           spots
           ,
           swift
           and
           cruel
           ;
           to
           have
           the
           feet
           of
           a
           Bear
           ;
           which
           grasp's
           both
           with
           the
           hindermost
           and
           formost
           legs
           and
           claws
           ,
           and
           to
           have
           the
           mouth
           of
           a
           Lion
           ,
           to
           tear
           and
           devour
           .
           The
           Government
           which
           this
           nature
           doth
           affect
           is
           absolute
           ,
           to
           have
           all
           in
           subjection
           to
           it's
           will
           ,
           without
           anie
           other
           Rule
           or
           Law.
           So
           that
           it
           ruleth
           over
           others
           ,
           as
           men
           use
           to
           rule
           over
           beasts
           ,
           guiding
           them
           by
           meer
           sensual
           and
           imaginarie
           inducements
           which
           relate
           nothing
           to
           the
           will
           of
           God
           at
           all
           .
        
         
           If
           then
           the
           Governors
           of
           a
           people
           make
           use
           of
           their
           power
           ,
           to
           satisfie
           the
           inclinations
           of
           flesh
           and
           blood
           ,
           in
           fulfilling
           their
           lusts
           and
           sensual
           affections
           ,
           without
           anie
           due
           respect
           unto
           the
           end
           of
           their
           place
           :
           but
           seek
           by
           meer
           force
           to
           make
           their
           will
           a
           Law
           to
           their
           Subjects
           ,
           by
           bringing
           them
           to
           an
           absolute
           Subjection
           ,
           that
           
           they
           may
           suffer
           themselvs
           to
           bee
           ruled
           ,
           as
           beasts
           use
           to
           bee
           ruled
           by
           men
           ;
           who
           beeing
           ignorant
           of
           the
           designs
           of
           men
           ,
           are
           led
           onely
           by
           sensual
           objects
           of
           pleasure
           and
           of
           terror
           :
           if
           (
           I
           saie
           )
           anie
           Governors
           have
           this
           aim
           ,
           and
           follow
           the
           waies
           ,
           by
           which
           this
           kinde
           of
           greatness
           over
           others
           may
           bee
           established
           ;
           they
           ought
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           themselvs
           ,
           and
           others
           may
           observ
           it
           also
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           none
           other
           but
           the
           Dragon
           's
           Vice-gerents
           on
           earth
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           rule
           in
           his
           name
           ,
           and
           in
           his
           waie
           over
           the
           sons
           of
           men
           .
           Now
           how
           manie
           Potentates
           have
           hitherto
           in
           all
           the
           Nations
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           intended
           to
           rule
           over
           their
           Subjects
           in
           another
           waie
           ,
           I
           confess
           I
           am
           not
           able
           to
           relate
           .
           But
           how
           manie
           have
           apparently
           studied
           to
           bee
           absolute
           over
           their
           Subjects
           ,
           as
           over
           beasts
           ,
           and
           in
           cases
           of
           opposition
           have
           shewed
           themselvs
           as
           Leopards
           ,
           Bears
           ,
           and
           Lions
           against
           them
           ;
           and
           have
           made
           these
           properties
           of
           their
           waie
           ,
           their
           glorie
           ;
           is
           so
           apparent
           ,
           that
           I
           shall
           need
           to
           saie
           no
           more
           of
           it
           ;
           but
           shall
           leav
           it
           unto
           your
           thoughts
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           Lamb-like
           nature
           of
           the
           life
           of
           man
           ;
           and
           the
           waie
           of
           the
           Government
           which
           is
           sutable
           thereunto
           ,
           is
           that
           which
           Christ
           as
           a
           spiritual
           man
           doth
           exalt
           in
           the
           societies
           of
           mankinde
           .
           The
           properties
           of
           a
           Lamb
           may
           bee
           seen
           in
           the
           relation
           which
           it
           hath
           to
           other
           beasts
           ,
           to
           the
           creatures
           of
           it's
           own
           kinde
           ,
           
           and
           chiefly
           to
           mankinde
           .
           In
           respect
           of
           other
           Creatures
           it
           is
           most
           meek
           ,
           and
           most
           harmless
           ;
           the
           horns
           which
           they
           have
           are
           not
           for
           offence
           but
           for
           defence
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           own
           kinde
           ,
           they
           are
           most
           fit
           to
           live
           in
           a
           societie
           .
           For
           if
           they
           bee
           alone
           ,
           they
           are
           lost
           ,
           and
           becom
           a
           prey
           to
           other
           beasts
           .
           In
           respect
           of
           man
           ,
           the
           Lamb
           or
           sheep
           is
           the
           most
           useful
           ,
           and
           most
           serviceable
           creature
           of
           anie
           other
           ;
           for
           they
           both
           feed
           him
           and
           cloth
           him
           ;
           and
           that
           without
           much
           trouble
           unto
           him
           .
           As
           for
           the
           waie
           of
           Government
           which
           is
           sutable
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           wee
           see
           that
           it
           is
           none
           other
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           without
           a
           Shepherd
           ;
           but
           the
           Imitation
           of
           example
           ;
           that
           when
           one
           goeth
           before
           ,
           then
           all
           the
           rest
           do
           follow
           :
           and
           if
           they
           have
           a
           Shepherd
           ,
           they
           follow
           him
           ,
           and
           take
           notice
           of
           his
           voice
           ,
           to
           distinguish
           it
           from
           the
           voice
           of
           a
           stranger
           .
           If
           then
           the
           Governors
           who
           are
           over
           the
           Flock
           of
           Christ
           have
           not
           these
           properties
           ,
           in
           the
           waie
           of
           ruling
           the
           Common-wealth
           of
           Israël
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           if
           they
           are
           not
           eminent
           for
           meekness
           ,
           and
           harmlesness
           towards
           all
           men
           ,
           making
           use
           of
           their
           horns
           ,
           and
           power
           onely
           for
           defence
           and
           not
           for
           offence
           ;
           if
           they
           are
           not
           sociable
           ,
           and
           by
           condescension
           of
           spirit
           humbly
           equal
           to
           those
           that
           belong
           to
           their
           societie
           ;
           but
           seek
           to
           keep
           themselvs
           high
           ,
           and
           at
           a
           distance
           ,
           and
           solitarie
           from
           others
           ;
           and
           if
           they
           are
           not
           willing
           to
           give
           themselvs
           up
           ,
           both
           their
           wool
           and
           their
           substance
           for
           the
           service
           
           of
           mankinde
           ;
           they
           are
           not
           Christian
           Magistrates
           ,
           nor
           they
           rule
           over
           their
           Subjects
           ,
           as
           Christ's
           Vice-gerents
           ,
           or
           in
           his
           name
           and
           waie
           .
           For
           hee
           as
           the
           first
           Lamb
           of
           the
           Flock
           ,
           in
           his
           precedencie
           did
           never
           carrie
           himself
           otherwise
           ,
           then
           thus
           before
           the
           Flock
           ,
           to
           oblige
           all
           to
           follow
           him
           ,
           but
           chiefly
           they
           who
           professing
           his
           name
           ,
           are
           in
           the
           formost
           rank
           before
           others
           to
           lead
           them
           ,
           ought
           to
           follow
           him
           closest
           .
        
         
           If
           now
           wee
           should
           compare
           these
           two
           Mysteries
           together
           in
           their
           opposition
           to
           each
           other
           ,
           wee
           may
           observ
           that
           as
           Leopards
           ,
           Bears
           ,
           and
           Lions
           live
           not
           in
           Flocks
           and
           societies
           ,
           as
           Lambs
           do
           ,
           but
           alone
           by
           themselvs
           ;
           so
           it
           is
           with
           Potentates
           and
           Monarchs
           .
           
             Imperium
             non
             patitur
             duos
             .
             Caesárve
             priorem
             ,
          
           
             Pompeiúsve
             parem
             ferre
             nequit
          
           .
           Leopards
           ,
           Bears
           ,
           and
           Lions
           live
           by
           preying
           and
           devouring
           other
           weaker
           Creatures
           ,
           wherein
           they
           are
           the
           embleme
           of
           the
           Tyrannie
           of
           Monarchs
           ,
           and
           wee
           see
           that
           most
           of
           them
           were
           these
           Creatures
           as
           the
           glorie
           of
           their
           scutcheons
           :
           but
           Lambs
           and
           sheep
           living
           in
           flocks
           to
           strengthen
           each
           other
           ,
           represent
           the
           equalitie
           of
           a
           Common-wealth
           ,
           and
           the
           waie
           of
           it's
           strength
           .
           Leopards
           ,
           Bears
           ,
           and
           Lions
           need
           no
           protection
           ,
           nor
           can
           they
           bee
           ruled
           but
           by
           a
           prison
           ;
           becaus
           they
           make
           themselvs
           formidable
           unto
           all
           other
           Creatures
           ;
           but
           sheep
           and
           
           Lambs
           are
           a
           prey
           to
           all
           other
           Creatures
           ,
           except
           they
           bee
           protected
           by
           a
           Shepherd
           ,
           and
           kept
           in
           folds
           ,
           which
           doth
           represent
           that
           Christian
           Common-wealths
           ,
           except
           they
           bee
           protected
           by
           an
           higher
           power
           then
           their
           own
           ,
           which
           is
           as
           far
           above
           the
           nature
           of
           man
           ,
           as
           man's
           nature
           is
           above
           sheep
           and
           Lambs
           ;
           they
           cannot
           bee
           in
           safetie
           .
           The
           dependencie
           then
           of
           sheep
           upon
           their
           Shepherd
           is
           an
           embleme
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Faith
           ;
           but
           the
           absoluteness
           of
           power
           ,
           in
           wilde
           Beasts
           ,
           to
           trust
           to
           their
           own
           strength
           ,
           is
           the
           embleme
           of
           the
           greatness
           of
           Potentates
           ,
           and
           such
           as
           betake
           themselvs
           to
           stand
           by
           their
           own
           sufficiencie
           ,
           in
           reference
           to
           Man
           ,
           these
           wilde
           beasts
           can
           never
           bee
           brought
           to
           do
           him
           anie
           service
           ;
           but
           prey
           upon
           him
           ,
           and
           devour
           his
           substance
           ;
           but
           sheep
           and
           Lambs
           are
           the
           support
           of
           his
           life
           ,
           and
           are
           without
           resistance
           slaughtered
           and
           sacrificed
           for
           his
           good
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           embleme
           of
           self-denial
           ,
           wherein
           Jesus
           Christ
           the
           chief
           Shepherd
           of
           the
           flock
           is
           gone
           before
           all
           the
           Governors
           of
           the
           Common-wealth
           of
           Israël
           ;
           to
           shew
           them
           that
           they
           ought
           to
           give
           up
           themselvs
           as
           a
           sacrifice
           for
           the
           publick
           good
           of
           their
           Flocks
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           beast's
           waie
           of
           Government
           to
           enforce
           obedience
           by
           violence
           ;
           but
           it
           is
           said
           of
           the
           Lamb
           upon
           Mount
           Sion
           that
           his
           Flock
           of
           144000.
           
           Lambs
           did
           follow
           him
           whether
           soëver
           hee
           went
           ;
           to
           shew
           that
           the
           Vice-gerents
           of
           Christ
           ,
           which
           are
           appointed
           to
           rule
           his
           people
           in
           his
           
           name
           ;
           go
           before
           their
           brethren
           in
           the
           waie
           of
           Righteousness
           ,
           and
           such
           as
           are
           true
           Christians
           indeed
           ,
           follow
           them
           out
           of
           a
           loving
           inclination
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           the
           best
           waie
           of
           Government
           that
           can
           bee
           settled
           amongst
           men
           ;
           namely
           to
           bring
           all
           to
           imitate
           Christ
           Jesus
           on
           all
           sides
           ,
           both
           they
           that
           bear
           rule
           ,
           and
           they
           that
           are
           ruled
           .
           Now
           how
           far
           our
           Rulers
           are
           bent
           this
           waie
           ,
           I
           shall
           refer
           it
           to
           their
           own
           conscience
           to
           consider
           ;
           and
           how
           far
           their
           Subjects
           set
           themselvs
           through
           love
           ,
           to
           follow
           that
           wherein
           they
           go
           before
           them
           in
           righteousness
           :
           I
           shall
           not
           need
           to
           mention
           ;
           but
           I
           may
           take
           up
           a
           woful
           lamentation
           ;
           that
           som
           who
           ought
           most
           to
           encourage
           their
           fellow-Subjects
           to
           this
           dutie
           ;
           are
           most
           avers
           from
           it
           themselvs
           ,
           and
           disaffect
           others
           from
           it
           .
           But
           I
           shall
           not
           insist
           further
           upon
           this
           mysterie
           of
           Iniquitie
           ,
           this
           shall
           briefly
           suffice
           for
           the
           opening
           thereof
           at
           this
           time
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           thing
           which
           I
           proposed
           to
           touch
           ,
           was
           the
           mysterie
           of
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           ,
           and
           hereof
           briefly
           thus
           .
        
         
           The
           fals
           Prophet
           his
           work
           is
           to
           uphold
           and
           to
           advance
           the
           interest
           of
           the
           power
           ,
           and
           the
           absoluteness
           of
           the
           beastlie
           Government
           ,
           and
           to
           bring
           all
           men
           to
           bee
           in
           subjection
           thereunto
           ,
           the
           means
           which
           hee
           useth
           to
           effect
           this
           is
           two-fold
           ;
           the
           one
           is
           a
           deceitfulness
           of
           persuasion
           ,
           and
           bewitching
           
           of
           the
           Imaginations
           of
           ignorant
           men
           by
           lying
           miracles
           ,
           to
           make
           them
           believ
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           beast
           there
           is
           a
           Divinitie
           ,
           and
           that
           his
           image
           ought
           to
           bee
           worshipped
           ;
           the
           other
           is
           a
           coërcive
           power
           of
           punishment
           to
           bee
           inflicted
           by
           the
           fals
           Prophet's
           procurement
           upon
           all
           those
           who
           do
           not
           subject
           themselvs
           vnto
           the
           beast
           ;
           either
           by
           waie
           of
           Adoration
           ,
           to
           fall
           down
           before
           this
           Image
           ;
           or
           by
           waie
           of
           receiving
           as
           a
           token
           of
           subjection
           the
           mark
           ,
           the
           name
           ,
           or
           the
           number
           of
           the
           name
           of
           the
           beast
           :
           namely
           ,
           that
           such
           as
           should
           not
           worship
           his
           Image
           should
           bee
           killed
           ;
           and
           such
           as
           should
           neither
           take
           his
           marke
           ,
           nor
           his
           name
           ,
           nor
           the
           number
           of
           his
           name
           upon
           them
           ,
           should
           have
           no
           libertie
           of
           commerce
           ;
           and
           to
           prosecute
           these
           designs
           ,
           is
           the
           whole
           emploiment
           of
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           ;
           which
           that
           wee
           may
           the
           better
           understand
           ,
           let
           us
           consider
           the
           particulars
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Image
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           which
           is
           to
           bee
           worshipped
           ,
           I
           take
           it
           to
           bee
           that
           absolute
           greatness
           which
           the
           second
           Beast
           doth
           attribute
           unto
           himself
           ,
           and
           doth
           exercise
           over
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           first
           Beast
           in
           his
           presence
           ;
           for
           the
           text
           saith
           ,
           
             that
             hee
             exerciseth
             all
             the
             power
             of
             the
             first
             beast
             before
             him
             ,
             chapter
             13.
             vers
             12.
          
           that
           is
           ,
           hee
           doth
           set
           up
           a
           waie
           of
           Government
           ,
           as
           absolute
           ,
           as
           that
           of
           the
           first
           Beasts
           ,
           is
           in
           conformitie
           thereunto
           ,
           to
           establish
           it
           ,
           and
           hee
           
             had
             power
             to
             give
             life
             unto
             the
             Image
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
          
           
           as
           the
           text
           saith
           ,
           
             vers
             15.
          
           which
           I
           understand
           thus
           ;
           that
           the
           second
           Beast
           had
           power
           given
           him
           ,
           by
           the
           first
           Beast's
           permission
           ;
           to
           give
           life
           to
           the
           Image
           of
           his
           absoluteness
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           exercising
           of
           his
           power
           in
           the
           hand
           of
           the
           second
           Beast
           ;
           and
           to
           
             make
             it
             both
             speak
             ,
             and
             caus
             all
             to
             bee
             killed
             that
             should
             not
             worship
             his
             Image
             ,
          
           to
           make
           the
           Image
           speak
           ,
           is
           to
           make
           his
           power
           give
           sentence
           of
           death
           ;
           and
           to
           caus
           all
           to
           bee
           killed
           ,
           is
           to
           see
           that
           sentence
           executed
           against
           all
           such
           as
           should
           not
           acknowledg
           the
           Autoritie
           ,
           form
           of
           Government
           ,
           and
           Laws
           and
           Canons
           of
           his
           making
           to
           bee
           divine
           sanctions
           .
           For
           the
           Canon-Laws
           are
           made
           in
           imitation
           of
           the
           civil
           Jurisdiction
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           kinde
           of
           a
           like
           power
           ,
           or
           the
           same
           with
           that
           of
           the
           first
           Beast
           ,
           the
           one
           relating
           to
           the
           Civil
           ,
           the
           other
           to
           the
           Ecclesiastical
           State.
           By
           the
           
             mark
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           ,
           I
           understand
           the
           Irrationalitie
           of
           obedience
           ,
           and
           brutalitie
           of
           those
           that
           subject
           themselvs
           blindfold
           in
           all
           things
           ,
           without
           respect
           to
           Conscience
           ,
           or
           the
           knowledg
           of
           anie
           rule
           in
           order
           to
           God's
           will
           ;
           such
           then
           who
           by
           a
           blinde
           submission
           through
           worldlie
           and
           sensual
           motives
           subject
           themselvs
           as
           Beasts
           use
           to
           do
           ,
           to
           those
           that
           ride
           upon
           them
           ;
           and
           are
           led
           wheresoëver
           their
           riders
           will
           drive
           them
           ,
           have
           the
           mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           upon
           their
           spirits
           :
           and
           if
           they
           make
           open
           profession
           of
           this
           kinde
           of
           blinde
           obedience
           to
           bee
           their
           dutie
           ,
           they
           take
           the
           mark
           of
           
           the
           Beast
           in
           their
           forehead
           ;
           but
           if
           they
           practise
           it
           as
           hirelings
           for
           a
           reward
           ,
           they
           take
           the
           mark
           of
           the
           beast
           in
           their
           hand
           .
        
         
           By
           
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           I
           understand
           ,
           the
           names
           which
           for
           distinction's
           sake
           ,
           the
           fals
           Prophets
           everie
           where
           take
           unto
           themselvs
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           thereby
           set
           up
           themselvs
           to
           bee
           followed
           ,
           and
           owned
           by
           their
           Disciples
           ;
           which
           how
           this
           is
           practised
           ,
           no
           man
           can
           bee
           ignorant
           of
           .
        
         
           And
           by
           
             the
             number
             of
             the
             beast's
             name
             ,
          
           I
           understand
           the
           partialitie
           of
           reckoning
           ,
           and
           inequalitie
           of
           account
           ,
           which
           the
           fals
           Prophets
           oblige
           their
           followers
           to
           make
           of
           men
           ,
           in
           orto
           their
           parties
           ;
           for
           according
           to
           the
           relation
           which
           men
           are
           thought
           to
           have
           to
           this
           ,
           or
           that
           faction
           and
           pattie
           ;
           so
           they
           are
           esteemed
           of
           ,
           more
           or
           less
           ,
           for
           that
           name's
           sake
           whereby
           they
           are
           characterized
           ,
           and
           under
           which
           they
           are
           numbered
           ;
           nay
           ,
           in
           these
           our
           unchristian
           fractions
           ,
           by
           the
           zelots
           of
           parties
           it
           is
           reckoned
           upon
           ,
           as
           a
           Dutie
           ;
           not
           to
           account
           of
           anie
           man
           (
           let
           his
           worth
           bee
           otherwise
           what
           it
           will
           )
           further
           then
           as
           hee
           doth
           own
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           name
           of
           their
           partie
           ;
           and
           this
           I
           suppose
           amongst
           manie
           other
           things
           ,
           included
           in
           the
           number
           666.
           may
           bee
           represented
           therein
           ,
           in
           respect
           that
           this
           number
           is
           nothing
           els
           ,
           but
           a
           threefold
           repetition
           of
           it self
           in
           units
           ,
           in
           tenths
           ,
           and
           in
           hundreds
           :
           and
           cannot
           bee
           multiplied
           by
           anie
           square
           root
           without
           a
           fraction
           ;
           
           and
           in
           it self
           six
           is
           but
           the
           half
           of
           twelv
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           number
           of
           the
           Tribes
           of
           Israël
           ;
           but
           upon
           these
           numerical
           Mysteries
           I
           love
           not
           to
           stand
           .
           I
           shall
           therefore
           conclude
           with
           this
           one
           word
           ;
           that
           all
           ,
           who
           pretend
           to
           have
           a
           mission
           from
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           think
           themselvs
           his
           true
           Prophets
           ;
           should
           do
           well
           to
           examine
           by
           these
           characters
           the
           ground
           whereupon
           they
           stand
           ,
           and
           the
           waies
           wherein
           they
           walk
           ,
           lest
           they
           mistake
           themselvs
           in
           their
           account
           of
           themselvs
           and
           bee
           found
           in
           the
           end
           the
           Prophets
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           Christ
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           ,
           they
           are
           set
           forth
           as
           opposites
           unto
           the
           Beast
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           that
           
             the
             Beast
             doth
             make
             war
             with
             them
             .
             Chap.
             11.
             7.
          
           their
           Character
           is
           ,
           that
           they
           prophesie
           in
           Sackcloth
           as
           mourners
           ,
           that
           their
           design
           is
           nothing
           els
           ,
           but
           to
           bear
           witness
           unto
           Christ
           ,
           by
           the
           manifestation
           of
           the
           Truth
           without
           humane
           Interests
           ;
           and
           consequently
           ,
           that
           they
           studie
           not
           by
           outward
           means
           ,
           to
           set
           up
           themselvs
           ,
           or
           gain
           followers
           who
           should
           bee
           in
           subjection
           to
           them
           ,
           and
           under
           their
           spiritual
           jurisdiction
           ;
           nor
           do
           they
           applie
           themselvs
           to
           the
           fancies
           of
           their
           hearers
           ,
           to
           work
           som
           strange
           impressions
           upon
           them
           ,
           by
           raising
           them
           to
           the
           admiration
           of
           their
           Notions
           ,
           of
           their
           Eloquence
           or
           parts
           ;
           but
           speaking
           the
           plain
           truth
           in
           love
           ;
           a
           word
           of
           fire
           to
           melt
           the
           Conscience
           of
           sinners
           doth
           go
           
           out
           of
           their
           mouth
           ,
           which
           doth
           slaie
           the
           wicked
           spirits
           ,
           who
           set
           themselvs
           against
           them
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           their
           word
           ,
           the
           Heavens
           are
           shut
           up
           in
           the
           daies
           of
           their
           Prophesie
           from
           sending
           anie
           shewers
           of
           blessings
           upon
           men's
           souls
           ;
           and
           the
           earthlie
           and
           outward
           estate
           of
           men
           is
           smitten
           with
           all
           manner
           of
           plagues
           ,
           for
           not
           receiving
           the
           word
           of
           their
           testimonie
           ,
           as
           Egypt
           was
           by
           Moses
           and
           Aaron
           .
           These
           two
           Witnesses
           are
           said
           to
           bee
           the
           two
           Olive
           trees
           ,
           and
           anointed
           ones
           ,
           who
           stand
           before
           the
           God
           of
           all
           the
           Earth
           ,
           
             Chapter
             11.
             vers
             4.
          
           which
           beeing
           compared
           with
           
             Zach.
             chap.
             3.
          
           and
           4.
           tel's
           us
           ,
           who
           are
           meant
           by
           these
           two
           Witnesses
           :
           for
           there
           Jehoshua
           and
           Zerubbabel
           are
           anointed
           ,
           and
           established
           to
           bring
           back
           the
           captivitie
           of
           Judah
           and
           Jerusalem
           out
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           which
           they
           were
           to
           do
           not
           by
           the
           might
           and
           power
           of
           men
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           Spirit
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           the
           efficacie
           of
           his
           grace
           .
        
         
           The
           difference
           then
           of
           these
           two
           Witnesses
           from
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           is
           in
           this
           .
           First
           ,
           that
           hee
           is
           but
           one
           who
           doth
           exercise
           a
           twofold
           power
           ;
           that
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           his
           own
           devising
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           pretended
           one
           of
           Miracles
           ;
           these
           are
           two
           whose
           testimonie
           is
           one
           and
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           the
           effect
           thereof
           towards
           men
           ,
           but
           one
           from
           them
           both
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           hee
           taketh
           upon
           him
           a
           Coërcive
           power
           ;
           and
           to
           bring
           people
           under
           
           his
           yoke
           ,
           hee
           set's
           up
           differential
           tokens
           ,
           viz.
           the
           Beast's
           Image
           ,
           his
           mark
           and
           name
           ;
           but
           these
           make
           use
           of
           none
           other
           power
           ,
           but
           of
           that
           which
           is
           properly
           prophetical
           ;
           nor
           do
           they
           press
           anie
           distinct
           and
           particular
           notes
           of
           subjection
           to
           themselvs
           upon
           anie
           coërcively
           ;
           but
           have
           power
           onely
           to
           plague
           such
           as
           receiv
           not
           the
           Testimonie
           of
           Jesus
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           hee
           doth
           work
           upon
           the
           ignorant
           imaginations
           of
           sillie
           people
           ,
           strange
           impressions
           of
           admiration
           concerning
           the
           Divinitie
           of
           his
           own
           waie
           ;
           by
           deceitful
           persuasions
           which
           are
           a
           kinde
           of
           witch-craft
           ,
           whereby
           people
           are
           made
           to
           cleav
           unto
           his
           worldlie
           interest
           ,
           as
           a
           slave
           unto
           the
           same
           ;
           but
           these
           labor
           not
           to
           gain
           to
           themselvs
           ,
           the
           affections
           and
           fancies
           of
           people
           ;
           but
           to
           gain
           their
           understandings
           to
           the
           knowledg
           of
           the
           Truth
           ,
           and
           their
           consciences
           to
           the
           Subjection
           which
           is
           due
           to
           Christ
           Jesus
           without
           partialitie
           .
           So
           then
           fourthly
           ,
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           in
           a
           word
           ,
           exalt's
           and
           seek's
           to
           set
           up
           himself
           in
           the
           spirits
           of
           men
           ;
           but
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           humble
           and
           denie
           themselvs
           ,
           that
           the
           Cross
           of
           Christ
           may
           bee
           exalted
           over
           their
           spirits
           ,
           and
           hee
           onelie
           set
           up
           in
           the
           hearts
           of
           men
           .
           Fifthly
           and
           lastly
           ,
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           medling
           with
           State-matters
           ,
           take's
           both
           the
           Ministerie
           and
           Magistracie
           upon
           him
           ,
           making
           the
           one
           subordinately
           to
           serv
           the
           other's
           turns
           ,
           in
           reference
           to
           men
           ;
           but
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           who
           are
           faithful
           Magistrates
           and
           Ministers
           ,
           
           join
           their
           Testimonies
           in
           their
           places
           coordinately
           ;
           to
           make
           out
           one
           waie
           of
           righteousness
           and
           truth
           ,
           to
           the
           consciences
           of
           men
           ,
           in
           reference
           to
           God
           in
           Christ
           .
           And
           this
           much
           concerning
           these
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           thing
           to
           bee
           spoken
           of
           ;
           is
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Whore
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Bride
           .
        
         
           The
           Angel
           telleth
           John
           plainly
           ,
           
             chap.
             17.
             vers
             18.
          
           that
           the
           woman
           which
           hee
           had
           seen
           rideing
           upon
           the
           scarlet-colored
           Beast
           ,
           with
           a
           name
           written
           on
           her
           forehead
           ,
           
             Mysterie
             Babylon
             the
             Great
             ;
             the
             Mother
             of
             Harlots
             ,
             and
             Abominations
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             was
             that
             great
             Citie
             which
             reigneth
             over
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           Now
           it
           is
           evident
           that
           Rome
           alone
           as
           Papal
           ,
           hath
           reigned
           in
           a
           Mysterie
           over
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           ever
           since
           heathenish
           Rome
           determined
           ,
           which
           reigned
           not
           in
           a
           Mysterie
           ,
           but
           with
           outward
           force
           over
           these
           Kings
           ,
           and
           in
           that
           respect
           was
           the
           fourth
           Beast
           seen
           by
           Daniel
           :
           therefore
           if
           wee
           can
           observ
           what
           the
           Properties
           of
           her
           whorish
           nature
           and
           practice
           hath
           been
           ;
           and
           how
           shee
           hath
           brought
           forth
           Harlots
           and
           all
           abominations
           in
           the
           earth
           ,
           wee
           shall
           discern
           this
           Mysterie
           ,
           and
           discover
           those
           that
           partake
           therein
           with
           her
           .
           The
           text
           saith
           ,
           
             Chapter
             17.
             vers
             4.
          
           that
           shee
           was
           
             arraied
             in
             purple
             and
             Scarlet
             ;
             and
             decked
             with
             Gold
             ,
             with
             precious
             stones
             and
             pearls
             ;
             and
             that
             shee
             had
             in
             her
             hand
             a
             Cup
             
             full
             of
             abominations
             and
             filthiness
             of
             her
             forninications
             ;
             and
             chapter
             14.
             vers
             8
             ▪
          
           It
           is
           said
           shee
           made
           
             the
             Nations
             drink
             of
             the
             wine
             of
             these
             fornications
             ▪
          
           and
           
             Chapter
             18.
             vers
             3.
          
           that
           
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
             have
             committed
             fornication
             with
             her
             .
          
        
         
           By
           the
           woman
           is
           understood
           the
           Romane
           Hierarchie
           ,
           which
           hath
           born
           Rule
           over
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           rid
           in
           triumph
           upon
           the
           mindes
           of
           all
           men
           ,
           as
           upon
           Beasts
           .
        
         
           Her
           decking
           and
           raiment
           of
           purple
           ,
           of
           Scarlet
           ,
           of
           Gold
           ,
           of
           precious
           stones
           ,
           and
           of
           Pearls
           ,
           is
           the
           outward
           visible
           magnificence
           of
           that
           worship
           which
           shee
           set's
           up
           ,
           which
           hath
           none
           other
           beautie
           ,
           but
           such
           ornaments
           to
           amuse
           the
           Imaginations
           of
           foolish
           people
           ,
           and
           bewitch
           them
           with
           the
           formalities
           of
           Ceremonies
           .
        
         
           Her
           Fornications
           are
           the
           love
           of
           this
           present
           world
           ,
           whereunto
           shee
           doth
           allure
           men
           to
           commit
           Whoredom
           with
           her
           :
           by
           the
           enjoiment
           of
           power
           ,
           of
           profit
           ,
           and
           of
           pleasures
           ,
           which
           shee
           studieth
           to
           furnish
           her
           lovers
           withal
           ,
           and
           to
           deprive
           other
           men
           off
           .
        
         
           Her
           abominations
           are
           all
           manner
           of
           sinful
           ,
           and
           unconscionable
           practices
           which
           shee
           doth
           allow
           of
           in
           all
           who
           serv
           her
           ends
           thereby
           ,
           whereof
           shee
           make's
           a
           trade
           ,
           although
           they
           bee
           never
           so
           abhorrent
           from
           the
           light
           of
           Christianitie
           ,
           and
           of
           Nature
           ;
           these
           abominations
           are
           the
           Idolatries
           which
           shee
           hath
           set
           up
           ;
           
           and
           the
           dispensations
           which
           shee
           hath
           given
           to
           all
           unnatural
           sins
           ,
           and
           unjust
           practices
           ,
           as
           Sodomie
           ,
           Incest
           ,
           Murther
           ,
           Breach
           of
           Covenant
           ,
           and
           oath
           in
           all
           manner
           of
           Contracts
           .
           Rebellion
           of
           Children
           to
           Parents
           ,
           and
           of
           Subjects
           to
           Magistrates
           ,
           all
           manner
           of
           fraudulent
           circumventions
           ,
           and
           oppressions
           of
           the
           innocent
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           .
        
         
           The
           Cup
           which
           is
           in
           her
           hand
           ,
           whereby
           shee
           causeth
           all
           Nations
           to
           drink
           ,
           and
           swallow
           down
           these
           abominations
           ;
           is
           her
           pretended
           Autoritie
           ,
           as
           the
           unerring
           Church
           having
           power
           to
           binde
           and
           loose
           all
           things
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           on
           Earth
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           men's
           Consciences
           ;
           and
           to
           manage
           all
           the
           reasons
           of
           State
           ,
           and
           publick
           affairs
           of
           the
           world
           ;
           with
           supreme
           Jurisdiction
           ,
           
             in
             ordine
             ad
             spiritualia
          
           .
           And
           the
           Fornication
           which
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           have
           committed
           with
           her
           ,
           hath
           been
           their
           compliance
           and
           correspondence
           with
           her
           ,
           to
           make
           use
           of
           her
           power
           and
           influence
           ,
           towards
           their
           neighbors
           and
           Subjects
           ,
           to
           gain
           credit
           thereby
           unto
           themselvs
           ;
           together
           with
           the
           studie
           of
           her
           Policies
           ,
           to
           learn
           from
           her
           the
           maximes
           of
           deceit
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           reasons
           of
           State-advantages
           ,
           to
           get
           power
           ,
           by
           which
           means
           shee
           hath
           intelligence
           of
           all
           the
           Counsels
           of
           Princes
           ,
           becaus
           they
           are
           brought
           to
           drink
           them
           out
           of
           her
           Cup
           ,
           and
           make
           use
           of
           her
           embraces
           and
           favors
           to
           bring
           them
           to
           pass
           :
           and
           her
           whorish
           studie
           is
           onely
           to
           keep
           
           them
           all
           at
           variance
           one
           with
           another
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           them
           severally
           depend
           on
           her
           Love
           ,
           that
           shee
           may
           alwayes
           arbitrate
           their
           affairs
           ,
           and
           their
           interests
           may
           bee
           subject
           onely
           to
           her
           favor
           ,
           and
           so
           far
           as
           anie
           Hierarchie
           on
           Earth
           ,
           or
           Church-constitution
           doth
           make
           it self
           by
           these
           waies
           considerable
           in
           a
           State
           ,
           or
           by
           waies
           like
           unto
           these
           seek's
           to
           bee
           respected
           by
           the
           meaner
           or
           higher
           sort
           of
           people
           ,
           they
           all
           drink
           of
           the
           same
           Cup
           of
           her
           fornications
           .
           Let
           not
           therefore
           anie
           form
           of
           outward
           worship
           recommend
           it self
           to
           the
           followers
           of
           the
           Lamb
           by
           anie
           interests
           of
           State
           ;
           nor
           let
           anie
           sort
           of
           men
           ,
           who
           pretend
           to
           Religious
           administrations
           ,
           applie
           themselvs
           to
           the
           practices
           of
           this
           natrue
           ,
           nor
           anie
           true
           Christian
           Magistrates
           intend
           the
           compliances
           and
           correspondencies
           of
           this
           kinde
           ,
           and
           for
           such
           ends
           ;
           with
           anie
           Masters
           of
           formalities
           ,
           who
           go
           a
           whoring
           after
           the
           appearances
           of
           outward
           things
           in
           matters
           of
           worship
           and
           of
           State
           ,
           which
           take
           either
           onely
           ,
           or
           most
           with
           sensual
           imaginations
           ,
           who
           may
           bee
           rid
           upon
           like
           beasts
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           Bride
           ,
           wee
           exspect
           her
           from
           Heaven
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           apparent
           ,
           that
           as
           yet
           wee
           have
           no
           permanent
           Citie
           here
           on
           Earth
           ,
           such
           as
           the
           Apostle
           hath
           described
           the
           Lamb's
           wife
           to
           bee
           in
           Revelation
           
             Chap.
             22.
             vers
             10.
             till
             the
             end
             .
          
           wee
           therefore
           seek
           this
           Citie
           which
           hath
           foundations
           ;
           
           and
           if
           wee
           walk
           by
           faith
           to
           get
           an
           entrance
           into
           her
           ,
           Let
           us
           wait
           through
           the
           Spirit
           for
           the
           Hope
           of
           Righteousness
           ,
           which
           is
           promised
           to
           the
           Saints
           ,
           and
           walking
           after
           the
           Spirit
           and
           not
           after
           the
           flesh
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           wee
           are
           advanced
           in
           the
           new
           Creature
           ,
           so
           far
           are
           wee
           fitted
           and
           prepared
           for
           the
           Bridegroom
           's
           comming
           ,
           to
           enter
           with
           him
           into
           his
           wedding-Chamber
           .
           How
           far
           anie
           Societies
           of
           Churches
           ,
           or
           single
           Church-Congregations
           have
           received
           the
           favor
           
             to
             bee
             arraied
             in
             fine
             linnen
             ,
          
           
             clean
             and
             white
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             righteousness
             of
             Saints
          
           ;
           is
           to
           mee
           ,
           as
           yet
           not
           apparent
           ;
           for
           I
           must
           confess
           that
           I
           have
           not
           seen
           anie
           perfection
           in
           anie
           of
           them
           ;
           and
           I
           know
           that
           I
           have
           made
           it
           a
           good
           part
           of
           my
           work
           to
           visit
           them
           all
           ,
           and
           to
           consider
           them
           in
           their
           waies
           ,
           aswel
           abroad
           as
           at
           home
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           several
           associations
           :
           and
           truly
           the
           Laodicean
           temper
           is
           over
           us
           all
           ;
           and
           if
           wee
           repent
           not
           and
           becom
           zealous
           in
           the
           waie
           of
           Righteousness
           ;
           and
           of
           holie
           Communion
           without
           partialitie
           and
           without
           Hypocrisie
           ;
           no-doubt
           Christ
           will
           spue
           us
           all
           out
           of
           his
           mouth
           ,
           and
           call
           unto
           him
           another
           people
           ,
           which
           shall
           bee
           made
           readie
           for
           the
           Marriage-Supper
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           and
           although
           this
           seem's
           to
           bee
           a
           sad
           sentence
           over
           the
           Churches
           which
           are
           now
           counted
           wise
           Virgins
           ;
           yet
           there
           is
           neither
           want
           of
           Charitie
           in
           it
           towards
           them
           ,
           
           as
           if
           I
           did
           not
           wish
           them
           well
           ;
           nor
           want
           of
           Hope
           for
           them
           ,
           as
           if
           I
           did
           not
           exspect
           their
           Reformation
           ;
           but
           in
           both
           these
           respects
           I
           do
           bear
           witness
           ,
           that
           none
           of
           them
           all
           are
           the
           Bride
           whose
           comming
           out
           of
           the
           wilderness
           is
           exspected
           ;
           but
           that
           all
           their
           visible
           estates
           are
           the
           outward
           Court
           ,
           which
           is
           given
           to
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           wherein
           to
           this
           daie
           ,
           they
           tread
           the
           Holie
           Citie
           under
           foot
           ;
           and
           are
           in
           the
           wilderness
           of
           spiritual
           desolation
           and
           confusion
           ;
           but
           that
           out
           of
           their
           invisible
           state
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           inner
           Court
           and
           Temple
           ,
           wherein
           they
           have
           Communion
           with
           God
           ,
           and
           one
           with
           another
           ;
           a
           Citie
           at
           last
           will
           rise
           up
           and
           appear
           ,
           is
           my
           confident
           exspectation
           ,
           and
           that
           this
           may
           com
           to
           pass
           speedily
           ,
           it
           shall
           bee
           my
           constant
           praier
           ;
           but
           to
           bring
           this
           to
           pass
           ,
           I
           finde
           by
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           that
           not
           onely
           Babylon
           is
           to
           bee
           destroied
           with
           mightie
           Judgments
           from
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Beast
           is
           to
           bee
           plagued
           and
           punished
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           armies
           of
           Saints
           under
           Christ's
           conduct
           shall
           from
           Heaven
           com
           ,
           in
           Battel-array
           ,
           and
           war
           against
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           fals
           Prophet
           ,
           and
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           earth
           ;
           now
           how
           far
           this
           battel
           is
           carried
           on
           in
           these
           our
           daies
           ,
           and
           to
           what
           parties
           wee
           are
           engaged
           ,
           and
           in
           what
           waie
           wee
           put
           forth
           our
           strength
           to
           fight
           ,
           and
           what
           interest
           wee
           fight
           for
           ,
           whether
           for
           Christ's
           purely
           ,
           or
           for
           our
           own
           also
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           mixed
           with
           that
           of
           the
           King
           's
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           and
           in
           them
           with
           the
           beast's
           ,
           will
           bee
           
           our
           wisedom
           seriously
           to
           consider
           ;
           and
           I
           wish
           that
           my
           Countrie-men
           in
           Scotland
           ,
           who
           have
           fixed
           so
           strong
           an
           interest
           upon
           the
           terms
           of
           the
           Covenant
           ,
           and
           are
           counted
           a
           wise
           Nation
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           might
           bee
           made
           so
           spiritually
           wise
           as
           to
           discern
           their
           own
           station
           ,
           and
           what
           help
           they
           give
           unto
           the
           Beast
           ;
           by
           their
           present
           proceedings
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           my
           heartie
           desire
           that
           the
           Brethren
           here
           ,
           who
           for
           the
           sake
           of
           Scotland
           in
           reference
           to
           the
           Covenant
           ,
           keep
           themselvs
           at
           a
           distance
           from
           the
           main
           work
           ;
           and
           obstruct
           by
           their
           non-concurrence
           in
           things
           good
           and
           lawful
           ,
           the
           progress
           of
           our
           Reformation
           ,
           might
           bee
           wakened
           to
           see
           the
           posture
           wherein
           they
           stand
           ,
           in
           this
           their
           warfare
           ,
           and
           if
           this
           plain
           discoverie
           of
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Quarrel
           between
           the
           Beast
           and
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           between
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           and
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           ,
           and
           between
           the
           Whore
           and
           the
           Bride
           that
           is
           now
           comming
           out
           of
           the
           Wilderness
           ,
           may
           bee
           a
           means
           to
           open
           the
           eies
           ,
           and
           undeceiv
           anie
           of
           them
           ;
           I
           should
           rejoice
           at
           it
           :
           however
           I
           have
           herein
           discharged
           my
           Conscience
           ,
           and
           born
           witness
           without
           partialitie
           to
           the
           Truth
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           it
           is
           reveled
           unto
           mee
           ,
           which
           I
           hope
           I
           shall
           never
           refuse
           to
           seal
           with
           my
           death
           ,
           if
           need
           bee
           ,
           and
           this
           I
           conceiv
           is
           the
           onely
           waie
           of
           our
           warfare
           ,
           who
           pretend
           to
           bee
           followers
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           in
           the
           work
           of
           the
           Ministerie
           ,
           that
           was
           should
           have
           none
           other
           weapons
           of
           our
           
           warfare
           ,
           but
           one
           Sword
           amongst
           us
           all
           ,
           which
           is
           that
           ,
           which
           proceedeth
           out
           of
           his
           mouth
           ;
           and
           that
           our
           waie
           to
           fight
           with
           this
           weapon
           ,
           against
           our
           adversaries
           should
           bee
           none
           other
           ;
           but
           to
           follow
           Christ
           in
           our
           lawful
           Calling
           (
           which
           is
           
             our
             white
             hors
          
           )
           and
           with
           an
           holie
           blameless
           personal
           conversation
           towards
           all
           men
           ,
           (
           which
           is
           our
           
             fine
             linnen
             white
             and
             clean
          
           )
           for
           herein
           doth
           lie
           our
           whole
           strength
           ,
           and
           what
           application
           soëver
           wee
           make
           to
           other
           weapons
           ,
           which
           the
           powers
           of
           darkness
           can
           make
           use
           of
           aswel
           as
           wee
           ;
           they
           will
           but
           weaken
           us
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           encountring
           with
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           wee
           shall
           finde
           them
           stronger
           at
           those
           weapons
           them
           wee
           can
           bee
           :
           so
           that
           by
           such
           means
           ,
           I
           exspect
           not
           that
           they
           shall
           fall
           before
           us
           ,
           although
           our
           victories
           bee
           never
           so
           great
           ;
           therefore
           as
           for
           mine
           own
           part
           ,
           till
           I
           can
           perceiv
           ,
           that
           wee
           who
           pretend
           to
           bee
           in
           the
           first
           rank
           of
           the
           Lamb's
           followers
           ;
           can
           make
           better
           use
           of
           these
           spiritual
           weapons
           then
           hitherto
           wee
           have
           don
           ;
           and
           can
           in
           the
           Communion
           of
           Saints
           join
           our
           forces
           together
           ,
           otherwise
           then
           now
           wee
           do
           ,
           to
           imitate
           the
           Captain
           of
           our
           Salvation
           ;
           
           I
           shall
           bee
           a
           man
           of
           no
           great
           exspectation
           ;
           yet
           becaus
           I
           believ
           that
           these
           things
           shall
           com
           to
           pass
           ;
           and
           that
           by
           the
           armor
           of
           light
           the
           Children
           of
           light
           will
           at
           last
           prevail
           ;
           therefore
           I
           do
           speak
           ,
           and
           becaus
           I
           both
           believ
           and
           speak
           ,
           therefore
           I
           am
           not
           inclined
           to
           make
           haste
           ;
           as
           som
           (
           who
           take
           the
           shadows
           of
           their
           own
           conceits
           ;
           for
           the
           substance
           of
           Christ's
           Kingdom
           )
           are
           inclined
           to
           do
           ;
           for
           this
           caus
           ,
           although
           I
           will
           not
           contradict
           the
           appearances
           of
           Hopes
           ,
           which
           the
           autor
           of
           this
           Treatise
           doth
           give
           unto
           the
           Protestant
           Caus
           ,
           to
           rife
           within
           a
           few
           years
           in
           a
           considerable
           Posture
           against
           Poperie
           ;
           yet
           I
           must
           take
           leav
           to
           confess
           ,
           that
           although
           the
           splendor
           of
           the
           Whore
           ,
           and
           her
           influence
           upon
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           and
           the
           power
           of
           the
           Papal
           Sea
           as
           it
           is
           Hierarchical
           ,
           were
           utterly
           consumed
           and
           abolished
           ;
           by
           the
           brightness
           of
           Christ's
           appearing
           in
           the
           Spirit
           on
           the
           one
           hand
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           hatred
           of
           the
           whore's
           Lovers
           ,
           and
           the
           turning
           of
           their
           hearts
           against
           her
           on
           the
           other
           hand
           ;
           yet
           that
           the
           war
           with
           the
           beast
           ,
           aud
           with
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           ;
           and
           with
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           shall
           continue
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           beast
           and
           the
           
           fals
           Prophet
           ,
           with
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           earth
           will
           bee
           found
           to
           have
           their
           friends
           not
           onely
           amongst
           those
           who
           are
           called
           Papists
           ;
           but
           even
           amongst
           those
           that
           are
           most
           fierce
           enemies
           to
           Poperie
           ,
           and
           count
           themselvs
           the
           best
           of
           Christians
           and
           reformed
           Protestants
           .
           It
           is
           one
           thing
           to
           bee
           no
           friend
           to
           the
           State
           ,
           and
           predominant
           power
           and
           craftiness
           of
           the
           Whore
           ,
           as
           shee
           appear's
           from
           without
           ,
           and
           in
           another
           place
           at
           a
           distance
           from
           us
           :
           and
           another
           thing
           it
           is
           to
           renounce
           the
           beastlie
           nature
           ,
           and
           the
           deceitfulness
           by
           which
           wee
           are
           led
           to
           embrace
           the
           Image
           ,
           the
           mark
           ,
           the
           name
           ,
           and
           the
           number
           of
           the
           name
           of
           the
           Beast
           within
           our
           selvs
           ,
           that
           is
           for
           our
           own
           interest
           ,
           and
           the
           concernments
           of
           flesh
           and
           blood
           .
           I
           do
           not
           finde
           in
           the
           last
           battel
           the
           Whore
           named
           at
           all
           ;
           I
           finde
           onely
           as
           leaders
           of
           the
           partie
           opposite
           to
           Christ
           ;
           the
           Beast
           and
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           earth
           ;
           which
           I
           take
           to
           bee
           the
           Beast
           ,
           with
           his
           horns
           ;
           for
           the
           Horns
           which
           are
           in
           the
           heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           are
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           which
           make
           use
           of
           the
           Bodie
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           of
           her
           strength
           ,
           and
           are
           made
           use
           of
           ,
           by
           the
           heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           
           to
           war
           against
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           I
           finde
           ,
           that
           these
           horns
           ,
           although
           they
           fight
           against
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           yet
           that
           they
           are
           not
           alwayes
           friends
           with
           the
           Whore
           ;
           and
           for
           their
           own
           interest
           's
           sake
           ,
           not
           onely
           rob
           her
           of
           her
           ornaments
           ;
           but
           feed
           upon
           her
           flesh
           ,
           although
           for
           a
           season
           ,
           whiles
           it
           was
           their
           supposed
           advantage
           ,
           they
           suffered
           her
           to
           ride
           upon
           them
           ,
           aud
           govern
           them
           with
           the
           bridle
           of
           her
           autoritie
           :
           but
           when
           shee
           is
           cast
           off
           from
           the
           beast's
           back
           ,
           the
           Beast
           and
           his
           horns
           are
           as
           strong
           as
           ever
           ;
           and
           more
           fit
           to
           fight
           in
           their
           brutal
           waie
           against
           the
           Lamb
           then
           before
           ;
           I
           believ
           therefore
           ,
           that
           the
           Whore
           as
           shee
           is
           alreadie
           little
           considerable
           in
           comparison
           of
           what
           shee
           hath
           been
           ;
           may
           vanish
           and
           bee
           made
           desolate
           by
           her
           own
           beastlie
           complices
           before
           the
           last
           battel
           ;
           but
           I
           believ
           not
           ,
           that
           wee
           shall
           have
           anie
           great
           earthlie
           Potentates
           at
           all
           ,
           ever
           to
           appear
           for
           the
           Lamb
           in
           this
           battel
           ;
           but
           that
           they
           shall
           all
           join
           alwayes
           with
           the
           beastlie
           nature
           of
           men
           ,
           against
           the
           Lamb-like
           holie
           nature
           of
           the
           Saints
           ;
           to
           discountenance
           ,
           to
           oppose
           and
           to
           destroie
           it
           ;
           but
           wee
           have
           a
           promise
           ,
           that
           although
           the
           two
           Witnesses
           of
           the
           Lamb
           
           shall
           bee
           killed
           by
           the
           Beast
           ,
           when
           they
           have
           finished
           their
           prophesying
           in
           Sackcloth
           ;
           yet
           that
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           when
           hee
           shall
           com
           in
           his
           own
           appearance
           ,
           with
           more
           witnesses
           then
           two
           or
           three
           ;
           even
           with
           a
           whole
           armie
           of
           witnesses
           ;
           not
           in
           Sackcloth
           upon
           earth
           ,
           but
           in
           their
           fine
           linnen
           ,
           white
           and
           clean
           ;
           and
           upon
           their
           white
           horses
           ,
           in
           their
           spiritual
           emploiments
           ,
           as
           Citizens
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           following
           their
           leader
           against
           the
           powers
           of
           the
           earth
           ;
           when
           (
           I
           saie
           )
           the
           Lamb
           shall
           com
           thus
           attended
           ,
           the
           promise
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           all
           his
           horns
           shall
           bee
           overcom
           by
           him
           :
           for
           there
           is
           no
           power
           in
           the
           world
           able
           to
           resist
           the
           united
           strength
           of
           the
           holie
           ones
           ,
           and
           the
           dints
           of
           the
           sword
           which
           hath
           two
           edges
           ,
           which
           beeing
           able
           to
           divide
           between
           the
           soul
           and
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           and
           to
           discern
           the
           subtilest
           thoughts
           ,
           and
           the
           deceitfullest
           intents
           of
           the
           beastlie
           heart
           of
           man
           it
           shall
           undoubted
           slaie
           them
           ;
           therefore
           although
           I
           finde
           not
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           here
           mentioned
           as
           active
           in
           leading
           on
           the
           war
           (
           whereunto
           certainly
           for
           the
           contrivance
           of
           it
           on
           the
           Beast's
           part
           ,
           hee
           cannot
           bee
           
           wanting
           )
           yet
           hee
           is
           found
           to
           bee
           taken
           prisoner
           with
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           with
           him
           cast
           into
           the
           Lake
           which
           burneth
           with
           fire
           and
           Brimstone
           .
           The
           Whore
           and
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           are
           cleerly
           distinct
           Mysteries
           ,
           and
           have
           their
           several
           waies
           of
           Acting
           ,
           though
           with
           a
           concurrence
           ;
           for
           so
           long
           as
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Whore
           doth
           last
           ,
           which
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           (
           who
           is
           the
           intellectual
           subtiltie
           of
           the
           Serpent's
           nature
           in
           man
           ;
           as
           the
           Beast
           is
           his
           brutish
           sensualitie
           and
           strength
           )
           fed
           with
           prosperitie
           ,
           and
           delicacies
           did
           beget
           ,
           and
           set
           upon
           the
           beast's
           back
           ,
           the
           said
           fals
           Prophet
           doth
           make
           use
           of
           her
           ,
           that
           by
           her
           baits
           and
           allurements
           hee
           may
           draw
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           the
           earth
           to
           drink
           out
           of
           the
           cup
           of
           her
           fornications
           ;
           but
           when
           prosperitie
           and
           delicacies
           ceas
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Phials
           of
           God's
           wrath
           upon
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           distress
           of
           Nations
           ,
           then
           shee
           is
           not
           of
           use
           any
           more
           ;
           but
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           which
           begat
           her
           ,
           will
           to
           serv
           the
           Beast's
           interest
           destroie
           her
           also
           ,
           and
           will
           bee
           active
           in
           another
           waie
           against
           the
           Lamb
           without
           her
           .
           And
           thus
           I
           conceiv
           the
           battel
           will
           bee
           ,
           or
           is
           alreadie
           formed
           ,
           on
           the
           
           side
           of
           the
           beastlie
           partie
           ,
           which
           fight
           's
           onely
           to
           maintein
           the
           interest
           of
           flesh
           and
           blood
           ,
           which
           is
           self-greatness
           ,
           and
           the
           conveniences
           of
           pleasure
           ;
           with
           all
           outward
           force
           and
           deceit
           ,
           against
           the
           interest
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ;
           which
           is
           self-denial
           ,
           and
           the
           conveniences
           of
           serving
           others
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           through
           love
           :
           and
           by
           the
           other
           side
           the
           battel
           is
           formed
           in
           the
           spirits
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           to
           maintein
           the
           interest
           of
           the
           Lamb
           of
           God
           ,
           who
           having
           taken
           away
           the
           sins
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           will
           now
           appear
           to
           destroie
           the
           works
           of
           the
           Devil
           ,
           by
           setting
           up
           the
           power
           of
           his
           life
           amongst
           men
           ;
           till
           therefore
           I
           shall
           see
           either
           the
           Characters
           of
           this
           life
           apparent
           in
           the
           beautie
           of
           Love
           and
           Holiness
           amongst
           us
           ;
           or
           the
           waies
           fully
           opened
           and
           prepared
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           power
           of
           the
           life
           of
           Christ
           by
           his
           word
           will
           becom
           prevalent
           ,
           to
           lead
           all
           men's
           thoughts
           and
           affections
           captive
           to
           the
           obedience
           of
           his
           will
           ;
           I
           shall
           not
           much
           rejoice
           ,
           nor
           greatly
           triumph
           at
           anie
           of
           our
           outward
           Conquests
           .
           I
           remember
           that
           the
           Whore
           was
           long
           ago
           cast
           out
           from
           amongst
           us
           (
           for
           our
           Hierarchie
           by
           the
           King
           and
           Queen's
           consent
           was
           abolished
           )
           
           before
           the
           Beast
           begun
           to
           rage
           and
           fight
           ;
           so
           then
           as
           amongst
           us
           ;
           so
           also
           in
           all
           Europe
           ,
           the
           Papal
           Hierarchie
           may
           bee
           cast
           off
           ,
           and
           yet
           the
           Beast's
           rage
           bee
           greater
           then
           ever
           for
           the
           interest
           of
           a
           tyrannical
           power
           ;
           aswel
           over
           the
           Consciences
           ,
           as
           over
           the
           bodies
           and
           estates
           of
           men
           ,
           and
           that
           two
           manner
           of
           waies
           ,
           either
           by
           the
           absoluteness
           of
           a
           governing
           power
           ,
           through
           the
           necessities
           of
           war
           ,
           enforcing
           all
           men
           to
           concur
           with
           the
           interests
           which
           it
           settles
           ,
           for
           common
           safetie
           ,
           to
           preserv
           us
           in
           freedom
           from
           a
           forreign
           power
           ;
           or
           by
           a
           total
           dissolution
           of
           all
           government
           ,
           wherein
           everie
           man
           who
           hath
           more
           might
           then
           his
           neighbor
           ,
           may
           take
           a
           libertie
           to
           tyrannize
           over
           him
           ,
           and
           oppress
           him
           without
           controul
           :
           by
           both
           these
           waies
           the
           Beast
           may
           rage
           over
           all
           Europe
           ,
           against
           the
           Lamb-like
           state
           of
           Christianitie
           ,
           a
           long
           while
           after
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           Pope
           ;
           and
           Protestants
           may
           ,
           by
           the
           means
           of
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           bee
           intangled
           amongst
           themselvs
           ,
           and
           embroiled
           into
           quarrels
           ,
           and
           beastlie
           animosities
           ,
           for
           the
           designs
           of
           flesh
           and
           blood
           as
           much
           as
           ever
           ;
           for
           if
           God
           send
           not
           forth
           another
           
           Spirit
           ,
           then
           as
           yet
           is
           apparent
           in
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           our
           Professors
           ,
           to
           unite
           us
           in
           his
           waie
           ,
           and
           to
           guid
           us
           in
           this
           warfare
           ,
           wee
           shall
           bee
           found
           as
           much
           as
           anie
           to
           favor
           the
           Beast
           .
           Till
           therefore
           I
           can
           perceiv
           ,
           that
           the
           banner
           of
           this
           Spirit
           is
           lifted
           up
           amongst
           us
           ;
           and
           that
           those
           who
           are
           upright
           in
           heart
           rank
           themselvs
           under
           it
           ;
           and
           make
           use
           of
           the
           weapons
           of
           Righteousness
           ,
           and
           the
           armor
           of
           Salvation
           ;
           for
           the
           end
           for
           which
           Christ
           hath
           put
           them
           in
           their
           hands
           ;
           I
           shall
           not
           conceiv
           much
           of
           anie
           sudden
           enjoiment
           of
           the
           glorious
           libertie
           of
           the
           Sons
           of
           God
           ;
           nor
           of
           anie
           full
           deliverance
           from
           the
           bondage
           ,
           whereinto
           Satan
           by
           the
           power
           of
           darkness
           ,
           and
           the
           spiritualitie
           of
           malice
           ,
           hath
           brought
           our
           beastlie
           nature
           .
           I
           watch
           therefore
           ,
           and
           look
           out
           more
           after
           the
           appearances
           ,
           and
           discoveries
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           then
           after
           other
           outward
           events
           and
           changes
           .
           I
           know
           that
           the
           shakings
           and
           Changes
           of
           States
           tend
           to
           make
           waie
           for
           this
           object
           of
           my
           Hope
           ;
           but
           I
           know
           also
           ,
           that
           before
           I
           can
           partake
           of
           it
           there
           shall
           bee
           a
           greater
           change
           brought
           upon
           the
           Spirits
           of
           men
           ,
           then
           now
           is
           upon
           their
           outward
           Estates
           .
           God
           hath
           hitherto
           been
           shaking
           the
           earth
           to
           some
           purpose
           ;
           but
           hee
           hath
           said
           that
           hee
           will
           also
           shake
           Heaven
           ;
           this
           hee
           hath
           begun
           to
           do
           ,
           and
           will
           do
           more
           fully
           ;
           becau●
           his
           aim
           is
           ,
           as
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           not
           onely
           to
           shake
           these
           things
           ,
           but
           
             also
             to
             remove
             the
             
             things
             which
             are
             shaken
             ,
             that
             the
             things
             which
             cannot
             bee
             shaken
             may
             remain
             .
          
           I
           therefore
           look
           out
           to
           see
           the
           foot-steps
           of
           his
           proceedings
           towards
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           this
           promise
           ;
           for
           till
           the
           things
           which
           are
           shaken
           in
           the
           Spirits
           of
           Professors
           ,
           bee
           removed
           out
           of
           them
           ,
           I
           cannot
           exspect
           a
           cleer
           manifestation
           in
           ,
           and
           settlement
           of
           their
           spirit
           about
           the
           things
           which
           must
           remain
           ;
           and
           till
           this
           appear
           ,
           and
           break
           forth
           amongst
           us
           ,
           I
           cannot
           also
           saie
           ,
           that
           the
           Bride
           is
           com
           out
           of
           the
           Wilderness
           ,
           or
           that
           wee
           have
           gotten
           the
           conquest
           over
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           over
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           .
        
         
           When
           therefore
           the
           banner
           of
           the
           Spirit
           of
           love
           without
           partialitie
           ,
           shall
           bee
           lifted
           up
           in
           the
           beautie
           of
           Holiness
           ,
           as
           the
           Ensign
           of
           the
           unitie
           of
           Faith
           ,
           and
           the
           badg
           of
           the
           common
           profession
           of
           Christianitie
           amongst
           Professors
           ,
           and
           when
           the
           Magistrates
           and
           Ministers
           shall
           understand
           their
           true
           conjunction
           in
           the
           waie
           of
           their
           Testimonie
           ;
           when
           by
           this
           means
           the
           Lord
           shall
           have
           washed
           the
           visible
           filth
           of
           the
           daughters
           of
           Sion
           ,
           and
           shall
           have
           purged
           the
           blood
           of
           Jerusalem
           from
           the
           midst
           thereof
           ,
           and
           shall
           also
           create
           upon
           everie
           dwelling
           place
           of
           Mount
           Zion
           ,
           and
           upon
           the
           assemblies
           and
           glorie
           thereof
           ,
           a
           defence
           ;
           also
           the
           Prophets
           shall
           not
           studie
           to
           make
           themselvs
           anie
           more
           considerable
           by
           a
           peculiar
           interest
           upon
           believers
           ;
           but
           shall
           know
           how
           to
           propose
           in
           common
           the
           waies
           of
           edification
           ,
           so
           
           demonstrably
           ,
           that
           everie
           one
           who
           shall
           sincerely
           affect
           the
           knowledg
           of
           Truth
           shall
           finde
           no
           difficultie
           to
           com
           by
           it
           :
           when
           the
           names
           of
           the
           Idols
           ,
           which
           everie
           partie
           for
           distinction's
           sake
           have
           made
           unto
           themselvs
           ,
           shall
           bee
           cut
           off
           :
           when
           the
           mercinarie
           waie
           of
           serving
           the
           Common-wealth
           of
           Israël
           ,
           chiefly
           in
           things
           belonging
           unto
           God
           shall
           ceas
           ,
           when
           the
           just
           measures
           and
           dimensions
           of
           the
           Citie
           of
           God
           shall
           bee
           known
           to
           the
           Master-builders
           ,
           and
           the
           waie
           discerned
           how
           to
           open
           the
           dores
           thereof
           unto
           those
           that
           have
           a
           right
           unto
           the
           tree
           of
           life
           :
           when
           the
           Temple
           in
           Heaven
           shall
           bee
           opened
           ,
           and
           the
           ark
           of
           the
           Covenant
           seen
           therein
           ,
           when
           the
           Children
           of
           Israël
           shall
           com
           ,
           they
           and
           the
           children
           of
           Judah
           together
           ,
           going
           and
           weeping
           and
           seeking
           the
           Lord
           their
           God
           ,
           and
           asking
           the
           waie
           to
           Zion
           with
           their
           faces
           thitherward
           ,
           then
           and
           not
           till
           then
           ,
           shall
           I
           exspect
           that
           the
           Bride
           will
           bee
           suddenly
           prepared
           ,
           and
           com
           out
           of
           the
           Wilderness
           to
           celebrate
           the
           marriage
           with
           the
           Lamb.
           And
           when
           together
           with
           these
           preparations
           of
           her
           comming
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Supper
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           the
           sword
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           the
           word
           of
           God
           according
           to
           the
           Scriptures
           of
           the
           Old
           and
           New
           Testimonie
           ;
           shall
           bee
           drawn
           out
           of
           the
           sheath
           thereof
           by
           that
           evidence
           of
           the
           Rules
           of
           Interpretation
           ,
           which
           none
           shall
           bee
           able
           to
           contradict
           :
           and
           by
           that
           exactness
           of
           order
           of
           the
           waie
           of
           Prophetical
           
           exercitation
           :
           so
           that
           none
           shall
           bee
           able
           to
           complain
           of
           the
           want
           of
           just
           freedom
           ,
           to
           propose
           Truths
           or
           Scruples
           ;
           and
           yet
           bee
           restrained
           from
           the
           licentiousness
           of
           passionate
           railing
           ,
           proud
           disputing
           ,
           and
           vain
           jangling
           ;
           and
           by
           that
           meekness
           of
           love
           ,
           power
           of
           zeal
           ,
           and
           prudence
           with
           discretion
           in
           the
           application
           ,
           to
           correct
           the
           particular
           errors
           of
           men's
           waies
           ,
           so
           that
           there
           shall
           bee
           no
           caus
           of
           offence
           offered
           to
           the
           single-hearted
           ,
           although
           the
           wicked
           one
           shall
           bee
           discovered
           and
           slain
           in
           them
           :
           when
           (
           I
           saie
           )
           the
           sword
           of
           the
           Spirit
           shall
           bee
           thus
           unsheathed
           ,
           then
           I
           shall
           exspect
           ,
           that
           Judgment
           shall
           bee
           laid
           to
           the
           line
           ,
           and
           Righteousnes
           to
           the
           plummet
           ,
           against
           the
           unrighteous
           self-seekings
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           hail
           shall
           sweep
           away
           the
           refuge
           of
           lies
           ,
           and
           the
           waters
           overflow
           the
           hiding
           places
           ,
           which
           the
           fals
           Prophets
           have
           made
           unto
           themselvs
           :
           for
           then
           the
           foundation
           which
           is
           laid
           in
           Sion
           will
           bee
           seen
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           conformitie
           which
           everie
           thing
           in
           the
           Spirit
           of
           man
           shall
           bee
           obliged
           to
           have
           to
           Christ
           ,
           it
           shall
           bee
           tried
           (
           whether
           it
           bee
           matter
           of
           theorie
           ,
           or
           of
           affection
           ,
           or
           of
           Practice
           )
           that
           the
           all-sufficiencie
           of
           the
           anointing
           of
           Christ
           in
           his
           Saints
           ;
           may
           appear
           ,
           and
           bee
           found
           alone
           effectual
           (
           without
           the
           tricks
           of
           Humane
           Philosophie
           ,
           of
           Policie
           ,
           and
           of
           power
           )
           to
           slaie
           the
           wicked
           ,
           and
           to
           direct
           the
           Spirit
           of
           man
           to
           all
           the
           secrets
           of
           Divine
           and
           
           Humane
           wisedom
           :
           which
           shall
           bee
           found
           nothing
           but
           meer
           fallacies
           ,
           further
           then
           it
           hath
           a
           direct
           relation
           ,
           and
           subordination
           to
           manifest
           the
           life
           and
           glorie
           of
           Christ
           Jesus
           :
           when
           I
           saie
           this
           Sword
           shall
           bee
           thus
           made
           use
           of
           ,
           and
           applied
           ,
           then
           ,
           and
           not
           till
           then
           ,
           shall
           I
           exspect
           that
           the
           Beast
           and
           the
           fals
           Prophet
           shall
           bee
           taken
           alive
           ,
           and
           destroied
           ▪
           and
           till
           this
           bee
           don
           ,
           Satan
           cannot
           bee
           bound
           up
           from
           seducing
           the
           Nations
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           Thus
           you
           see
           the
           
             grounds
             of
             the
             Hopes
          
           of
        
         
           
             Your
             friend
             in
             Christ
             John
             Durie
             .
          
           
             At
             my
             Chamber
             
               Novemb.
               28.
               1650.
               
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
           
             
             
             
               Clavis
               Apocalyptica
               ,
               OR
               A
               Prophetical
               KEY
               ,
               BY
               WHICH
               The
               Great
               Mysteries
               in
               the
               Revelation
               of
               St
               John
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Prophet
               Daniel
               are
               opened
               ;
               It
               beeing
               made
               apparent
               That
               the
               Prophetical
               Numbers
               com
               to
               an
               end
               With
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               1655.
               
            
          
           
             
               
                 Judicious
                 Reader
                 !
              
            
             
               I
               Doubt
               not
               ,
               but
               there
               bee
               manie
               ,
               especially
               those
               ,
               who
               have
               anie
               Interest
               in
               the
               condition
               of
               Common-wealths
               ,
               that
               are
               desirous
               to
               know
               what
               at
               length
               may
               bee
               the
               end
               ,
               and
               
               issue
               of
               this
               present
               Combustion
               and
               Continuance
               of
               Wars
               ,
               that
               are
               spread
               over
               the
               face
               of
               Europe
               .
               Whereof
               the
               
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
              
               doth
               give
               information
               .
               But
               in
               respect
               it
               is
               commonly
               held
               and
               reputed
               a
               Mysterious
               and
               dark
               book
               ,
               I
               offer
               here
               
                 a
                 Key
              
               .
               Whosoëver
               doth
               well
               applie
               the
               same
               ,
               and
               observeth
               the
               Method
               and
               Harmonie
               of
               the
               Revelation
               ,
               and
               also
               diligently
               pondereth
               and
               considereth
               the
               second
               and
               seventh
               chapter
               of
               the
               Prophet
               Daniel
               ,
               hee
               will
               finde
               his
               desire
               satisfied
               ,
               and
               easily
               discover
               the
               Event
               of
               these
               wars
               .
               Farewel
               ,
               
                 (
                 Wel-meaning
                 Reader
                 !
              
               )
               and
               bee
               patient
               for
               a
               short
               time
               ,
               thou
               shalt
               see
               the
               end
               of
               these
               distractions
               
                 in
                 great
                 Revolutions
                 both
                 in
                 Church
                 and
                 State
                 ,
                 within
                 and
                 without
                 Europe
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
             
               Clavis
               Apocalyptica
               .
            
             
               THe
               eternal
               and
               true
               God
               ,
               to
               manifest
               his
               Fatherlie
               and
               faithful
               Providence
               ,
               which
               hee
               ,
               without
               intermission
               ,
               dispenseth
               to
               his
               People
               ,
               hath
               severally
               ,
               in
               
                 the
                 Old
                 Testament
              
               ,
               for
               the
               comfort
               of
               the
               godlie
               ,
               and
               warning
               of
               the
               wicked
               ,
               set
               and
               prefixed
               certain
               times
               ,
               how
               long
               hee
               would
               connive
               at
               the
               distresses
               and
               persecutions
               of
               his
               own
               ,
               and
               when
               hee
               would
               deliver
               and
               punish
               the
               wicked
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Before
               the
               Flood
               ,
               hee
               gave
               to
               them
               ,
               who
               would
               not
               anie
               more
               hearken
               to
               the
               reproof
               of
               his
               Spirit
               ,
               a
               hundred
               and
               twentie
               years
               respite
               .
               
                 Genes
                 .
                 6.
                 v.
                 3.
              
               
               When
               this
               time
               was
               exspired
               ,
               God
               came
               with
               the
               punishment
               of
               the
               Flood
               ,
               and
               destroied
               all
               that
               was
               living
               upon
               the
               face
               of
               the
               Earth
               ,
               except
               Noah
               ,
               and
               what
               was
               with
               him
               under
               God's
               protection
               in
               the
               Ark.
               
                 Gen.
                 7.
                 v.
                 23.
              
               
            
             
             
               2.
               
               
                 God
                 did
                 declare
                 to
                 the
                 Patriark
              
               Abraham
               ,
               that
               his
               seed
               should
               bee
               a
               stranger
               in
               a
               Land
               that
               was
               not
               theirs
               ,
               and
               should
               serv
               them
               ,
               and
               they
               should
               afflict
               them
               for
               four
               hundred
               years
               .
               But
               that
               Nation
               ,
               whom
               they
               should
               serv
               ,
               hee
               would
               judg
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               they
               should
               com
               out
               with
               great
               substance
               .
               
                 Genes
                 .
                 15.
              
               ver
               .
               13
               ,
               14.
               
            
             
               Which
               promise
               God
               did
               faithfully
               perform
               :
               and
               after
               the
               time
               was
               exspired
               ,
               hee
               brought
               forth
               his
               people
               by
               a
               strong
               and
               mightie
               hand
               out
               of
               the
               Egyptian
               bondage
               ,
               
                 and
                 drowned
                 Pharach
                 with
                 his
                 Host
                 in
                 the
                 Red
                 Sea.
              
               Exod
               .
               12.
               
                 v.
                 13
                 ,
                 14.
              
               
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               the
               Captivitie
               of
               Babylon
               was
               set
               a
               period
               of
               seventie
               years
               .
               
                 Ierem.
                 29.
                 10.
              
               
               When
               the
               time
               was
               accomplished
               ,
               the
               Lord
               stirred
               up
               the
               Spirit
               of
               Cyrus
               King
               of
               Persia
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               hee
               might
               let
               his
               people
               go
               up
               again
               to
               
                 Ierusalem
                 .
                 2
                 Chronic.
                 36.
                 v.
                 22
                 ,
                 23.
                 
              
            
             
               4.
               
               To
               Daniel
               shewed
               God
               that
               seventie
               weeks
               ,
               (
               which
               are
               annual
               or
               
               yearlie
               weeks
               ,
               or
               four
               hundred
               nintie
               years
               )
               were
               determined
               upon
               the
               Iewish
               people
               ,
               in
               which
               time
               the
               
                 Messiah
                 should
                 com
                 ,
                 and
                 bee
                 cut
                 off
                 ,
              
               and
               at
               length
               the
               Citie
               of
               Ierusalem
               bee
               destroied
               .
               
                 Daniel
                 c.
                 9.
                 v.
                 24
                 ,
                 25
                 ,
                 26
                 ,
                 27.
                 
              
               How
               truly
               all
               these
               things
               were
               accomplished
               ,
               is
               sufficiently
               evident
               .
            
             
               In
               like
               manner
               there
               is
               a
               certain
               time
               set
               ,
               and
               determined
               upon
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               in
               the
               
                 New
                 Testament
              
               ,
               how
               long
               shee
               shall
               bee
               subject
               and
               exposed
               to
               persecution
               ,
               and
               when
               shee
               shall
               bee
               delivered
               from
               it
               ,
               as
               it
               doth
               appear
               by
               the
               Prophet
               Daniel
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               Revelation
               of
               St
               Iohn
               .
               Whereof
               these
               Positions
               or
               Aphorisms
               may
               bee
               collected
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               This
               determined
               time
               is
               expressed
               in
               these
               following
               places
               of
               the
               Holie
               Scripture
               .
            
             
               Daniel
               7.
               v.
               25.
               
               They
               ,
               
                 (
                 the
                 Saints
                 )
                 shall
              
               bee
               given
               into
               his
               
                 (
                 the
                 fourth
                 beast's
              
               )
               hand
               ,
               until
               a
               time
               ,
               and
               times
               and
               the
               dividing
               of
               time
               .
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 
                 12.
                 
                 Chapt.
                 v.
                 7.
                 
                 An
                 Angel
                 doth
                 ask
                 the
                 question
                 .
              
               How
               long
               shall
               it
               bee
               to
               the
               end
               of
               these
               wonders
               ?
               
                 Another
                 returneth
                 this
                 answer
              
               :
               That
               it
               shall
               bee
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               times
               ,
               and
               a
               half
               .
            
             
               Revelat.
               12.
               v.
               14.
               
               
                 The
                 Woman
              
               (
               which
               is
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               )
               
                 shall
                 bee
                 in
                 the
                 wilderness
                 for
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 half
                 a
                 time
              
               ;
               which
               is
               to
               saie
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               expressed
               in
               the
               sixth
               vers
               of
               the
               same
               Chapter
               ,
               a
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               and
               threescore
               daies
               .
            
             
               Chapter
               11.
               v.
               3.
               
               
                 The
                 two
                 witnesses
                 shall
                 bee
                 clothed
                 with
                 Sackcloth
              
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               .
            
             
               Chapter
               11.
               v.
               2.
               
               The
               
                 Gentiles
                 shall
                 tread
                 under
                 foot
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
              
               fourtie
               two
               moneths
               .
            
             
               Chap.
               13.
               vers
               .
               5.
               
               
                 The
                 blasphemies
                 of
                 the
                 beast
                 shall
                 continue
              
               fourtie
               two
               moneths
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               These
               three
               sorts
               of
               numbers
               and
               times
               ,
               as
               
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 half
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 daies
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 fortie
                 two
                 moneths
              
               ,
               are
               of
               one
               and
               the
               same
               kinde
               ,
               and
               correspondent
               one
               to
               another
               .
               
               None
               would
               bee
               able
               to
               understand
               what
               
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 half
                 a
                 time
              
               is
               ,
               which
               are
               determined
               for
               the
               fourth
               beast
               ,
               
                 Dan.
                 7.
                 vers
                 15.
              
               
               For
               the
               wonders
               .
               
                 Dan.
                 12.
                 vers
                 7.
              
               
               And
               for
               the
               woman
               in
               the
               wilderness
               .
               
                 Revelat.
                 12.
                 vers
                 14.
              
               unless
               it
               had
               been
               said
               also
               of
               the
               Woman
               ;
               that
               shee
               shall
               bee
               nourished
               there
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               ,
               which
               doth
               explain
               the
               other
               .
               So
               that
               the
               Woman's
               3
               ½
               times
               are
               equivalent
               to
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               .
               Likewise
               ,
               because
               the
               3
               ½
               times
               of
               the
               Beast
               mentioned
               in
               the
               Prophet
               Daniel
               ,
               are
               declared
               by
               fortie
               two
               moneths
               ,
               in
               the
               Revelation
               of
               St
               
                 Iohn
                 .
                 13.
              
               vers
               15.
               it
               doth
               of
               necessitie
               follow
               ,
               that
               the
               fortie
               two
               moneths
               are
               equivalent
               to
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               ,
               which
               maketh
               up
               the
               accompt
               ,
               thirtie
               daies
               beeing
               computed
               for
               a
               moneth
               ,
               as
               is
               usual
               amongst
               the
               Hebrews
               .
            
             
             
               
                 
                   360
                   daies
                   are
                   1.
                   year
                   or
                   time
                   12
                   moneths
                   .
                   
                
                 
                   720
                   2.
                   years
                   .
                   24.
                   
                
                 
                   180
                   ½
                   year
                   .
                   6.
                   
                
                 
                   1260
                   daies
                   42.
                   moneths
                
              
            
             
               3.
               
               These
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               do
               signifie
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               .
            
             
               Manie
               are
               of
               this
               opinion
               ,
               that
               here
               are
               meant
               natural
               daies
               ,
               and
               consequently
               but
               3
               ½
               years
               .
               But
               experience
               doth
               contradict
               the
               same
               ,
               in
               regard
               the
               
                 Holie
                 Citie
              
               hath
               been
               trodden
               under
               foot
               ,
               the
               
                 two
                 witnesses
              
               clothed
               with
               sackcloth
               ,
               
                 the
                 woman
              
               continued
               in
               the
               wilderness
               ,
               and
               the
               Beast
               with
               ten
               horns
               spoken
               blasphemies
               and
               great
               things
               long
               ago
               .
               Besides
               ,
               it
               is
               impossible
               to
               accomplish
               in
               so
               short
               a
               time
               ,
               what
               els
               is
               said
               ,
               that
               it
               shall
               com
               to
               pass
               in
               these
               3
               ½
               years
               .
               So
               that
               hereby
               
                 Prophetical
                 daies
              
               ,
               or
               so
               manie
               years
               are
               meant
               .
            
             
               Wee
               finde
               examples
               in
               the
               holie
               
               Scriptures
               ,
               that
               by
               the
               daies
               expressed
               ,
               years
               are
               to
               bee
               understood
               ,
               as
               
                 Daniel
                 9.
              
               vers
               24.
               in
               the
               seventie
               weeks
               everie
               daie
               signifieth
               a
               year
               ,
               and
               the
               seventie
               weeks
               make
               up
               four
               hundred
               ninetie
               years
               according
               to
               the
               Chronologer's
               Computation
               .
            
             
               
                 Numbers
                 14.
                 vers
                 33.
                 34.
              
               
               Your
               Children
               shall
               wander
               in
               the
               wilderness
               fortie
               years
               after
               the
               number
               of
               the
               daies
               ,
               in
               which
               yee
               searched
               the
               Land
               ,
               even
               fortie
               daies
               ,
               
                 (
                 each
                 daie
                 for
                 an
                 year
                 .
                 )
              
            
             
               
                 Ezekiel
                 4.
                 vers
                 6.
              
               
               Thou
               shalt
               bear
               their
               iniquitie
               fortie
               daies
               ,
               and
               I
               have
               appointed
               thee
               each
               daie
               for
               an
               year
               .
               
                 Read
                 upon
                 this
                 subject
                 the
                 first
                 and
                 sixteenth
                 Proposition
                 of
              
               Iohn
               Napier
               
                 upon
                 the
              
               Revelation
               .
            
             
               Nature
               furnisheth
               such
               like
               example
               .
               As
               in
               the
               Astrological
               direction
               ,
               by
               a
               degree
               ,
               which
               the
               Sun
               by
               his
               cours
               doth
               finish
               in
               one
               daie
               ,
               is
               meant
               a
               year
               in
               operation
               ;
               and
               a
               whole
               circle
               ,
               which
               consisteth
               of
               three
               hundred
               sixtie
               degrees
               ,
               and
               is
               run
               over
               by
               the
               Sun
               in
               
               one
               year
               ,
               signifieth
               three
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               ,
               or
               a
               full
               time
               ,
               as
               is
               sufficiently
               known
               to
               the
               Astrologers
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               These
               3
               ½
               times
               ,
               fortie
               two
               Moneths
               ,
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               ,
               as
               they
               do
               comprehend
               times
               and
               years
               of
               one
               sort
               ;
               so
               they
               begin
               together
               ,
               and
               end
               together
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               These
               3
               ½
               times
               of
               the
               Beast
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               woman
               in
               the
               wilderness
               do
               begin
               together
               .
            
             
               For
               when
               the
               
                 red
                 Dragon
                 Revel
                 .
                 12.
                 vers
                 9.
                 13.
              
               was
               cast
               down
               to
               the
               earth
               by
               the
               ruine
               of
               the
               Heathenish
               Idolatrie
               ,
               hee
               persecuted
               the
               Woman
               by
               the
               Beast
               ,
               having
               ten
               horns
               ,
               to
               which
               hee
               gave
               his
               power
               ;
               and
               his
               seat
               and
               great
               Autoritie
               .
               
                 Revel
                 .
                 13.
                 vers
                 2.
              
               
               The
               Woman
               fled
               into
               the
               wilderness
               ,
               that
               shee
               might
               bee
               nourished
               there
               for
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               .
               
                 Revel
                 .
                 12.
                 vers
                 14.
              
               
               And
               to
               the
               Beast
               it
               was
               given
               to
               remain
               with
               him
               fortie
               two
               moneths
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               time
               of
               the
               Beast
               and
               of
               the
               two
               
               witnesses
               doth
               exspire
               with
               the
               sixth
               Trumpet
               ,
               wherefore
               of
               necessitie
               they
               began
               together
               .
            
             
               For
               when
               the
               spirit
               of
               life
               from
               God
               entred
               into
               the
               two
               witnesses
               ,
               and
               beeing
               no
               more
               clothed
               with
               sackcloth
               ,
               ascended
               up
               to
               heaven
               in
               a
               cloud
               ;
               in
               the
               same
               hour
               was
               there
               a
               great
               earthquake
               and
               fierce
               war
               ,
               wherein
               the
               tenth
               part
               of
               the
               Citie
               fell
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               second
               wo
               passed
               .
               
                 Revel
                 .
                 11.
                 vers
                 11
                 ,
                 12
                 ,
                 13
                 ,
                 &
                 14.
                 
              
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               the
               time
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               which
               tread
               under
               foot
               the
               holie
               Citie
               ,
               and
               the
               time
               of
               the
               witnesses
               clothed
               with
               Sackcloth
               ,
               do
               begin
               together
               ,
               it
               appeareth
               by
               the
               11.
               
               Chapter
               of
               the
               Revelations
               ,
               vers
               2
               ,
               3.
               as
               a
               thing
               undoubted
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               To
               the
               Prophet
               Daniel
               the
               Angel
               spoke
               of
               3
               ½
               times
               .
               Chap.
               7.
               vers
               25.
               and
               Chapter
               12.
               vers
               6.
               but
               afterwards
               hee
               spoke
               also
               of
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               .
               Wherefore
               it
               is
               called
               into
               Question
               ,
               whether
               3
               ½
               times
               and
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               are
               one
               and
               the
               same
               times
               ?
            
             
             
               Answ
               .
               The
               Teachers
               do
               expound
               it
               generally
               to
               that
               effect
               ;
               as
               if
               by
               the
               3
               ½
               times
               ,
               and
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               daies
               one
               and
               the
               same
               time
               is
               understood
               .
               But
               the
               Text
               doth
               make
               no
               mention
               of
               it
               .
               For
               the
               words
               are
               these
               .
               Chapter
               7.
               vers
               25.
               
               
                 The
                 Saints
                 shall
                 bee
                 given
                 into
                 his
                 hand
                 ,
                 until
                 a
                 time
                 and
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 dividing
                 of
                 time
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 .
              
            
             
               Chap.
               12.
               v.
               6.
               
               &
               7.
               
               That
               it
               shall
               bee
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               times
               and
               an
               half
               ,
               which
               is
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               .
               So
               that
               these
               two
               places
               speak
               of
               the
               duration
               ,
               how
               long
               the
               Beast
               with
               ten
               horns
               shall
               speak
               great
               words
               against
               the
               most
               High
               ,
               and
               shall
               wear
               out
               the
               Saints
               .
            
             
               But
               in
               the
               Chap.
               12.
               vers
               11.
               is
               given
               a
               
                 terminus
                 à
                 quo
              
               ,
               a
               certain
               character
               and
               token
               ,
               from
               which
               begin
               the
               Computation
               until
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               nintie
               years
               ,
               with
               which
               the
               3
               ½
               times
               or
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               
               years
               do
               exspire
               together
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               ninetie
               daies
               ,
               Dan.
               12.
               vers
               11.
               do
               begin
               with
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               three
               ,
               or
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               five
               ,
               when
               the
               terrible
               devastation
               and
               destruction
               of
               the
               Temple
               of
               Ierusalem
               ,
               under
               the
               Roman
               Emperour
               ,
               Julian
               the
               Apostate
               happened
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 words
                 of
                 the
                 the
                 text
                 ,
                 chapter
                 12.
                 vers
                 11.
                 are
                 these
                 :
              
               from
               the
               time
               that
               the
               dailie
               sacrifice
               shall
               bee
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               the
               abomination
               that
               maketh
               desolate
               ,
               set
               up
               ,
               there
               shall
               bee
               a
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               and
               ninetie
               daies
               .
            
             
               
                 By
                 the
                 dailie
                 Sacrifice
              
               is
               understood
               the
               Jewish
               worship
               ,
               which
               although
               by
               the
               destruction
               of
               the
               Citie
               of
               Jerusalem
               :
               and
               of
               the
               Temple
               was
               taken
               away
               ,
               yet
               it
               was
               not
               quite
               abolished
               ,
               seeing
               the
               Jews
               under
               the
               Emperor
               Constantine
               the
               Great
               did
               yet
               celebrate
               their
               Passover
               ,
               as
               you
               may
               read
               in
               the
               tenth
               book
               twelf
               and
               twentie
               fourth
               
               chapter
               of
               Nicephorus
               ;
               and
               were
               still
               in
               a
               continued
               hope
               to
               build
               up
               the
               Temple
               again
               .
            
             
               
                 By
                 the
                 abomination
                 of
                 desolation
                 ,
                 or
                 by
                 the
                 abominable
                 desolation
              
               is
               understood
               the
               final
               and
               last
               destruction
               of
               the
               Temple
               ,
               whereof
               Christ
               
                 Math.
                 24.
              
               vers
               2.
               said
               ,
               that
               
                 there
                 shall
                 not
                 bee
                 left
                 one
                 stone
                 upon
                 another
                 that
                 shall
                 not
                 bee
                 thrown
                 down
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Abomination
                 of
                 desolation
              
               doth
               point
               out
               
                 Caussam
                 efficientem
              
               ,
               the
               efficient
               caus
               ,
               which
               in
               
                 Dan.
                 9.
                 vers
                 27.
              
               out
               of
               the
               Hebrew
               
                 Schikkuzim
                 Meschomem
              
               ,
               is
               there
               well
               rendred
               ,
               by
               the
               wings
               shall
               stand
               abominations
               of
               desolation
               ,
               namely
               such
               abominations
               ,
               whereby
               the
               holie
               place
               shall
               bee
               destroied
               .
               But
               in
               the
               chap.
               12.
               vers
               11.
               wee
               read
               
                 Schikkuz
                 Schomem
              
               ,
               which
               doth
               intimate
               a
               fulness
               and
               perfection
               ,
               and
               must
               bee
               rendered
               the
               
                 abominable
                 desolation
              
               .
            
             
               Vide
               Conradum
               Graserum
               in
               cap.
               9.
               
               Dan.
               Exerc.
               5.
               pag.
               405.
               
               Ubi
               it
               à
               disserit
               :
               
               Schomem
               rationem
               nominis
               videtur
               habere
               ,
               ut
               magìs
               rem
               operatam
               quàm
               ipsam
               operationem
               ,
               id
               est
               ,
               magìs
               effectum
               quàm
               effectûs
               caussam
               significet
               :
               Cùm
               contrà
               per
               alterum
               meschomem
               causa
               effìciens
               profanandi
               sanctuarii
               indicetur
               .
            
             
               Wherefore
               the
               true
               meaning
               and
               sens
               of
               these
               words
               is
               this
               :
               
                 From
                 the
                 time
                 that
                 the
                 dailie
                 Sacrifice
                 at
                 Jerusalem
                 is
                 taken
                 away
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 abominable
                 desolation
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 ,
              
               wherein
               the
               worship
               and
               service
               of
               God
               onely
               could
               bee
               performed
               ,
               
                 shall
                 bee
                 fully
                 and
                 thorowly
                 accomplished
                 ,
              
               there
               bee
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               ninetie
               years
               .
            
             
               This
               total
               desolation
               and
               destruction
               of
               the
               Temple
               happened
               under
               the
               Emperor
               Julian
               ,
               the
               Apostate
               ,
               in
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               three
               hundred
               sixtie
               three
               ,
               or
               three
               hundred
               sixtie
               five
               ,
               according
               to
               som
               Chronologer's
               computation
               .
            
             
               For
               ,
               when
               Julian
               in
               despight
               of
               the
               Christians
               had
               recalled
               the
               Jews
               ,
               that
               were
               dispersed
               to
               and
               fro
               ,
               to
               return
               
               into
               their
               land
               ,
               and
               furnished
               them
               with
               monie
               ,
               handie-craftsmen
               ,
               workmen
               ,
               materials
               ,
               and
               other
               helps
               ,
               and
               commanded
               them
               ,
               to
               build
               up
               the
               Temple
               again
               ,
               and
               re-establish
               the
               Levitical
               service
               ;
               And
               the
               Jews
               had
               imbraced
               such
               offers
               of
               assistance
               ,
               laid
               the
               foundation
               ;
               and
               begun
               the
               building
               thereof
               :
               God
               himself
               did
               destroie
               their
               work
               by
               thunder
               and
               lightning
               from
               Heaven
               ,
               with
               terrible
               earthquakes
               and
               fire-bals
               ,
               and
               totally
               overthrew
               the
               foundation
               of
               the
               Temple
               ;
               insomuch
               that
               Cyrillus
               ,
               then
               Bishop
               at
               Ierusalem
               ,
               was
               forced
               to
               confess
               and
               to
               acknowledg
               ,
               that
               now
               the
               words
               of
               Christ
               ,
               which
               hee
               spoke
               of
               the
               Temple
               unto
               his
               disciples
               ,
               
                 Matthew
                 24.
                 vers
                 2.
              
               were
               fulfilled
               :
               That
               
                 there
                 shall
                 not
                 bee
                 left
                 one
                 stone
                 upon
                 another
                 ,
                 that
                 shall
                 not
                 bee
                 thrown
                 down
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Hereof
                 may
                 bee
                 further
                 read
              
               Ammianus
               Marcellinus
               lib.
               23.
               
               Socrates
               lib.
               3.
               c.
               17.
               
               Theodoretus
               :
               lib.
               3.
               c.
               17.
               at
               the
               end
               .
               Sozom.
               lib.
               5.
               cap.
               21.
               
               Tripart
               .
               
               lib.
               6.
               cap.
               44.
               and
               others
               more
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               The
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               must
               for
               the
               space
               of
               thirtie
               years
               bee
               protracted
               ,
               and
               begin
               later
               ,
               and
               at
               lest
               with
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               five
               ,
               becaus
               they
               expire
               together
               with
               the
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               ninetie
               years
               .
            
             
               Here
               wee
               must
               observ
               and
               look
               whether
               the
               Characters
               and
               Tokens
               ,
               which
               are
               set
               upon
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               ,
               may
               bee
               applied
               to
               the
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               year
               .
            
             
               
                 Wee
                 have
                 three
                 several
                 Characters
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Division
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 into
                 two
                 parts
                 .
                 Revel
                 .
                 chapter
                 12.
                 vers
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 treading
                 under
                 foot
                 of
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
                 .
                 Chap.
                 11.
                 vers
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 rising
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Sea.
                 chapter
                 13.
                 vers
                 2.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 first
                 Character
              
               is
               described
               in
               the
               
                 Revel
                 .
                 12.
              
               vers
               14.
               in
               these
               words
               :
               And
               
               to
               the
               woman
               were
               given
               two
               wings
               of
               a
               great
               eagle
               ,
               that
               shee
               might
               flee
               into
               the
               wilderness
               ,
               into
               her
               place
               ,
               where
               shee
               is
               nourished
               .
            
             
               By
               the
               great
               Eagle
               is
               understood
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ;
               by
               the
               
                 two
                 Wings
              
               is
               meant
               the
               division
               of
               the
               same
               into
               two
               parts
               .
               Constantine
               the
               great
               ,
               though
               hee
               removed
               the
               Imperial
               Seat
               from
               Rome
               to
               Byzance
               ,
               or
               Constantinople
               ;
               yet
               hee
               reteined
               to
               himself
               the
               Government
               over
               the
               whole
               Empire
               ,
               during
               his
               life
               ;
               after
               his
               death
               ,
               it
               was
               divided
               among
               his
               three
               Sons
               ,
               into
               three
               parts
               .
               But
               this
               Division
               did
               not
               last
               long
               ,
               but
               did
               soon
               determine
               ,
               for
               Constantius
               did
               reign
               after
               his
               Brother's
               death
               over
               the
               whole
               Romane
               Empire
               himself
               alone
               ,
               as
               also
               after
               him
               Iulian
               ,
               and
               other
               Emperors
               following
               .
            
             
               But
               after
               the
               death
               of
               Theodose
               the
               Great
               ,
               who
               died
               the
               17.
               of
               
                 Ianuarie
                 395
              
               ,
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               was
               divided
               between
               his
               two
               sons
               ,
               Arcadius
               and
               and
               Honorius
               ,
               so
               that
               Arcadius
               reigned
               
               in
               the
               East
               ,
               and
               Honorius
               in
               the
               West
               .
               And
               thus
               this
               Character
               may
               bee
               well
               applied
               to
               the
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               years
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Becaus
               of
               the
               division
               of
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               into
               two
               parts
               ,
               whereby
               the
               wings
               of
               the
               Eagle
               are
               spread
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Becaus
               the
               Barbarous
               Nations
               did
               invade
               ,
               and
               over-run
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               on
               all
               sides
               in
               the
               verie
               same
               year
               ,
               whereby
               the
               holie
               Citie
               was
               horribly
               trodden
               under
               foot
               ,
               and
               the
               Woman
               put
               to
               flight
               in
               the
               wilderness
               .
            
             
               The
               second
               Character
               is
               expressed
               
                 in
                 the
              
               Revelations
               11.
               
                 vers
                 2.
                 in
                 these
                 words
              
               :
               It
               is
               given
               unto
               the
               Gentiles
               that
               they
               shall
               tread
               the
               holie
               Citie
               under
               foot
               .
            
             
               By
               the
               Conversion
               of
               Constantine
               the
               Great
               ,
               was
               the
               Child
               ,
               which
               the
               Woman
               (
               the
               christian
               Church
               )
               had
               brought
               forth
               ,
               established
               upon
               the
               seat
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               by
               that
               means
               the
               Christian
               Emperors
               came
               to
               the
               Government
               ,
               and
               the
               Heathenish
               service
               of
               
               the
               Dragon
               got
               thereby
               a
               huge
               great
               downfal
               .
            
             
               But
               in
               the
               daies
               of
               Theodosius
               the
               Great
               ,
               the
               great
               Dragon
               in
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               was
               quite
               overthrown
               ,
               and
               cast
               to
               the
               ground
               .
               At
               that
               time
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               did
               triumph
               ,
               and
               was
               gloriously
               built
               and
               propagated
               .
               But
               after
               Theodosius
               in
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               five
               in
               Ianuarie
               ,
               was
               dead
               ,
               and
               his
               two
               sons
               Arcadius
               and
               Honorius
               had
               entred
               into
               the
               Government
               ,
               
                 the
                 treading
                 under
                 foot
                 of
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
              
               did
               soon
               begin
               ;
               when
               the
               
                 Goths
                 ,
                 Huns
                 ,
                 Alans
              
               ,
               with
               other
               barbarous
               Nations
               ,
               under
               the
               Command
               of
               their
               King
               Alaricus
               ,
               invaded
               first
               the
               Oriental
               ,
               other
               made
               an
               irruption
               into
               the
               Occidental
               Empire
               ,
               and
               took
               the
               Citie
               of
               Rome
               in
               the
               year
               four
               hundred
               ten
               .
            
             
               Now
               by
               these
               desolations
               how
               the
               Christian
               Churches
               were
               destroied
               ,
               the
               Countries
               spoiled
               ,
               the
               Christians
               persecuted
               and
               reduced
               to
               a
               most
               pitiful
               
               condition
               may
               bee
               gathered
               from
               the
               lamentation
               of
               the
               old
               Father
               Ierome
               ;
               whereof
               you
               may
               read
               in
               his
               
                 first
                 Tom.
                 the
                 Epist
                 .
                 3d
                 pag.
                 18.
                 and
                 Epist
                 .
                 11.
                 pag.
                 44.
                 
              
               Likewise
               Augustine
               in
               his
               books
               of
               the
               Citie
               of
               God
               ,
               doth
               give
               a
               further
               information
               hereof
               ,
               and
               especially
               
                 Ludovicus
                 Vives
              
               in
               his
               Preface
               upon
               the
               same
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               third
               Character
               is
               set
               down
               in
               the
               Revelation
               chap.
               13.
               vers
               2.
               in
               these
               words
               ;
               And
               a
               beast
               rose
               up
               out
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               having
               seaven
               heads
               ,
               and
               ten
               horns
               ,
               and
               upon
               his
               horns
               ,
               ten
               Crowns
               .
            
             
               The
               Old
               Heathenish
               Empire
               is
               compared
               to
               the
               red
               Dragon
               which
               hath
               seven
               heads
               ,
               (
               seven
               Mountains
               in
               the
               Citie
               of
               Rome
               )
               and
               ten
               horns
               (
               Provinces
               )
               and
               upon
               his
               heads
               (
               in
               the
               Citie
               of
               Rome
               )
               seven
               Crowns
               (
               seven
               sorts
               of
               Government
               )
               namely
               :
               
                 Reges
                 ,
                 Consules
                 ,
                 Dictatores
                 ,
                 Decemviros
                 ,
                 Tribunos
                 militum
                 ,
                 Caesares
                 .
                 10.
                 
                 Reges
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Here
                 the
                 new
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 under
              
               the
               Christian
               Emperours
               ,
               and
               Kings
               is
               
               brought
               in
               ,
               which
               hath
               not
               seven
               Crowns
               upon
               the
               seven
               heads
               (
               upon
               the
               Mountains
               in
               the
               Citie
               of
               
                 Rome
                 ,
              
               )
               but
               hath
               ten
               Crowns
               upon
               the
               ten
               horns
               ;
               that
               is
               in
               the
               Kingdoms
               ,
               into
               which
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               is
               divided
               .
            
             
               But
               wee
               must
               not
               seek
               the
               beginning
               of
               this
               beast
               in
               the
               time
               ,
               when
               it
               had
               already
               fully
               his
               horns
               (
               Kingdoms
               )
               but
               but
               
                 when
                 it
                 rose
                 up
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Sea
              
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               when
               it
               invaded
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               by
               force
               of
               Arms
               ,
               and
               made
               such
               a
               progress
               in
               it
               ,
               that
               it
               subdued
               the
               Citie
               of
               Rome
               .
            
             
               And
               although
               the
               Barbarous
               Septentrional
               Nations
               have
               manie
               times
               invaded
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               with
               great
               power
               ,
               yet
               they
               could
               never
               so
               far
               prevail
               ,
               that
               they
               could
               take
               
                 Rome
                 .
                 Alaricus
              
               was
               the
               first
               ,
               who
               ,
               as
               was
               mentioned
               already
               in
               the
               second
               Character
               ,
               in
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               five
               ,
               made
               an
               irruption
               into
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               with
               two
               hundred
               thousand
               
                 Goths
                 ,
                 Huns
                 ,
                 Alans
              
               ,
               prevailed
               
               against
               the
               Romans
               ,
               and
               at
               length
               took
               Rome
               in
               the
               year
               four
               hundred
               ten
               .
               About
               the
               same
               time
               som
               other
               Nations
               invaded
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               which
               they
               tore
               into
               so
               manie
               pieces
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               four
               hundred
               fiftie
               five
               ,
               and
               also
               sixtie
               years
               after
               the
               first
               Invasion
               
                 ten
                 Kings
              
               ,
               each
               by
               himself
               ,
               reigned
               in
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               .
            
             
               Wherefore
               the
               beginning
               of
               
                 the
                 Beast
                 with
                 ten
                 horns
              
               ,
               or
               the
               rising
               of
               the
               same
               out
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               is
               referred
               to
               that
               year
               ,
               when
               Alaricus
               with
               his
               Nations
               invaded
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               ,
               namely
               to
               the
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               year
               since
               the
               birth
               of
               Christ
               .
            
             
               Wee
               see
               also
               ,
               that
               all
               the
               three
               Characters
               are
               incident
               into
               the
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               year
               ,
               as
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               spreading
               of
               the
               two
               wings
               of
               the
               great
               Eagle
               ,
               by
               the
               division
               of
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               into
               two
               parts
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Woman
               ,
               (
               the
               Christian
               Church
               )
               doth
               flee
               into
               the
               wilderness
               .
            
             
             
               2.
               
               The
               rising
               of
               the
               Beast
               with
               ten
               horns
               out
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               by
               the
               Invasion
               of
               Alaricus
               with
               his
               Nations
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               beginning
               of
               treading
               under
               foot
               the
               holie
               Citie
               ,
               the
               Christian
               Church
               .
            
             
               The
               Historians
               also
               make
               a
               singular
               observation
               of
               that
               time
               ,
               which
               followed
               the
               death
               of
               Theodosius
               the
               Great
               ,
               and
               refer
               unto
               the
               changes
               of
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               .
            
             
               Carion
               in
               his
               Treatise
               of
               the
               four
               Monarchies
               ,
               printed
               in
               the
               year
               one
               thousand
               five
               hundred
               thirtie
               one
               ,
               doth
               prefix
               before
               the
               description
               of
               Arcadius
               and
               Honorius
               this
               title
               :
               the
               
                 Destruction
                 of
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 .
                 Philippus
                 Peucerus
              
               writeth
               in
               his
               reviewed
               Chronicles
               of
               Carion
               under
               Theodosius
               ,
               p.
               302.
               
               Theodosius
               hath
               been
               the
               last
               Emperor
               ,
               who
               possessed
               and
               maintained
               the
               whole
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               both
               in
               the
               East
               and
               West
               .
               For
               immediately
               after
               his
               death
               ,
               under
               the
               reign
               of
               his
               son
               
               Honorius
               ,
               the
               Franconians
               entred
               into
               France
               ,
               took
               the
               same
               ,
               and
               their
               Duke
               Warmundus
               named
               himself
               King
               of
               France
               ,
               and
               reigned
               as
               King
               without
               anie
               hinderance
               .
               In
               like
               manner
               was
               Rome
               taken
               of
               Alaricus
               King
               of
               the
               Goths
               .
            
             
               And
               pag.
               306.
               
               After
               him
               
                 (
                 Theodosius
              
               the
               great
               )
               was
               the
               Empire
               pitifully
               torn
               and
               divided
               by
               the
               Goths
               and
               Vandals
               into
               
                 Hungarie
                 ,
                 Italie
              
               and
               Spain
               ,
               but
               France
               was
               possessed
               partly
               by
               the
               Franconians
               ,
               partly
               by
               the
               Burgundians
               .
            
             
               Under
               Honorius
               pag.
               313.
               
               The
               beginning
               of
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               France
               is
               derived
               from
               the
               taking
               of
               the
               Citie
               of
               Trier
               ,
               in
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               four
               hundred
               three
               .
               This
               hath
               been
               the
               beginning
               ,
               and
               occasion
               of
               the
               division
               of
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               towards
               France
               .
            
             
               The
               second
               breach
               or
               diminution
               ,
               of
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               from
               the
               Hungarians
               towards
               Italie
               ,
               happened
               by
               the
               Goths
               .
            
             
               And
               hereunto
               agreeth
               Munsterus
               in
               
               in
               his
               Cosmographie
               ,
               printed
               in
               the
               year
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fourteen
               ,
               pag.
               381.
               and
               of
               the
               Edition
               of
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               twentie
               eight
               ,
               pag.
               356.
               
                 sub
                 quaestione
              
               ,
               How
               and
               when
               the
               Citie
               of
               Rome
               was
               taken
               again
               ?
               where
               hee
               writeth
               thus
               :
               When
               the
               Goths
               had
               rebelled
               against
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               and
               set
               up
               Alaricus
               for
               their
               King
               ;
               they
               subdued
               and
               reduced
               not
               onely
               the
               Provinces
               of
               Thracia
               and
               Anglia
               ,
               under
               their
               power
               ,
               and
               plucked
               two
               strong
               Feathers
               out
               of
               the
               High-flying
               Eagle's
               wings
               ;
               but
               attempted
               also
               to
               cut
               off
               his
               head
               quite
               .
            
             
               Daniel
               Pareus
               
                 writeth
                 thus
                 in
              
               Medulla
               Hist.
               Eccles
               .
               universalis
               ,
               pag.
               195.
               
               Fuit
               mors
               Theodosii
               verè
               fatalis
               ad
               ruinam
               &
               interitum
               Imperii
               Occidentalis
               ,
               ut
               secum
               abstulisse
               pacem
               Ecclesiae
               &
               Reip.
               penè
               omnem
               videatur
               .
            
             
               
                 Seeing
                 now
                 the
                 Characters
                 of
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Apocalyptical
              
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               ,
               are
               applied
               to
               the
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               year
               ,
               
               since
               the
               birth
               of
               Christ
               :
               As
               also
               the
               Character
               of
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               ninetie
               years
               of
               Daniel
               ,
               applied
               unto
               the
               three
               hundred
               sixtie
               fifth
               year
               ;
               And
               the
               difference
               of
               thirtie
               years
               betwixt
               the
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               ,
               and
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               ninetie
               years
               are
               punctually
               found
               out
               ;
               And
               contrariwise
               ,
               it
               doth
               not
               appear
               by
               the
               histories
               ,
               where
               such
               two
               times
               may
               bee
               found
               ,
               which
               have
               thirtie
               years
               with
               such
               accidents
               following
               one
               to
               another
               ,
               whereunto
               the
               aforesaid
               Characters
               can
               bee
               more
               suitably
               applied
               ;
               Wee
               have
               reason
               to
               stand
               firm
               to
               this
               opinion
               ,
               so
               long
               as
               wee
               are
               not
               convinced
               of
               a
               better
               ,
               and
               conclude
               ▪
            
             
               That
               the
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               ninetie
               years
               of
               the
               Prophet
               Daniel
               ,
               12.
               vers
               11.
               begun
               with
               the
               last
               abominable
               desolation
               of
               the
               Temple
               at
               Ierusalem
               ,
               in
               the
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               three
               hundred
               sixtie
               fifth
               ,
               and
               the
               Apocalyptical
               one
               thousand
               two
               
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               ,
               with
               the
               Invasion
               of
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               by
               the
               Goths
               ,
               in
               the
               year
               three
               hundred
               ninteie
               five
               ,
               and
               that
               both
               together
               do
               exspire
               with
               the
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fiftie
               fifth
               year
               ,
               which
               is
               now
               shortly
               at
               hand
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               With
               the
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fiftie
               fifth
               year
               ,
               since
               the
               birth
               of
               Christ
               ,
               do
               exspire
               the
               six
               thousand
               years
               since
               the
               Creation
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             
               The
               Chronologer's
               supputation
               in
               general
               is
               this
               ,
               that
               this
               present
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fiftieth
               year
               ,
               since
               the
               birth
               of
               Christ
               ,
               is
               the
               five
               thousand
               five
               hundred
               ninetie
               ninth
               year
               since
               the
               Creation
               of
               the
               world
               .
               But
               if
               wee
               do
               well
               consider
               the
               Chronological
               numbers
               expressed
               in
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               it
               will
               evidently
               appear
               ,
               that
               in
               this
               present
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fiftieth
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               the
               five
               thousand
               nine
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               year
               since
               the
               Creation
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               doth
               exspire
               ,
               and
               the
               six
               thousand
               year
               of
               the
               world
               will
               end
               with
               the
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               
               fiftie
               fifth
               year
               of
               our
               Lord.
               
            
             
               According
               to
               the
               vulgar
               Supputation
               of
               years
               ,
               the
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fiftie
               fifth
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               will
               bee
               the
               five
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fourth
               year
               since
               the
               Creation
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             
               Unto
               these
               add
               the
               years
               ,
               which
               either
               by
               the
               Chronologers
               have
               been
               omitted
               ,
               or
               made
               too
               few
               ,
               and
               left
               out
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 One
                 year
              
               ,
               whilest
               the
               Flood
               lasted
               ▪
               
                 Genes
                 .
                 c.
                 7.
                 vers
                 11.
              
               and
               
                 chapter
                 8.
                 vers
                 .
                 14.
              
               after
               the
               supputation
               of
               
                 Funccius
                 ,
                 Reusnerus
                 ,
                 Partiltius
              
               ,
               and
               others
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Sixtie
                 years
              
               until
               the
               birth
               of
               Abraham
               ;
               who
               was
               not
               born
               in
               the
               seventieth
               ,
               but
               in
               the
               one
               hundred
               thirtieth
               year
               of
               Terah
               .
               For
               
                 Terah
                 died
                 in
                 Haran
              
               ,
               Gen.
               11.
               vers
               32.
               when
               hee
               was
               old
               
                 two
                 hundred
                 five
                 years
              
               .
            
             
               Immediately
               after
               the
               death
               of
               
                 Terah
                 Abraham
              
               departed
               out
               of
               
                 Haran
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 12.
                 vers
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 Acts
                 7.
                 4.
              
               beeing
               old
               seventie
               five
               years
               .
            
             
               From
               thence
               it
               doth
               follow
               ,
               that
               
                 Abraham
                 was
                 born
              
               ,
               when
               Terah
               was
               
               old
               one
               hundred
               thirtie
               years
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Two
               hundred
               fifteen
               years
               of
               the
               sojourning
               of
               the
               Children
               of
               Israel
               in
               Egypt
               .
            
             
               In
               
                 Exodus
                 12.
              
               vers
               40
               ,
               41.
               wee
               read
               these
               words
               :
               
                 The
                 sojourning
                 of
                 the
                 Children
                 of
                 Israel
                 who
                 dwelt
                 in
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 was
                 four
                 hundred
                 and
                 thirtie
                 years
                 .
              
               Which
               the
               
                 aera
                 vulgaris
              
               ,
               or
               the
               common
               supputation
               doth
               derive
               from
               the
               time
               of
               Abraham's
               calling
               ,
               when
               hee
               was
               seventie
               five
               years
               old
               ,
               
                 Genes
                 .
                 12.
              
               vers
               4.
               in
               this
               manner
               as
               followeth
               .
            
             
               Until
               the
               birth
               of
               
                 Isaac
                 Gen.
                 21.
              
               vers
               5.
               twentie
               five
               years
               .
            
             
               Until
               the
               birth
               of
               
                 Iacob
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 35.
              
               vers
               26.
               sixtie
               years
               .
            
             
               Iacob
               was
               old
               when
               hee
               went
               into
               
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 47.
              
               vers
               9.
               one
               hundred
               thirtie
               years
               .
            
             
               Which
               make
               up
               two
               hundred
               fifteen
               years
               .
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 Children
                 of
                 Israel
                 dwelt
                 in
                 Egypt
                 two
                 hundred
                 fifteen
                 years
                 .
              
               
                 Which
                 is
                 against
                 the
                 clear
                 text
                 ,
                 which
                 doth
                 not
                 speak
                 of
                 the
                 times
                 of
                 the
                 Fathers
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 the
                 children
                 of
                 Israel
                 ;
                 not
                 of
                 the
                 pilgrimage
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 the
                 sojourning
                 and
                 bondage
                 ,
                 not
                 without
                 and
                 in
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 but
                 onely
                 in
                 Egypt
                 .
              
               
                 Abraham
                 indeed
                 went
                 down
                 into
                 
                   Egypt
                   ,
                   Gen.
                   12.
                
                 vers
                 10.
                 but
                 sojourned
                 there
                 not
                 long
                 ,
                 and
                 was
                 not
                 in
                 anie
                 bondage
                 :
                 Isaac
                 came
                 not
                 at
                 all
                 into
                 Egypt
                 beeing
                 forbidden
                 .
                 
                   Gen.
                   29.
                
                 vers
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 Jacob
                 was
                 one
                 hundred
                 thirtie
                 years
                 old
                 before
                 wee
                 went
                 down
                 into
                 Egypt
                 .
              
               
                 So
                 that
                 the
                 four
                 hundred
                 thirtie
                 years
                 ,
                 
                   of
                   the
                   sojourning
                   of
                   the
                   Children
                   of
                   Israel
                   who
                   dwelt
                   in
                   Egypt
                   ,
                
                 Exod.
                 12.
                 vers
                 .
                 40.
                 and
                 when
                 the
                 
                   seed
                   of
                   Abraham
                   was
                   a
                   stranger
                   in
                   a
                   Land
                   that
                   was
                   not
                   their's
                   ,
                   and
                   served
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   was
                   afflicted
                   there
                   ,
                
                 Genesis
                 15.
                 vers
                 .
                 13.
                 are
                 to
                 begin
                 their
                 supputation
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 one
                 hundred
                 thirtieth
                 year
                 of
                 Jacob
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 entrance
                 
                 into
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 unto
                 which
                 must
                 bee
                 added
                 here
                 two
                 hundred
                 fifteen
                 years
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 One
                 hundred
                 years
                 from
                 going
                 forth
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 Solomon
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Aera
                   vulgaris
                
                 doth
                 reckon
                 in
                 this
                 period
                 of
                 time
                 four
                 hundred
                 eightie
                 years
                 ,
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 plainly
                 set
                 down
                 ,
                 
                   1
                   Kings
                   6.
                
                 vers
                 1.
                 
                 But
                 by
                 the
                 book
                 of
                 Iudges
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 places
                 of
                 the
                 Scripture
                 ,
                 it
                 doth
                 appear
                 that
                 they
                 were
                 five
                 hundred
                 eightie
                 years
                 .
                 As
                 :
              
               
                 Fortie
                 years
                 in
                 the
                 Wilderness
                 .
                 Deut.
                 1.
                 vers
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Acts
                   13.
                   18.
                
                 
              
               
                 Seven
                 years
                 of
                 Ioshua
                 in
                 the
                 taking
                 of
                 possession
                 ,
                 and
                 division
                 of
                 the
                 Land
                 of
                 
                   Canaan
                   .
                   Ioshua
                   14.
                
                 vers
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 Four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 years
                 until
                 
                   Samuel
                   .
                   Acts
                   13.
                
                 vers
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 
                   As
                   namely
                
                 ,
                 Eight
                 under
                 King
                 
                   Chushan
                   Rishatha
                   ▪
                   ïm.
                   Iudges
                
                 3.
                 vers
                 8.
                 
              
               
                 Fortie
                 under
                 Othniel
                 .
                 vers
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 Eighteen
                 under
                 Eglon.
                 vers
                 14.
                 
              
               
               
                 Eightie
                 under
                 Ehud
                 .
                 vers
                 30.
                 
              
               
                 Twentie
                 under
                 Iabin
                 .
                 chap.
                 4.
                 vers
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 Fortie
                 under
                 
                   Deborah
                   and
                   Barak
                
                 .
                 Chapter
                 5.
                 vers
                 31.
                 
              
               
                 Seven
                 under
                 the
                 Midianites
                 .
                 chap.
                 6.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
              
               
                 Fortie
                 under
                 Gideon
                 .
                 chap.
                 8.
                 vers
                 28.
                 
              
               
                 Three
                 under
                 Abimeleck
                 the
                 Tyrant
                 .
                 chap.
                 9.
                 vers
                 22.
                 
              
               
                 Twentie
                 three
                 under
                 Tola
                 .
                 chap.
                 2.
                 vers
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 Twentie
                 two
                 under
                 Iair
                 .
                 vers
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 Sa.
                 Three
                 hundred
                 one
                 ,
                 as
                 Iephthah
                 saith
                 .
                 Three
                 hundred
                 ,
                 chap.
                 11.
                 vers
                 26.
                 
              
               
                 Eighteen
                 under
                 the
                 Philistines
                 .
                 ch
                 .
                 10.
                 vers
                 8.
                 
              
               
                 Six
                 under
                 Iephthah
                 .
                 chap.
                 12.
                 v.
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 Seven
                 under
                 Ibzan
                 .
                 vers
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 Ten
                 under
                 Elon
                 .
                 vers
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 Eight
                 under
                 Abdon
                 .
                 vers
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 Fortie
                 under
                 the
                 Philistines
                 ,
                 chap.
                 13.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
              
               
                 Twentie
                 under
                 Sampson
                 .
                 c.
                 16.
                 v.
                 31.
                 
              
               
               
                 Fortie
                 under
                 
                   Eli.
                   1
                   Sam.
                
                 chap.
                 4.
                 vers
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 Sa.
                 Four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 ,
                 as
                 above
                 ,
                 Acts
                 Chap.
                 13.
                 vers
                 20.
                 
              
               
                 Fortie
                 years
                 under
                 Samuel
                 and
                 
                   Saul
                   .
                   Acts
                   13.
                
                 vers
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 Fortie
                 under
                 David
                 .
                 first
                 of
                 Kings
                 ,
                 chap.
                 2.
                 vers
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 Three
                 under
                 Solomon
                 ,
                 first
                 of
                 Kings
                 ,
                 chap.
                 6.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
              
               
                 Sa.
                 Five
                 hundred
                 eightie
                 years
                 from
                 the
                 going
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 until
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 Solomon
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 do
                 concur
                 two
                 Characters
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 years
                 ,
                 whereof
                 Iephthah
                 speaketh
                 ,
                 
                   Iudges
                   11.
                
                 vers
                 26.
                 
              
               
                 Four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 years
                 of
                 the
                 Iudges
                 until
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Samuel
                 ,
                 whereof
                 St
                 
                   Paul.
                   Acts
                   13.
                
                 vers
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 Which
                 in
                 the
                 vulgar
                 supputation
                 ,
                 whereby
                 are
                 numbred
                 but
                 four
                 hundred
                 eightie
                 years
                 ,
                 are
                 not
                 found
                 .
              
               
               
                 5.
                 
                 Eleven
                 years
                 of
                 Ezekiah
                 the
                 last
                 King
                 of
                 Iudah
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 vulgar
                 supputation
                 indeed
                 are
                 reckoned
                 up
                 from
                 the
                 building
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 ,
                 four
                 hundred
                 seventeen
                 years
                 ;
                 But
                 there
                 must
                 bee
                 eleven
                 years
                 taken
                 off
                 again
                 ,
                 in
                 respect
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Captivitie
                 of
                 Babylon
                 is
                 counted
                 the
                 eleventh
                 year
                 of
                 Iechoniah
                 ,
                 that
                 was
                 King
                 immediately
                 before
                 ,
                 instead
                 it
                 should
                 bee
                 upon
                 good
                 ground
                 ,
                 referred
                 to
                 the
                 eleventh
                 year
                 of
                 Ezekiah
                 ,
                 at
                 which
                 time
                 the
                 Temple
                 was
                 destroied
                 ;
                 As
                 you
                 may
                 read
                 hereof
                 
                   Michaël
                   Mestlinum
                   quaest
                   .
                   7.
                   
                   Chronolog
                   .
                   pag.
                   67.
                   &
                   seqq
                   .
                   Etiam
                   Reusnerum
                   de
                   supput
                   .
                   annorum
                   mundi
                   ,
                   pag.
                   28.
                   
                   &
                   Iohannem
                   Piscatorem
                   in
                   suo
                   Chronol
                   .
                   Indice
                   pag.
                   15.
                
                 with
                 som
                 others
                 more
                 .
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 Seven
                 years
                 in
                 the
                 times
                 of
                 the
                 Kings
                 of
                 Persia
                 ,
                 as
                 of
                 Cyrus
                 six
                 years
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 Xerxes
                 the
                 second
                 one
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Whereof
                 Mestlinus
                 Quaest.
                 Chronol
                 .
                 pag.
                 3.
                 5.
                 38.
                 
              
               
               
                 7.
                 
                 Two
                 years
                 ,
                 which
                 
                   Scaliger
                   ,
                   Calvisius
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Helvicus
                 do
                 refer
                 to
                 the
                 supputation
                 of
                 years
                 since
                 the
                 birth
                 of
                 Christ
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 these
                 mentioned
                 years
                 ,
                 which
                 together
                 amount
                 to
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 six
                 years
                 ,
                 beeing
                 added
                 to
                 the
                 five
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 four
                 years
                 ,
                 since
                 the
                 Creation
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 supputation
                 of
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 five
                 years
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ;
                 it
                 will
                 bee
                 manifest
                 that
                 the
                 six
                 thousand
                 years
                 since
                 the
                 Creation
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 do
                 exspire
                 with
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 since
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 Christ
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 since
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 doth
                 also
                 exspire
                 the
                 period
                 and
                 time
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 until
                 the
                 Flood
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Flood
                 came
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 sixth
                 year
                 from
                 the
                 Creation
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 was
                 exspired
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 
                   one
                   thousand
                   six
                   hundred
                   fiftie
                   sixth
                   year
                
                 since
                 the
                 birth
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 is
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 vulgar
                 supputation
                 ,
                 
                 incident
                 into
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fourth
                 ,
                 or
                 begining
                 of
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 the
                 conjectures
                 of
                 som
                 famous
                 learned
                 men
                 have
                 been
                 these
                 ;
                 that
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 these
                 years
                 ,
                 great
                 revolutions
                 and
                 changes
                 may
                 bee
                 looked
                 for
                 ;
                 as
                 especially
                 do
                 mention
                 hereof
                 .
              
               
                 Leonard
                 Krentheim
                 in
                 suis
                 conject
                 .
                 
                   p.
                   53.
                
                 
              
               
                 Euchstadius
                 in
                 discursu
                 de
                 conjunct
                 .
                 M.
                 pag.
                 H.
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 Wencestaus
                 Budowez
                 in
                 circulo
                 Horol
                 .
                 &c.
                 
                   pag.
                   15.
                
                 
              
               
                 
                   Paulus
                   Crellius
                   in
                   Prompt
                   .
                   Biblico
                   ,
                
                 under
                 the
                 word
                 Burse
                 ,
                 or
                 title
                 of
                 repentance
                 ,
                 pag.
                 119.
                 
              
               
                 Seeing
                 the
                 mystical
                 numbers
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 expressed
                 in
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Daniel
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 :
                 the
                 six
                 thousand
                 years
                 ,
                 since
                 the
                 Creation
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 the
                 period
                 since
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 until
                 the
                 Flood
                 do
                 meet
                 
                   with
                   the
                   ending
                   of
                
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 which
                 draweth
                 neer
                 :
                 
                 It
                 is
                 very
                 likelie
                 that
                 for
                 certain
                 ,
                 som
                 great
                 things
                 are
                 at
                 the
                 door
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 wee
                 may
                 look
                 for
                 fearful
                 and
                 terrible
                 revolutions
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 now
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 time
                 ,
                 wherein
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 doth
                 call
                 upon
                 us
                 ,
                 
                   Watch
                   ,
                   praie
                   ,
                   look
                   up
                   ,
                   and
                   lift
                   up
                   your
                   heads
                   ;
                   becaus
                   your
                   redemption
                   is
                   at
                   hand
                   .
                
                 But
                 the
                 result
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 is
                 this
                 ,
                 which
                 hee
                 declareth
                 ,
                 
                   Luke
                   18●
                
                 vers
                 8.
                 
                 
                   When
                   the
                   Son
                   of
                   man
                   cometh
                   ,
                   shall
                   hee
                   finde
                   faith
                   on
                   the
                   earth
                   ?
                
                 namely
                 ,
                 
                   that
                   Faith
                
                 which
                 the
                 widow
                 had
                 and
                 used
                 against
                 the
                 
                   unjust
                   Iudg
                
                 ;
                 by
                 her
                 importunitie
                 ,
                 praiers
                 ,
                 and
                 supplications
                 ,
                 until
                 shee
                 was
                 
                   avenged
                   of
                   her
                   adversaries
                
                 .
                 Surely
                 this
                 faith
                 is
                 not
                 found
                 among
                 them
                 that
                 dwell
                 on
                 the
                 earth
                 .
                 The
                 poor
                 Woman
                 put
                 to
                 flight
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   wandring
                   in
                   the
                   Wilderness
                
                 ,
                 Revel
                 .
                 12.
                 vers
                 14.
                 onely
                 maketh
                 use
                 of
                 this
                 weapon
                 against
                 her
                 Adversarie
                 ,
                 and
                 continueth
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 crying
                 ,
                 without
                 intermission
                 to
                 God
                 the
                 righteous
                 Judg.
                 And
                 
                   shall
                   hee
                
                 not
                 avenge
                 her
                 ?
                 
                   Shall
                   hee
                
                 not
                 avenge
                 
                 his
                 own
                 elect
                 ,
                 which
                 crie
                 daie
                 and
                 night
                 unto
                 him
                 ,
                 though
                 hee
                 bear
                 long
                 with
                 them
                 ?
                 I
                 tell
                 you
                 that
                 hee
                 will
                 avenge
                 them
                 speedily
                 .
                 But
                 those
                 that
                 live
                 
                   in
                   securitie
                
                 ,
                 and
                 persist
                 in
                 their
                 malice
                 ,
                 and
                 wickedness
                 when
                 they
                 shall
                 saie
                 :
                 
                   Peace
                   and
                   safetie
                   ;
                   then
                   sudden
                   destruction
                   shall
                   com
                   upon
                   them
                   ,
                   as
                   travail
                   upon
                   a
                   woman
                   with
                   child
                   ,
                   and
                   they
                   shall
                   not
                   escape
                   .
                
                 1
                 Thes
                 .
                 5.
                 vers
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 For
                 the
                 daie
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 shall
                 com
                 as
                 a
                 thief
                 in
                 the
                 night
                 .
              
               
                 Wherefore
                 watch
                 and
                 praie
                 .
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
           
             
             
             
               Apocalypsis
               Reserata
               :
               OR
               ,
               THE
               REVELATION
               OF
               St
               IOHN
               OPENED
               :
               Wherein
               the
               distribution
               of
               the
               times
               of
               the
               
                 New
                 Testament
              
               being
               made
               Into
               
                 
                   The
                   Kingdom
                   of
                   the
                   Dragon
                   ,
                
                 
                   The
                   Lievtenantship
                   of
                   Antichrist
                   ,
                
                 
                   The
                   quiet
                   state
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   in
                   the
                   Kingdom
                   of
                   Christ
                   ,
                
              
               By
               the
               EXPOSITION
               of
               the
               XI
               ,
               and
               XVI
               ,
               Chapters
               ,
               is
               shewed
               
                 What
                 in
                 these
                 our
                 present
                 times
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Hitherto
                   hath
                   been
                   fulfilled
                   ,
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   At
                   this
                   present
                   is
                   effectually
                   brought
                   to
                   pass
                   ,
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   And
                   henceforth
                   is
                   to
                   bee
                   exspected
                   in
                   the
                   years
                   neer
                   at
                   hand
                   .
                
              
            
             
               REVEL
               .
               Chap.
               22.
               v.
               12.
               
            
             
               Behold
               I
               com
               quickly
               ,
               and
               my
               reward
               is
               with
               mee
               ,
               to
               give
               everie
               man
               according
               as
               his
               work
               shall
               bee
               .
            
             
               LONDON
               ,
               Printed
               in
               the
               year
               1650.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             
             
               THE
               REVELATION
               OF
               St
               JOHN
            
             
               DEscribeth
               the
               State
               of
               the
               Christian
               Church
               in
               the
               New
               Testament
               ,
               and
               also
               the
               things
               which
               shall
               com
               to
               pass
               in
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               fourth
               Monarchie
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               doth
               subsist
               .
            
             
               This
               description
               comprehendeth
               three
               periods
               ,
               or
               three
               sorts
               of
               times
               .
            
             
               The
               first
               Period
               containeth
               
                 Regnum
                 Draconis
                 Ethnicum
              
               ,
               the
               time
               of
               the
               Dragon
               ,
               until
               the
               three
               hundred
               nintie
               fifth
               year
               of
               our
               Lord.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               the
               time
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               seven
               
               Crowns
               stood
               upon
               the
               seven
               heads
               of
               the
               Dragon
               :
               
                 Revelations
                 12.
              
               vers
               3.
               and
               the
               Dragon
               himself
               under
               the
               Heathenish
               Emperors
               was
               publickly
               adored
               and
               worshipped
               ;
               but
               the
               Christians
               persecuted
               ,
               banished
               ,
               and
               put
               to
               death
               ;
               till
               at
               last
               Constantine
               the
               Great
               came
               to
               the
               Imperial
               seat
               ,
               whereby
               the
               reign
               of
               the
               Dragon
               came
               to
               an
               end
               ,
               the
               Dragon
               was
               cast
               out
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               Heaven
               ,
               the
               Church
               prevailed
               ,
               and
               triumphed
               ,
               until
               the
               death
               of
               the
               Emperor
               Theodosius
               ,
               at
               which
               time
               the
               Devil
               left
               his
               shape
               of
               a
               Dragon
               ,
               and
               resigned
               his
               Host
               ,
               his
               residence
               and
               seat
               ,
               with
               his
               great
               autoritie
               unto
               the
               Beast
               with
               ten
               horns
               ,
               when
               it
               rose
               up
               out
               of
               the
               sea
               .
               
                 Revel
                 .
                 13.
              
               vers
               2.
               
            
             
               
                 The
                 second
                 Period
                 comprehendeth
              
               vicariatum
               Draconis
               Antichristianum
               :
               
                 or
                 the
                 time
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Pope
                 at
              
               Rome
               ,
               
                 as
                 the
                 Antichrist
                 ,
                 and
                 installed
                 Lievtenant
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 blasphemeth
                 
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 name
                 ,
                 and
                 persecuteth
                 his
                 Saints
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 .
              
               Revel
               .
               13.
               vers
               2.
               when
               the
               Dragon
               was
               overcom
               ,
               and
               cast
               out
               of
               the
               Church-Heaven
               ;
               hee
               did
               
                 cast
                 out
                 of
                 his
                 mouth
                 water
                 ,
                 as
                 a
                 flood
                 after
                 the
                 woman
                 ,
              
               Revel
               .
               12.
               vers
               15.
               that
               is
               ,
               hee
               stirred
               up
               the
               Septentrional
               Nations
               ,
               to
               invade
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ;
               intending
               thereby
               to
               root
               out
               and
               destroie
               the
               Church
               ;
               But
               the
               Earth
               swallowed
               up
               the
               flood
               ;
               in
               regard
               these
               Nations
               imbraced
               the
               Christian
               Faith
               ,
               remained
               in
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               and
               erected
               several
               Kingdoms
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               Seeing
               then
               the
               Dragon
               saw
               ,
               that
               hee
               could
               not
               maintain
               the
               Heathenism
               ,
               wherein
               hee
               openly
               was
               worshipped
               and
               served
               ,
               hee
               resigneth
               to
               the
               Beast
               ,
               (
               which
               riseth
               up
               out
               of
               the
               sea
               ,
               
                 Revelations
                 13.
              
               vers
               1.
               and
               is
               ridden
               and
               governed
               by
               the
               great
               Whore
               of
               
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 17.
              
               vers
               3.
               &c.
               )
               that
               is
               ,
               to
               the
               Antichrist
               ,
               who
               in
               the
               time
               of
               
               these
               wars
               doth
               creep
               out
               in
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               his
               power
               and
               his
               seat
               ,
               and
               great
               autoritie
               ,
               chapter
               13.
               vers
               2.
               and
               so
               make's
               him
               his
               Vicar
               and
               Lievtenant
               ,
               by
               giving
               over
               to
               him
               his
               seat
               and
               residence
               ,
               the
               Citie
               of
               Rome
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               Romane
               Empire
               .
               Whence
               it
               came
               to
               pass
               that
               about
               this
               time
               the
               Bishops
               of
               Rome
               begun
               to
               oppose
               the
               marriage
               of
               Priests
               ,
               and
               to
               seek
               to
               have
               the
               Primacie
               and
               preeminencie
               both
               in
               Church
               and
               State.
               
            
             
               The
               Dragon
               doth
               resigne
               to
               his
               Lievtenant
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               his
               whole
               Host
               ,
               (
               for
               in
               this
               sens
               the
               LXX
               Interpreters
               do
               use
               this
               word
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               as
               
                 Exodus
                 14.
              
               vers
               14.
               and
               15.
               vers
               4.
               and
               in
               other
               places
               ,
               as
               
                 Matthew
                 24.
              
               vers
               29
               ,
               30.
               &c.
               )
               The
               host
               of
               the
               Dragon
               are
               his
               Angels
               or
               Devils
               ,
               and
               the
               Idols
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Dragon
               and
               the
               Devils
               are
               worshipped
               and
               served
               by
               the
               Heathen
               .
            
             
               These
               (
               viz.
               
                 Idols
                 )
                 the
                 Antichristian
                 Popedome
                 hath
                 received
                 and
                 
                 worshipped
                 ,
                 under
              
               the
               name
               and
               shape
               of
               Saints
               ,
               the
               Dragon
               ,
               and
               his
               Vicegerent
               ;
               
                 as
                 hereof
                 the
                 text
                 in
                 the
                 words
                 following
                 ,
                 vers
                 3.
                 and
                 4.
                 doth
                 speak
                 :
              
               The
               whole
               Earth
               did
               wonder
               at
               the
               Beast
               ,
               and
               they
               worshipped
               the
               Dragon
               ,
               which
               gave
               power
               unto
               the
               Beast
               ,
               and
               they
               worshipped
               the
               Beast
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 The
                 Dragon
                 doth
                 give
                 also
                 unto
                 him
                 great
                 Autoritie
                 ,
              
               and
               make's
               him
               a
               Head
               over
               great
               Countries
               ;
               whereof
               David
               did
               prophesie
               in
               the
               
                 Psal
                 .
                 110.
              
               vers
               6.
               
               The
               time
               of
               this
               Lievtenantship
               shall
               continue
               fortie
               two
               moneths
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               one
               thousand
               two
               hundred
               sixtie
               years
               ,
               since
               then
               it
               did
               begin
               in
               the
               three
               hundred
               ninetie
               fifth
               year
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               therefore
               it
               doth
               end
               in
               the
               one
               thousand
               six
               hundred
               fiftie
               fifth
               year
               ,
               shortly
               to
               com
               .
            
             
               Upon
               this
               followeth
               the
               third
               Period
               ,
               which
               bringeth
               
                 Statum
                 Ecclesiae
                 tranquillum
              
               ;
               the
               true
               peace
               and
               quiet
               condition
               of
               the
               Church
               here
               on
               earth
               .
            
             
               Seeing
               at
               the
               sound
               of
               the
               trumpet
               
               of
               the
               seventh
               Angel
               ,
               the
               
                 seventh
                 plague
              
               ,
               or
               the
               
                 third
                 woe
              
               doth
               com
               upon
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               same
               time
               the
               
                 seventh
                 Vial
              
               of
               God's
               wrath
               is
               poured
               out
               ,
               wherewith
               the
               Enemies
               of
               the
               Church
               are
               wholly
               cut
               off
               and
               destroied
               ,
               yea
               ,
               even
               the
               Devil
               himself
               shut
               up
               in
               the
               bottomless
               pit
               ,
               
                 Revel
                 .
                 20.
              
               vers
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3.
               therefore
               now
               nothing
               but
               a
               true
               and
               constant
               peace
               can
               ensue
               .
            
             
               
                 Whence
                 it
                 is
                 that
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 rejoiceth
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 voice
                 ,
              
               Revel
               .
               11.
               
                 vers
                 15.
                 saying
              
               :
               The
               Kingdoms
               of
               this
               world
               are
               becom
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               and
               of
               his
               Church
               ,
               and
               hee
               shall
               reign
               for
               ever
               and
               ever
               .
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 v.
                 17.
                 
                 Shee
              
               giveth
               also
               thanks
               to
               the
               Lord
               God
               Almightie
               ,
               because
               hee
               hath
               taken
               to
               himself
               his
               great
               power
               ,
               and
               reigneth
               .
            
             
               Unto
               these
               three
               times
               ,
               all
               the
               three
               parts
               of
               the
               Revelation
               of
               St
               Iohn
               are
               directed
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               Son
               of
               God
               describeth
               in
               this
               Revelation
               the
               state
               of
               the
               Christian
               
               Church
               ,
               and
               the
               things
               befalling
               to
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               in
               a
               threefold
               manner
               ;
               as
               ,
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   By
                   seven
                   Epistles
                   ,
                   chap.
                   2.
                   and
                   3.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   By
                   a
                   book
                   sealed
                   .
                   chap.
                   4
                   ,
                   5
                   ,
                   6
                   ,
                   7.
                   
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   By
                   a
                   little
                   book
                   open
                   .
                   chap.
                   10.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
                 And
                 following
              
               .
            
             
               Hee
               doth
               appear
               also
               to
               John
               everie
               time
               in
               an
               other
               shape
               .
               As
            
             
               1.
               
               In
               the
               likeness
               of
               a
               son
               of
               man
               ,
               chapter
               1.
               who
               suffereth
               in
               the
               first
               period
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               As
               a
               Beast
               in
               the
               shape
               of
               a
               
                 Lamb
                 ,
                 having
                 seven
                 horns
                 and
                 seven
                 eies
                 ,
              
               ch
               .
               5.
               which
               doth
               fight
               in
               the
               second
               period
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               As
               a
               
                 mightie
                 strong
                 Angel
                 clothed
                 with
                 a
                 cloud
                 ,
              
               chapter
               10.
               who
               in
               the
               third
               period
               hath
               all
               things
               put
               under
               his
               feet
               ,
               and
               reigneth
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 In
                 the
                 likeness
                 of
                 a
                 Son
                 of
                 man
                 in
                 the
                 midst
                 of
                 the
                 seven
                 Candlesticks
                 ,
              
               &c.
               chapter
               1.
               vers
               12
               ,
               13
               ,
               14
               ,
               15
               ,
               16.
               
               Hee
               declareth
               the
               condition
               of
               the
               Church
               in
               general
               ,
               by
               seven
               Epistles
               ,
               
               whereof
               the
               first
               and
               second
               belong
               to
               the
               first
               period
               ;
               the
               third
               ,
               fourth
               ,
               fifth
               ,
               sixth
               and
               seventh
               to
               the
               second
               ;
               and
               the
               promises
               ,
               chap.
               2.
               and
               3.
               to
               the
               third
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 As
                 a
                 beast
              
               ,
               in
               the
               shape
               of
               a
               
                 Lamb
                 ,
                 with
                 seven
                 horns
                 ,
                 and
                 seven
                 eies
                 ,
              
               hee
               openeth
               the
               book
               sealed
               
                 (
                 the
                 secret
                 and
                 hidden
                 Decree
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 )
              
               and
               intimateth
               thereby
               the
               things
               befalling
               to
               the
               Romane
               Empire
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               Church
               is
               built
               up
               and
               preserved
               ,
               chap.
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               7
               ,
               8
               ,
               9.
               and
               distinctly
               how
               things
               shall
               bee
               carried
               .
            
             
               
                 In
                 the
                 Political
                 State.
                 
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                   first
                   Period
                   until
                   the
                   three
                   hundred
                   ninetie
                   fifth
                   year
                   of
                   our
                   Lord
                   ,
                
                 which
                 by
                 opening
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 six
                 seals
                 is
                 performed
                 ,
                 chapter
                 6.
                 where
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 five
                 seals
                 ,
                 the
                 condition
                 under
                 the
                 heathenish
                 Emperors
                 ;
                 but
                 in
                 the
                 sixth
                 ,
                 the
                 fall
                 of
                 Heathenism
                 under
                 the
                 Christian
                 Emperors
                 ,
                 from
                 Constantine
                 the
                 Great
                 until
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Theodosius
                 ,
                 who
                 died
                 the
                 17.
                 of
                 
                   Ianuarie
                   Anno
                
                 three
                 hundred
                 
                 ninetie
                 five
                 ,
                 fifteen
                 prefigured
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                   second
                   Period
                   from
                   the
                   three
                   hundred
                   ninetie
                   fifth
                   ,
                   until
                   the
                   one
                   thousand
                   six
                   hundred
                   fiftie
                   fifth
                   year
                   of
                   our
                   Lord
                   ,
                
                 where
                 the
                 seventh
                 seal
                 is
                 opened
                 ,
                 and
                 seven
                 Angels
                 with
                 seven
                 Trumpets
                 declare
                 to
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 by
                 seven
                 judgments
                 it's
                 ruine
                 ,
                 chap.
                 8.
                 
                   which
                   plagues
                   have
                   been
                   fulfilled
                
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 first
                 :
                 by
                 the
                 Invasions
                 of
                 barbarous
                 Nations
                 .
                 Anno
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 five
                 vers
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 second
                 by
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 which
                 first
                 hapned
                 by
                 
                   Alaricus
                   .
                   Anno
                
                 four
                 hundred
                 ten
                 ,
                 ver
                 .
                 8.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 third
                 by
                 taking
                 away
                 Imperial
                 dignitie
                 in
                 
                   Augustulus
                   ▪
                   Anno
                
                 four
                 hundred
                 seventie
                 six
                 ,
                 vers
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 fourth
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Abolition
                 of
                 all
                 eminent
                 publick
                 charges
                 at
                 
                   Rome
                   .
                   Anno
                
                 five
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 two
                 ,
                 vers
                 12.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 fifth
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Saracens
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 first
                 wo.
                 Chap.
                 9.
                 vers
                 1.
                 until
                 the
                 twelfth
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 sixth
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Turks
                 ,
                 chap.
                 9.
                 vers
                 13.
                 until
                 the
                 nineteenth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 
                 abominable
                 Idolatrie
                 ,
                 murthers
                 ,
                 sorceries
                 ,
                 fornications
                 and
                 thefts
                 ,
                 vers
                 20
                 ,
                 21.
                 of
                 the
                 Papists
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 second
                 wo.
                 
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                   third
                   Period
                   when
                   the
                   one
                   thousand
                   six
                   hundred
                   fiftie
                   fifth
                   year
                
                 doth
                 begin
                 ,
                 the
                 seventh
                 Angel
                 doth
                 sound
                 ,
                 and
                 withal
                 the
                 seventh
                 judgment
                 is
                 executed
                 upon
                 the
                 Enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 third
                 wo
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 Mysterie
                 of
                 God
                 is
                 fulfilled
                 ,
                 
                   Revel
                   .
                   10.
                
                 vers
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Appeareth
                   the
                   Son
                   of
                   God
                   to
                
                 John
                 ,
                 
                   as
                   a
                   mightie
                   strong
                   Angel
                   from
                   Heaven
                   clothed
                   with
                   a
                   cloud
                   ,
                
                 having
                 a
                 little
                 book
                 open
                 ,
                 which
                 Iohn
                 swallowed
                 down
                 ,
                 and
                 thereupon
                 prophesieth
                 ,
                 how
                 things
                 shall
                 come
                 to
                 pass
                 ,
                 especially
                 ,
              
            
             
               
                 In
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 State.
                 
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 first
                 Period
                 until
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Church
                 is
                 built
                 up
                 under
                 great
                 persecution
                 ,
                 chap.
                 11.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 Church
                 is
                 gloriously
                 beautified
                 ,
                 and
                 clothed
                 with
                 the
                 Son
                 (
                 of
                 
                 righteousness
                 )
                 hath
                 the
                 Moon
                 under
                 her
                 feet
                 (
                 despiseth
                 all
                 worldlie
                 and
                 earthlie
                 things
                 ,
                 and
                 reigneth
                 over
                 the
                 works
                 of
                 darkness
                 ;
                 )
                 and
                 upon
                 her
                 head
                 a
                 Crown
                 of
                 twelv
                 stars
                 ,
                 the
                 Apostles
                 and
                 the
                 wholsom
                 Doctrine
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 .
                 Chap.
                 12.
                 vers
                 1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 3
                 
                   The
                   red
                   Dragon
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Devil
                 stirreth
                 up
                 manie
                 heresies
                 ,
                 persecuteth
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 Constantine
                 the
                 great
                 cometh
                 to
                 the
                 Imperial
                 Seat
                 ,
                 the
                 Dragon
                 is
                 overcom
                 ,
                 and
                 Heathenism
                 exstirpated
                 ,
                 vers
                 4.
                 and
                 following
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 second
                 Period
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fift
                 year
                 ,
                 these
                 seven
                 Synchronisms
                 or
                 concurrent
                 times
                 are
                 described
                 .
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Holie
                   Citie
                   is
                   trodden
                   under
                   foot
                   by
                   the
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   chap.
                   11.
                   vers
                   2.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   two
                   Witnesses
                   clothed
                   with
                   sackcloth
                   ,
                   vers
                   third
                   until
                   the
                   tenth
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   The
                   Woman
                   fled
                   into
                   the
                   
                   wilderness
                   ,
                   and
                   is
                   fed
                   there
                   ,
                   chap.
                   12.
                   vers
                   6.
                   until
                   the
                   fourteenth
                   .
                
                 
                   4.
                   
                   The
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                   blasphemeth
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   maketh
                   war
                   with
                   the
                   Saints
                   .
                   chap.
                   13.
                   vers
                   5
                   ,
                   6
                   ,
                   7.
                   
                
                 
                   5.
                   
                   The
                   Beast
                   with
                   two
                   horns
                   at
                   the
                   same
                   time
                   drive's
                   a
                   trade
                   with
                   his
                   pedling
                   wares
                   ,
                   vers
                   11.
                   until
                   the
                   eighteenth
                   .
                
                 
                   6.
                   
                   The
                   one
                   hundred
                   fortie
                   four
                   thousand
                   sing
                   a
                   new
                   song
                   ,
                   and
                   live
                   without
                   blame
                   ,
                   chap.
                   14.
                   vers
                   1.
                   until
                   the
                   sixth
                   .
                
                 
                   7.
                   
                   The
                   Whore
                   of
                   Babylon
                   ,
                   the
                   Popish
                   Hierarchie
                   ride's
                   ,
                   and
                   rule
                   's
                   the
                   beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                   ,
                   the
                   Princes
                   and
                   Potentates
                   ,
                   which
                   adhere
                   unto
                   the
                   Papacie
                   at
                   their
                   own
                   chusing
                   and
                   liking
                   ,
                   chapter
                   17.
                   
                
              
               
                 Herewith
                 God
                 causeth
                 Babylon
                 to
                 bee
                 forewarned
                 .
                 
                   Chap.
                   14.
                   vers
                   6.
                   with
                   following
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 Declareth
                 and
                 denounceth
                 unto
                 her
                 the
                 punishments
                 and
                 plagues
                 .
                 Chapter
                 15.
                 and
                 16.
                 
              
               
                 And
                 when
                 no
                 Reformation
                 doth
                 follow
                 ,
                 hee
                 passeth
                 the
                 sentence
                 upon
                 her
                 ,
                 and
                 destroieth
                 her
                 .
                 Chap.
                 17.
                 and
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Whereupon
                   in
                   the
                   third
                   Period
                   followeth
                
                 the
                 description
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 joie
                 and
                 Triumph
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 over
                 the
                 total
                 ruine
                 and
                 destruction
                 of
                 her
                 enemies
                 .
                 chapter
                 19.
                 and
                 the
                 desired
                 tranquillitie
                 and
                 peace
                 of
                 the
                 Christian
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 
                   These
                   things
                   wee
                   may
                   see
                   and
                   learn
                   in
                   general
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Revelation
                   of
                   St
                   Iohn
                   .
                
                 But
                 seeing
                 there
                 bee
                 manie
                 particular
                 and
                 important
                 things
                 conteined
                 therein
                 ,
                 which
                 do
                 relate
                 unto
                 our
                 present
                 times
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 for
                 the
                 comfort
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 now
                 afflicted
                 ;
                 wee
                 think
                 good
                 and
                 expedient
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 collection
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 of
                 these
                 our
                 times
                 doth
                 speak
                 exactly
                 and
                 particularly
                 the
                 eleventh
                 chapter
                 in
                 the
                 Historie
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 .
              
               
               
                 And
                 the
                 sixteenth
                 chapter
                 in
                 the
                 description
                 of
                 the
                 seven
                 vials
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God.
                 
              
               
                 
                   The
                   eleventh
                   chapter
                
                 describeth
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 third
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Prophesie
                 ,
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 little
                 open
                 book
                 ,
                 and
                 and
                 goe's
                 through
                 all
                 the
                 three
                 Periods
                 of
                 the
                 times
                 of
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 and
                 becaus
                 it
                 is
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 an
                 abridgment
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 and
                 describeth
                 the
                 whole
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ;
                 wee
                 will
                 take
                 the
                 whole
                 into
                 our
                 thought
                 ,
                 and
                 consider
                 the
                 contents
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 it
                 consisteth
                 of
                 two
                 parts
                 ,
                 wherein
                 is
                 described
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 What
                 is
                 declared
                 unto
                 St
                 Iohn
                 by
                 word
                 of
                 mouth
                 ,
                 how
                 things
                 shall
                 com
                 to
                 pass
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 period
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 building
                 up
                 of
                 the
                 Christian
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 second
                 period
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 Antichristian
                 Vicar
                 in
                 two
                 Synchronisms
                 or
                 concurrencies
                 of
                 times
                 .
              
               
                 Where
                 ,
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Gentiles
                 tread
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
                 under
                 
                 foot
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 fortie
                 two
                 moneths
                 .
                 
                   vers
                   2.
                
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 are
                 clothed
                 with
                 sackcloth
                 ,
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 daies
                 ,
                 
                   vers
                   3.
                   
                   And
                   following
                
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 What
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 third
                 Period
                 is
                 represented
                 to
                 Iohn
                 by
                 a
                 sudden
                 change
                 in
                 a
                 vision
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                   first
                   period
                   under
                   the
                   Empire
                   of
                   the
                   Dragon
                   ,
                
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 causeth
                 his
                 Temple
                 and
                 Church
                 to
                 bee
                 built
                 up
                 .
                 The
                 place
                 of
                 the
                 Sacrifices
                 to
                 bee
                 measured
                 ,
                 and
                 doth
                 faithfully
                 protect
                 his
                 persecuted
                 Christians
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 thus
                 writeth
                 Iohn
                 .
                 
                   Vers
                   1.
                
                 
                 And
                 there
                 was
                 given
                 mee
                 a
                 reed
                 like
                 unto
                 a
                 rod
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Angel
                 stood
                 saying
                 :
                 Rise
                 and
                 measure
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Altar
                 ,
                 and
                 them
                 that
                 worship
                 therein
                 .
              
               
                 Mow
                 seeing
                 the
                 building
                 and
                 gathering
                 of
                 the
                 Christian
                 Church
                 is
                 here
                 commended
                 to
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 measuring
                 of
                 the
                 Iewish
                 Temple
                 at
                 Ierusalem
                 ;
                 therefore
                 wee
                 must
                 consider
                 the
                 
                 condition
                 and
                 form
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 ,
                 that
                 wee
                 may
                 attain
                 unto
                 the
                 true
                 proper
                 meaning
                 of
                 this
                 text
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Temple
                 
                   stood
                   in
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                
                 Ierusalem
                 
                   upon
                   the
                   Mountain
                
                 Moria
                 ,
                 the
                 length
                 thereof
                 was
                 threescore
                 Cubits
                 ,
                 the
                 breadth
                 twentie
                 cubits
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 height
                 an
                 hundred
                 and
                 twentie
                 cubits
                 .
                 
                   2
                   Chronic
                   .
                   3.
                   vers
                   3.
                   and
                   4.
                   
                
                 Iosep
                 .
                 antiq
                 .
                 lib.
                 8.
                 cap.
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 
                   It
                   was
                   divided
                   into
                   two
                   parts
                   .
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   The
                   hinder
                   part
                
                 towards
                 the
                 West
                 was
                 twentie
                 cubits
                 long
                 ,
                 and
                 twentie
                 cubits
                 broad
                 ;
                 and
                 called
                 
                   Sanctum
                   Sanctorum
                   ,
                   the
                   most
                   holie
                   place
                   ,
                
                 into
                 which
                 the
                 High-Priest
                 alone
                 entred
                 but
                 once
                 a
                 year
                 in
                 his
                 High-Priests
                 attire
                 ,
                 first
                 of
                 
                   Kings
                   6.
                
                 vers
                 16.
                 and
                 8.
                 vers
                 6.
                 
                   2
                   
                   Chron.
                   5.
                
                 vers
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Forepart
                
                 towards
                 the
                 East
                 was
                 fortie
                 cubits
                 long
                 ,
                 and
                 twentie
                 cubits
                 broad
                 ,
                 and
                 was
                 called
                 
                   Sanctum
                   ,
                   the
                   holie
                   place
                
                 into
                 which
                 onely
                 the
                 Priests
                 entred
                 .
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Reg.
                   6.
                
                 vers
                 17.
                 
                   2
                   
                   Chron.
                   5
                
                 v.
                 11.
                 and
                 this
                 is
                 called
                 here
                 in
                 the
                 text
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   Temple
                   of
                   God.
                
                 
              
               
               
                 (
                 Nota.
                 Numerus
                 cubicus
                 dimensionum
                 Templi
                 Judaici
                 exhibet
                 Templi
                 Mystici
                 numerum
                 Novi
                 Testamenti
                 .
                 144000.
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       Longitudo
                       .
                       60.
                       cubitorum
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       Latitudo
                       .
                       20.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       facit
                       1200.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       Altitudo
                       .
                       120.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       facit
                       144000.
                       numerum
                       signatorum
                       .
                       cap.
                       7.
                       
                       &
                       14.
                       )
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Before
                 this
                 hous
                 and
                 Temple
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 were
                 two
                 Courts
                 ;
                 whereof
                 you
                 may
                 read
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 of
                 
                   Kings
                   21.
                
                 vers
                 5.
                 
                   2
                   
                   Chron.
                   4.
                
                 vers
                 9.
                 
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Inner
                   Court
                
                 ,
                 first
                 of
                 
                   Kings
                   6.
                
                 vers
                 36.
                 which
                 was
                 called
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 the
                 Priests
                 .
                 
                   2
                   Chron.
                   4.
                
                 vers
                 6.
                 into
                 which
                 none
                 was
                 permitted
                 to
                 enter
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 Cohanim
                 and
                 Priests
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 appointed
                 order
                 ,
                 there
                 they
                 served
                 God
                 with
                 sacrifices
                 and
                 praiers
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 this
                 Inner
                 Court
                 stood
                 the
                 Altar
                 for
                 the
                 Burnt-Offerings
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 was
                 twentie
                 cubits
                 long
                 and
                 broad
                 ;
                 and
                 ten
                 cubits
                 high
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 whole
                 place
                 of
                 the
                 Inner
                 Court
                 is
                 called
                 here
                 Thysiasterium
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Without
                   this
                   was
                   the
                   great
                   Court.
                   2
                   Chron.
                   4.
                
                 vers
                 9.
                 
                 
                   Iosephus
                   .
                   lib.
                   8.
                   c.
                   3.
                
                 compassed
                 with
                 a
                 wall
                 of
                 white
                 Marble
                 ;
                 
                   The
                   Outward
                   Court
                   ,
                   Ezekiel
                   40.
                
                 vers
                 17.
                 called
                 the
                 Court
                 (
                 in
                 the
                 Temple
                 )
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 Israëlites
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 place
                 did
                 contein
                 in
                 it's
                 circumference
                 four
                 furlongs
                 ,
                 and
                 none
                 durst
                 enter
                 into
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 Israëlites
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 purified
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Law.
                 The
                 unclean
                 Jews
                 ,
                 and
                 Gentiles
                 durst
                 not
                 com
                 into
                 it
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 called
                 in
                 the
                 Greek
                 text
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Outward
                 Court.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 About
                 this
                 Court
                 Herod
                 caussed
                 yet
                 another
                 great
                 place
                 to
                 bee
                 inclosed
                 with
                 a
                 wall
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 and
                 unclean
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 called
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 ;
                 whereof
                 here
                 no
                 mention
                 is
                 made
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 this
                 Iewish
                 Temple
                 doth
                 the
                 Angel
                 
                 represent
                 unto
                 John
                 the
                 condition
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 and
                 Congregation
                 of
                 God
                 in
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 giving
                 him
                 a
                 reed
                 ,
                 and
                 commandeth
                 him
                 to
                 measure
                 .
              
               
                 
                   By
                   the
                   measuring
                
                 is
                 signified
                 the
                 building
                 and
                 propagating
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 .
                 
                   (
                   Ezech.
                   40.
                
                 and
                 following
                 ,
                 
                   Zach.
                   2.
                
                 vers
                 1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Revelations
                   22.
                
                 )
                 God's
                 Fatherlie
                 providence
                 ,
                 and
                 faithful
                 care
                 ;
                 and
                 how
                 exactly
                 and
                 narrowly
                 hee
                 doth
                 observ
                 the
                 actions
                 and
                 sufferings
                 of
                 his
                 believing
                 people
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Iohn
                   should
                   measure
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Temple
                   of
                   God
                
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Christian
                 Congregation
                 ,
                 the
                 true
                 ,
                 invisible
                 ,
                 hidden
                 Church
                 ,
                 which
                 God
                 will
                 build
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 hearts
                 of
                 Believers
                 .
                 
                   1
                   Cor.
                   3.
                
                 vers
                 16
                 ,
                 17.
                 and
                 16.
                 vers
                 9.
                 
                   2
                   
                   Cor.
                   6.
                
                 vers
                 16.
                 
                   1
                   
                   Peter
                   2.
                   5.
                   
                   Ephes
                   .
                   3.
                   17.
                   
                   Iohn
                   14.
                
                 vers
                 23.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Altar
                
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 the
                 place
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Sacrifices
                 were
                 offered
                 ,
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 oblations
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 the
                 inner
                 Court
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Altar
                 of
                 burnt-offerings
                 stood
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Priests
                 did
                 
                 sacrifice
                 ,
                 and
                 performed
                 their
                 service
                 ,
                 and
                 praiers
                 ,
                 That
                 is
                 :
              
               
                 Becaus
                 the
                 Christian
                 Church
                 will
                 bee
                 exposed
                 to
                 afflictions
                 ,
                 and
                 persecucutions
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 to
                 suffer
                 manie
                 grievous
                 torments
                 and
                 tribulations
                 ,
                 in
                 regard
                 the
                 true
                 Professors
                 and
                 servants
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 
                   shall
                   bee
                   delivered
                   up
                   and
                   killed
                   like
                   sheep
                   appointed
                   for
                   the
                   slaughter
                   ,
                
                 therefore
                 hee
                 causeth
                 the
                 sufferings
                 ,
                 and
                 miseries
                 which
                 they
                 should
                 undergo
                 ,
                 to
                 bee
                 measured
                 out
                 unto
                 them
                 ,
                 whereby
                 hee
                 setteth
                 certain
                 bounds
                 to
                 the
                 Tyrants
                 ,
                 beyond
                 which
                 they
                 cannot
                 go
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 com
                 so
                 far
                 ,
                 then
                 must
                 vengeance
                 overtake
                 them
                 .
                 Hence
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 sacrificed
                 souls
                 of
                 the
                 Martyrs
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 slain
                 for
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 lie
                 
                   under
                   the
                   altar
                   ,
                   (
                   as
                   slaughtered
                   sacrifices
                   )
                   crie
                   with
                   a
                   loud
                   voice
                   to
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                   holie
                   and
                   true
                   ,
                   for
                   vengeance
                   .
                
                 Revel
                 .
                 6.
                 vers
                 9
                 ,
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   And
                   them
                   that
                   worship
                   therein
                   .
                   Them
                   therein
                   ,
                
                 not
                 in
                 the
                 Altar
                 ,
                 but
                 in
                 
                 the
                 inner
                 Court
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Court
                 of
                 the
                 Priests
                 ;
                 as
                 Kings
                 and
                 Priests
                 ,
                 
                   Revel
                   .
                   1.
                
                 vers
                 9.
                 and
                 5.
                 vers
                 10.
                 as
                 the
                 
                   Roial
                   Priesthood
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Petr.
                 2.
                 9.
                 
                   in
                   the
                   beauties
                   of
                   his
                   holiness
                   ,
                
                 Psal
                 .
                 110.
                 pure
                 and
                 undefiled
                 .
              
               
                 Worship
                 ,
                 serv
                 God
                 ,
                 with
                 perseverance
                 until
                 the
                 end
                 ,
                 and
                 stick
                 close
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 in
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 persecutions
                 ,
                 even
                 to
                 the
                 yielding
                 up
                 ,
                 and
                 sacrificing
                 of
                 their
                 bodies
                 and
                 lives
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 followeth
                 the
                 Description
                 of
                 the
                 condition
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 Period
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 Poperie
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 untill
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 in
                 two
                 Synchronisms
                 ,
                 or
                 concurrences
                 of
                 times
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 first
                 of
                 the
                 treading
                 under
                 foot
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
                 ,
                 
                   vers
                   2.
                
                 
              
               
                 But
                 the
                 Court
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 without
                 the
                 Temple
                 ,
                 leav
                 out
                 ,
                 and
                 measure
                 it
                 not
                 ,
                 for
                 it
                 is
                 given
                 unto
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 .
              
               
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ;
                 wee
                 read
                 in
                 the
                 old
                 greek
                 versions
                 :
                 which
                 doth
                 agree
                 
                 with
                 the
                 above-mentioned
                 description
                 of
                 the
                 Courts
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 .
                 For
                 the
                 Inner
                 Court
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 vers
                 intimated
                 by
                 the
                 world
                 Thysiasterium
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 by
                 the
                 Outward
                 Court
                 ,
                 
                   here
                   is
                   understood
                   the
                   Outward
                   worship
                   ,
                   or
                   service
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                
                 which
                 consisteth
                 but
                 in
                 the
                 Outward
                 appearance
                 and
                 Ceremonies
                 ,
                 whereof
                 God
                 will
                 take
                 no
                 notice
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 rejecteth
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 Leav
                 it
                 out
                 ,
                 and
                 measure
                 it
                 not
                 
                   saith
                   the
                   Angel.
                
                 
              
               
                 For
                 it
                 given
                 unto
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
                 they
                 shall
                 tread
                 under
                 foot
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 wee
                 must
                 reflect
                 and
                 look
                 ,
              
               
                 First
                 ,
                 
                   upon
                   the
                   invasion
                   of
                   the
                   Heathenish
                   Barbarous
                   Nations
                   .
                
                 For
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 twelfth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ;
                 when
                 Constantine
                 the
                 great
                 was
                 converted
                 unto
                 the
                 Christian
                 Faith
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ;
                 when
                 Theodosius
                 the
                 great
                 died
                 ,
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 did
                 triumph
                 over
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 ,
                 and
                 destroied
                 the
                 
                 worship
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 idolatrous
                 Temples
                 .
                 But
                 immediately
                 after
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Theodosius
                 the
                 Great
                 ,
                 the
                 
                   Goths
                   ,
                   Huns
                   ,
                   Alans
                
                 ,
                 with
                 other
                 Barbarous
                 Nations
                 ,
                 invaded
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 ruined
                 and
                 destroied
                 the
                 same
                 on
                 all
                 sides
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
                 begun
                 to
                 bee
                 troden
                 under
                 foot
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Antichrist
                 had
                 an
                 occasion
                 given
                 to
                 break
                 forth
                 ,
                 and
                 shew
                 himself
                 .
                 
                   vid.
                   Hieron
                   .
                   Epist
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   &
                   11.
                   
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Upon
                   the
                   Heathenish
                   Idolatrie
                
                 ,
                 which
                 in
                 Poperie
                 hath
                 been
                 brought
                 in
                 again
                 .
                 The
                 Heathen
                 worshipped
                 
                   Saturn
                   ,
                   Jupiter
                   ,
                   Mars
                   ,
                   Apollo
                   ,
                   Hercules
                   ,
                   Juno
                   ,
                   Venus
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 In
                 the
                 Popish
                 Religion
                 ,
                 
                   Marie
                   ,
                   Peter
                   ,
                   Paul
                   ,
                   George
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 are
                 set
                 up
                 instead
                 of
                 those
                 ,
                 and
                 called
                 upon
                 in
                 time
                 of
                 distress
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 but
                 little
                 difference
                 between
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Upon
                   the
                   horrible
                   Sodomie
                   ,
                   and
                   other
                   abominable
                   sins
                   ,
                
                 which
                 in
                 time
                 past
                 have
                 been
                 committed
                 by
                 the
                 Heathen
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 then
                 afterwards
                 practised
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 publick
                 books
                 defended
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 as
                 yet
                 commended
                 ,
                 and
                 permitted
                 in
                 the
                 Popish
                 Church
                 by
                 the
                 Clergie
                 and
                 others
                 ,
                 without
                 anie
                 shame
                 ,
                 or
                 restraint
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 
                   treading
                   under
                   foot
                   shall
                   continue
                   fortie
                   two
                   moneths
                   ,
                
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 as
                 doth
                 appear
                 
                   in
                   clavi
                   Apocalypt
                
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   The
                   second
                
                 Synchronismus
                 ,
                 
                   or
                   concurrencie
                   of
                   times
                   ,
                   of
                   the
                   two
                   Witnesses
                   clothed
                   with
                   sackcloth
                   ,
                
                 &c.
                 while
                 's
                 the
                 Holie
                 Citie
                 is
                 troden
                 under
                 foot
                 ,
                 God
                 will
                 not
                 forget
                 his
                 own
                 people
                 ,
                 but
                 will
                 faithfully
                 care
                 for
                 them
                 ,
                 wherefore
                 hee
                 saith
                 :
              
               
                 
                   V.
                   3.
                
                 
                 And
                 I
                 will
                 give
                 power
                 unto
                 my
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 shall
                 prophesie
                 a
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 and
                 threescore
                 daies
                 ,
                 clothed
                 with
                 sackcloth
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 are
                 understood
                 faithful
                 Teachers
                 ,
                 and
                 Governors
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 both
                 Ecclesiastical
                 and
                 Political
                 .
                 To
                 such
                 hee
                 will
                 give
                 ,
                 that
                 
                 they
                 may
                 edifie
                 ,
                 and
                 propagate
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 preserv
                 the
                 same
                 against
                 all
                 Heresies
                 ,
                 and
                 hostile
                 attempts
                 .
                 
                   The
                   number
                   of
                   the
                   witnesses
                   is
                   small
                   ,
                   beeing
                   but
                   two
                   of
                   them
                
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 least
                 number
                 ,
                 yet
                 sufficient
                 for
                 the
                 testimonie
                 of
                 the
                 truth
                 .
                 
                   For
                   at
                   the
                   mouth
                   of
                   two
                   or
                   three
                   witnesses
                   shall
                   the
                   matter
                   bee
                   established
                   .
                
                 Deuter.
                 19.
                 vers
                 15.
                 
                 Matth.
                 18.
                 vers
                 16.
                 
                 John
                 8.
                 vers
                 17.
                 2
                 
                 Cor.
                 13.
                 vers
                 15.
                 
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Angel
                   saith
                   ,
                   Unto
                   my
                   two
                   Witnesses
                   :
                
                 whereby
                 it
                 doth
                 appear
                 ,
                 that
                 hee
                 that
                 speaketh
                 here
                 unto
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 himself
                 .
              
               
                 They
                 shall
                 prophesie
                 clothed
                 with
                 sackcloth
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 whore
                 of
                 Babylon
                 is
                 
                   araied
                   in
                   purple
                   ,
                   and
                   scarlet
                   color
                   ,
                   and
                   decked
                   with
                   gold
                   ,
                   and
                   precious
                   stones
                   and
                   pearls
                   ,
                
                 Revelations
                 17.
                 vers
                 4.
                 
                 But
                 the
                 witnesses
                 of
                 Christ
                 are
                 clothed
                 with
                 sackcloth
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 their
                 cloths
                 are
                 but
                 poor
                 and
                 despicable
                 ,
                 as
                 those
                 were
                 of
                 the
                 Prophets
                 of
                 God
                 in
                 times
                 of
                 old
                 ,
                 
                 who
                 wore
                 also
                 sackcloth
                 ,
                 
                   Isaiah
                   20.
                
                 v.
                 2.
                 a
                 rough
                 garment
                 ,
                 
                   Zechar.
                   13.
                
                 vers
                 4.
                 
                 Elijah
                 
                   was
                   girt
                   with
                   a
                   girdle
                   of
                   leather
                   ,
                
                 2
                 Kings
                 1.
                 vers
                 8.
                 preaching
                 repentance
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 suffering
                 of
                 the
                 Cross
                 ,
                 and
                 persecutions
                 ,
                 and
                 were
                 exposed
                 to
                 all
                 manner
                 of
                 tribulations
                 and
                 persecutions
                 .
              
               
                 
                   A
                   thousand
                   two
                   hundred
                   and
                   threescore
                   daies
                
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 
                   as
                   manie
                   years
                
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 doth
                 appear
                 in
                 
                   Clavi
                   Apocalypt
                
                 :
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   4.
                
                 
                 These
                 are
                 the
                 two
                 Olive-trees
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 two
                 Candlesticks
                 standing
                 before
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 are
                 the
                 High-Priest
                 Ioshua
                 and
                 the
                 Prince
                 Zerubbabel
                 described
                 ,
                 
                   Zach.
                   4.
                
                 vers
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   5.
                
                 
                 And
                 if
                 anie
                 man
                 will
                 hurt
                 them
                 ,
                 fire
                 proceedeth
                 out
                 of
                 their
                 mouth
                 ,
                 and
                 devoureth
                 their
                 enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 if
                 anie
                 man
                 will
                 hurt
                 them
                 ,
                 hee
                 must
                 in
                 this
                 manner
                 bee
                 killed
                 .
              
               
               
                 This
                 is
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 historie
                 of
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Elijah
                 ,
                 when
                 at
                 his
                 request
                 
                   fire
                   came
                   down
                   from
                   Heaven
                   and
                   consumed
                   the
                   Captain
                   ,
                   with
                   his
                   fiftie
                   men
                   .
                
                 2
                 King.
                 1.
                 vers
                 10.
                 12.
                 
              
               
                 Which
                 likewise
                 the
                 Disciples
                 of
                 Christ
                 would
                 have
                 don
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Samaritans
                 would
                 not
                 receiv
                 Christ
                 and
                 them
                 ,
                 
                   Luke
                   9.
                
                 vers
                 54.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   6.
                
                 
                 These
                 have
                 power
                 to
                 shut
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 rain
                 not
                 in
                 the
                 daies
                 of
                 their
                 Prophesie
                 ,
                 
                   which
                   is
                   also
                   taken
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   historie
                   of
                
                 Elijah
                 ,
                 1
                 Kings
                 1●
                 .
              
               
                 
                   V.
                   1.
                
                 
                 And
                 have
                 power
                 over
                 the
                 waters
                 ,
                 to
                 turn
                 them
                 to
                 blood
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 smite
                 the
                 earth
                 with
                 all
                 plagues
                 as
                 often
                 as
                 they
                 will
                 ,
                 
                   which
                   is
                   out
                   of
                
                 Moses's
                 and
                 Aaron's
                 
                   expedition
                   in
                
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 
                   applied
                   and
                   referred
                   hereto
                   ,
                   whereof
                   wee
                   read
                   in
                
                 Exodus
                 7.
                 
                   vers
                   20.
                   and
                   in
                   the
                   8
                   ,
                   9
                   ,
                   10
                   ,
                   11
                   ,
                   12.
                   chapters
                   .
                
              
               
                 By
                 this
                 description
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 ,
                 God
                 doth
                 declare
                 that
                 ,
                 what
                 mercies
                 in
                 times
                 of
                 old
                 hee
                 hath
                 shewed
                 unto
                 his
                 people
                 ,
                 the
                 Children
                 of
                 
                 Israël
                 ,
                 the
                 same
                 hee
                 will
                 also
                 shew
                 in
                 the
                 
                   New
                   Testament
                
                 unto
                 them
                 that
                 believ
                 .
              
               
                 Hee
                 will
                 give
                 them
                 Ioshuas
                 and
                 Zerubbabels
                 ;
                 faithful
                 Teachers
                 ,
                 and
                 religious
                 Rulers
                 ,
                 and
                 Governors
                 ,
                 who
                 shall
                 fit
                 and
                 edifie
                 them
                 unto
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 Candlesticks
                 give
                 light
                 unto
                 them
                 with
                 their
                 pure
                 doctrine
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 Olive-trees
                 assist
                 them
                 with
                 powerful
                 consolation
                 .
              
               
                 Hee
                 will
                 give
                 them
                 zealous
                 Elijahs
                 ,
                 and
                 Elishahs
                 ,
                 who
                 shall
                 fight
                 against
                 the
                 whore
                 Jezabel
                 ,
                 the
                 Priests
                 of
                 Baal
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 persecutors
                 .
              
               
                 Hee
                 will
                 also
                 at
                 length
                 send
                 them
                 his
                 Moses's
                 and
                 Aarons
                 ,
                 who
                 shall
                 deliver
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 bring
                 them
                 forth
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Antichristian
                 bondage
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   7.
                
                 
                 And
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 or
                 shall
                 have
                 finished
                 their
                 Testimonie
                 :
                 
                   cùm
                   finierint
                   vel
                   peregerint
                
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 the
                 versions
                 do
                 render
                 it
                 ,
                 either
                 in
                 the
                 perfect
                 ,
                 or
                 future
                 perfect
                 tens
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 Teachers
                 and
                 Expositors
                 have
                 been
                 mistaken
                 ,
                 to
                 think
                 that
                 this
                 
                 last
                 war
                 should
                 not
                 begin
                 till
                 then
                 ;
                 when
                 the
                 determined
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 should
                 bee
                 exspired
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 becaus
                 by
                 this
                 means
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 should
                 remain
                 in
                 sackcloth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Woman
                 in
                 the
                 wilderness
                 ,
                 beyond
                 the
                 time
                 appointed
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 the
                 fourth
                 beast
                 should
                 continue
                 to
                 blaspheme
                 longer
                 then
                 3½
                 times
                 ,
                 or
                 fortie
                 two
                 moneths
                 .
                 To
                 all
                 which
                 ,
                 not
                 onely
                 the
                 plain
                 text
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 the
                 swearing
                 of
                 the
                 Angel
                 ,
                 
                   Daniel
                   12.
                
                 vers
                 7.
                 and
                 the
                 great
                 Oath
                 of
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 
                   Revelations
                   10.
                
                 vers
                 6.
                 are
                 contradictorie
                 ;
                 therefore
                 wee
                 must
                 look
                 upon
                 the
                 propertie
                 of
                 the
                 text
                 in
                 the
                 original
                 tongue
                 ;
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 is
                 the
                 
                   indefinitum
                   primum
                
                 ,
                 which
                 indeed
                 may
                 bee
                 rendred
                 in
                 the
                 perfect
                 tens
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 finished
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 the
                 future
                 ,
                 perfect
                 tens
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 shall
                 have
                 finished
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 exposition
                 beeing
                 also
                 repugnant
                 and
                 contrarie
                 to
                 this
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 texts
                 in
                 the
                 Revelation
                 ;
                 wee
                 
                 must
                 reject
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 render
                 the
                 words
                 
                   in
                   futuro
                   simplici
                   cùm
                   finituri
                   sunt
                   ;
                   When
                   they
                   shall
                   finish
                   :
                
                 namely
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 shall
                 draw
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   Ioannes
                   Cloverius
                   in
                   primo
                   diluculo
                   Apocalyptico
                   prop.
                   14.
                   p.
                   124.
                
                 and
                 
                   in
                   Comment
                   .
                   posthumo
                   Tom.
                   3.
                   page
                   28.
                
                 doth
                 observ
                 .
                 Likewise
                 
                   Iosephus
                   Medeus
                   in
                   Comment
                   .
                   in
                   Apocalypsin
                   .
                
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 first
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 years
                 do
                 expire
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 one
                 thousand
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 five
                 .
                 Then
                 the
                 two
                 hundred
                 years
                 expire
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 five
                 ,
                 whereupon
                 do
                 follow
                 the
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 end
                 :
                 So
                 that
                 these
                 words
                 ;
                 
                   when
                   they
                   shall
                   finish
                   their
                   testimonie
                   ,
                
                 are
                 to
                 have
                 this
                 sens
                 ;
                 when
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fith
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 the
                 sixtie
                 years
                 shall
                 begin
                 .
              
               
                 Then
                 the
                 Beaest
                 that
                 ascendeth
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 bottomless
                 pit
                 ,
                 shall
                 make
                 war
                 against
                 
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 overcom
                 them
                 and
                 kill
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 Beast
                 here
                 is
                 meant
                 ,
                 the
                 Beast
                 
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                
                 ,
                 which
                 Chapter
                 13.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
                   riseth
                   up
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Sea
                
                 ;
                 whereof
                 the
                 Angel
                 in
                 the
                 17.
                 
                 Chapter
                 vers
                 8.
                 saith
                 to
                 
                   Iohn
                   ,
                   The
                   Beast
                   that
                   thou
                   sawest
                   ,
                   was
                   ,
                   and
                   is
                   not
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   ascend
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   bottomless
                   pit
                   .
                
                 And
                 vers
                 11.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Beast
                   that
                   was
                   ,
                   and
                   is
                   not
                   ,
                   even
                   hee
                   is
                   the
                   eighth
                   ,
                   and
                   is
                   of
                   the
                   seven
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 That
                 is
                 :
                 the
                 Empire
                 or
                 Government
                 ,
                 hath
                 been
                 under
                 the
                 Heathenish
                 Romane
                 Emperors
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Dragon
                 did
                 reign
                 ,
                 and
                 was
                 openly
                 worshipped
                 in
                 Paganism
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   is
                   not
                
                 .
                 The
                 Dragon
                 was
                 thrown
                 from
                 his
                 seat
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 not
                 any
                 more
                 worshipped
                 openly
                 ,
                 becaus
                 Christian
                 Emperors
                 and
                 Governors
                 are
                 com
                 to
                 the
                 Imperial
                 dignitie
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 destroied
                 heathenism
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   ascendeth
                   again
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   bottomless
                   pit
                   .
                
                 When
                 the
                 Dragon's
                 government
                 was
                 destroied
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Heathenish
                 Idolatrie
                 abolished
                 ,
                 the
                 Dragon
                 
                 creep's
                 in
                 again
                 by
                 the
                 means
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                
                 (
                 when
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 is
                 divided
                 into
                 manie
                 Kingdoms
                 )
                 
                   give
                   's
                   him
                   his
                   power
                   ,
                   and
                   his
                   seat
                   ,
                   and
                   great
                   autoritie
                
                 ;
                 and
                 bring
                 's
                 it
                 to
                 this
                 that
                 a
                 new
                 and
                 more
                 holie
                 form
                 of
                 Idolatrie
                 is
                 established
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 hee
                 ,
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Beast
                 is
                 worshipped
                 again
                 ,
                 
                   Revelations
                   13.
                
                 vers
                 2
                 ,
                 3
                 ,
                 4.
                 
                 
                   This
                   Beast
                   is
                   the
                   eighth
                   ,
                   and
                   is
                   of
                   the
                   seven
                
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Rider
                 (
                 the
                 woman
                 sitting
                 upon
                 the
                 Beast
                 )
                 which
                 John
                 seeth
                 in
                 a
                 vision
                 ,
                 Chapter
                 13.
                 vers
                 3.
                 doth
                 govern
                 the
                 civil
                 State
                 in
                 the
                 divided
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                
                 (
                 and
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 seventh
                 sort
                 of
                 Government
                 )
                 and
                 withal
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 ,
                 Popish
                 Government
                 also
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 eighth
                 sort
                 .
                 But
                 becaus
                 the
                 Woman
                 sit's
                 up
                 on
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 both
                 doth
                 make
                 one
                 Complexum
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   a
                   Rider
                
                 ;
                 And
                 the
                 Woman
                 doth
                 after
                 her
                 pleasure
                 ,
                 ride
                 and
                 govern
                 the
                 Beast
                 ;
                 therefore
                 both
                 the
                 
                 last
                 forms
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Common-wealth
                 ,
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 and
                 Political
                 Government
                 in
                 Poperie
                 are
                 counted
                 for
                 One
                 ,
                 wherefore
                 the
                 Angel
                 saith
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   eighth
                   is
                   of
                   the
                   seven
                   .
                
                 Whence
                 wee
                 conclude
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 which
                 ascended
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 bottomless
                 pit
                 ,
                 is
                 understood
                 the
                 Popish
                 Ecclesiastical
                 Government
                 ,
                 which
                 useth
                 the
                 Temporal
                 sword
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 power
                 of
                 worldlie
                 Potentates
                 ,
                 as
                 a
                 Rider
                 maketh
                 use
                 of
                 the
                 power
                 and
                 and
                 strength
                 of
                 his
                 hors
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 this
                 Beast
                 is
                 said
                 here
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 shall
                 make
                 war
                 against
                 the
                 two
                 witnesses
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 overcom
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 kill
                 them
                 :
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 there
                 shall
                 bee
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 a
                 persecution
                 set
                 a
                 foot
                 against
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Protestants
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 instigation
                 of
                 the
                 Pope
                 and
                 the
                 Prelats
                 ,
                 towards
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 appointed
                 time
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 .
              
               
               
                 The
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 shall
                 bee
                 overcom
                 and
                 killed
                 :
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 they
                 shall
                 bee
                 removed
                 ,
                 and
                 thrust
                 out
                 of
                 all
                 Ecclesiastical
                 and
                 Political
                 Offices
                 and
                 imploiments
                 .
              
               
                 
                   (
                   Vers
                   8.
                
                 
                 And
                 their
                 dead
                 bodies
                 shall
                 lie
                 )
                 in
                 the
                 street
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 ,
                 which
                 spiritually
                 is
                 called
                 Sodom
                 and
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 where
                 also
                 our
                 Lord
                 was
                 crucified
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 is
                 the
                 place
                 described
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 persecution
                 shall
                 happen
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 not
                 an
                 universal
                 persecution
                 ,
                 which
                 goe's
                 throughout
                 the
                 whole
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 but
                 a
                 particular
                 Act
                 ,
                 becaus
                 the
                 dead
                 bodies
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 do
                 not
                 lie
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 streets
                 ,
                 but
                 onely
                 in
                 One
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 street
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 is
                 understood
                 
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                   Rome
                
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 Angel
                 saith
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 17.
                 chapter
                 ,
                 vers
                 18.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Woman
                   which
                   thou
                   sawest
                   is
                   that
                   great
                   Citie
                   ,
                   which
                   reigneth
                   over
                   the
                   Kings
                   of
                   the
                   Earth
                
                 ;
                 Which
                 is
                 called
                 in
                 the
                 14.
                 chapter
                 vers
                 8.
                 
                 Babylon
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 .
              
               
               
                 
                   And
                   that
                   by
                
                 Babylon
                 
                   is
                   meant
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                
                 Rome
                 ,
                 
                   is
                   granted
                   by
                   the
                   Jesuits
                   themselvs
                   ,
                   as
                
                 Blasius
                 Viegas
                 in
                 cap.
                 17.
                 
                 Apoc.
                 sect
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Remacius
                 de
                 Vaulx
                 in
                 Harpocrate
                 divino
                 part
                 1.
                 fol.
                 235.
                 
                 Bellarm.
                 lib.
                 2.
                 
                 Pontif.
                 Rom.
                 c.
                 2.
                 &
                 lib.
                 3.
                 c.
                 5.
                 
              
               
                 But
                 by
                 the
                 Citie
                 with
                 the
                 streets
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 whole
                 Romane
                 Popish
                 Empire
                 set
                 forth
                 ;
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 elswhere
                 compared
                 unto
                 
                   a
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                
                 ,
                 chap.
                 13.
                 and
                 17.
                 and
                 unto
                 the
                 Sea
                 with
                 rivers
                 and
                 fountains
                 ,
                 Chapter
                 16.
                 
                 Compare
                 also
                 
                   Luc.
                   14.
                
                 vers
                 21.
                 23.
                 
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Citie
                   of
                   Rome
                   is
                   called
                
                 spiritually
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Romane
                 Papacie
                 .
                 Is
                 among
                 the
                 Hebrews
                 ,
                 especially
                 the
                 Prophets
                 
                   to
                   bee
                   called
                
                 ;
                 signifieth
                 as
                 much
                 
                   as
                   to
                   bee
                
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 a
                 singular
                 high
                 manner
                 and
                 waie
                 ,
                 as
                 appeareth
                 by
                 Isaiah
                 chapter
                 1.
                 vers
                 26.
                 chapter
                 7.
                 vers
                 14
                 chapter
                 9.
                 vers
                 6.
                 chapter
                 56.
                 vers
                 7.
                 chapter
                 60.
                 vers
                 14.
                 chap.
                 26.
                 vers
                 4.
                 
                 
                   Ierem.
                   3.
                
                 vers
                 17.
                 chap.
                 23.
                 vers
                 6.
                 
                 
                   Ezech.
                   48.
                
                 vers
                 35.
                 
                 
                   Zach.
                   6.
                
                 
                 vers
                 12.
                 chap.
                 8.
                 vers
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Finkius
                   .
                   Can.
                   49.
                   
                   Cent.
                   11.
                   )
                
              
               
                 Spiritually
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 Mystically
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 mysterious
                 sens
                 and
                 resemblance
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Another
                   Sodom
                
                 ,
                 becaus
                 of
                 their
                 Paederastia
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 horrible
                 Sodomitical
                 Abominations
                 and
                 sins
                 ,
                 which
                 not
                 onely
                 are
                 committed
                 ,
                 but
                 commended
                 there
                 .
                 As
                 
                   Sleidan
                   lib.
                   and
                   Balaeus
                   in
                   Catalogo
                   ,
                
                 do
                 write
                 
                   concerning
                   Ioannes
                   de
                   la
                   Cata
                   Archbishop
                   of
                   Benevent
                   ,
                
                 that
                 hee
                 published
                 in
                 print
                 a
                 Treatise
                 to
                 commend
                 Sodomie
                 :
                 so
                 that
                 this
                 is
                 fully
                 agreeable
                 to
                 that
                 which
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Isaiah
                 saith
                 ,
                 chap.
                 3.
                 vers
                 9.
                 
                 
                   The
                   shew
                   of
                   their
                   countenance
                   doth
                   witness
                   against
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   they
                   declare
                   their
                   sin
                   as
                
                 Sodom
                 ,
                 
                   they
                   hide
                   it
                   not
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Shee
                   is
                   another
                   Egypt
                
                 ,
                 becaus
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 blindness
                 and
                 hardness
                 of
                 heart
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 becaus
                 of
                 the
                 Tyrannie
                 and
                 grievous
                 bondage
                 ,
                 wherewith
                 shee
                 doth
                 afflict
                 the
                 people
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 driving
                 and
                 compelling
                 them
                 to
                 a
                 slavish
                 servitude
                 of
                 Poperie
                 .
              
               
               
                 
                   Shee
                   is
                   also
                   a
                   true
                   likeness
                   of
                   Ierusalem
                   ,
                
                 becaus
                 shee
                 ,
                 like
                 the
                 Iews
                 ,
                 doth
                 despise
                 God
                 and
                 his
                 word
                 ,
                 killeth
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 nay
                 ,
                 refuseth
                 to
                 hear
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 receiv
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 himself
                 ,
                 blaspheming
                 ,
                 calumniating
                 ,
                 persecuting
                 ,
                 and
                 crucifying
                 him
                 in
                 his
                 members
                 ,
                 as
                 by
                 experience
                 is
                 cleerly
                 seen
                 .
                 
                   And
                   their
                   dead
                   bodies
                   (
                   shal
                   lie
                   )
                   in
                   the
                   street
                   .
                
              
               
                 These
                 words
                 are
                 spoken
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 with
                 som
                 amazement
                 ,
                 abruptly
                 ,
                 and
                 without
                 the
                 concluding
                 word
                 to
                 make
                 up
                 the
                 sens
                 .
                 The
                 dead
                 bodies
                 of
                 the
                 Witnesses
                 in
                 this
                 street
                 ?
                 But
                 which
                 street
                 ?
                 A
                 Citie
                 hath
                 manie
                 streets
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 hath
                 the
                 papal
                 State
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 here
                 called
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 ,
                 having
                 under
                 it
                 manie
                 streets
                 and
                 Kingdoms
                 in
                 subjection
                 ,
                 those
                 wee
                 must
                 reflect
                 upon
                 to
                 discover
                 ,
                 where
                 such
                 wars
                 and
                 persecutions
                 in
                 these
                 years
                 from
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 are
                 hapned
                 .
              
               
                 Three
                 principal
                 streets
                 or
                 Kingdoms
                 hath
                 the
                 Oriental
                 Antichrist
                 ,
                 the
                 Truth
                 
                 in
                 his
                 subjection
                 ,
                 hee
                 hath
                 not
                 used
                 anie
                 such
                 persecution
                 against
                 the
                 Christians
                 in
                 his
                 Dominions
                 .
              
               
                 Seven
                 are
                 under
                 the
                 Occidental
                 Antichrist
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 
                   Italie
                   ,
                   France
                   ,
                   Spain
                
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 British
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 no
                 such
                 remarkable
                 persecution
                 did
                 happen
                 within
                 this
                 time
                 ,
                 nor
                 also
                 in
                 Poland
                 :
                 The
                 attempt
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 made
                 in
                 Prussia
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 was
                 of
                 no
                 long
                 continuance
                 .
                 What
                 came
                 to
                 pass
                 in
                 Hungarie
                 and
                 Transylvania
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 two
                 ,
                 and
                 som
                 following
                 was
                 quieted
                 by
                 the
                 Putshkeyish
                 insurrection
                 ;
                 and
                 cannot
                 bee
                 referred
                 to
                 this
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 tenth
                 Horn
                 yet
                 remain's
                 ;
                 Germanie
                 ,
                 
                   or
                   the
                
                 Germane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 
                   which
                   in
                   the
                   whole
                   Beast
                   or
                   Empire
                   cannot
                   bee
                   counted
                   otherwise
                   ,
                   but
                
                 one
                 horn
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   a
                
                 Kingdom
                 by
                 it self
                 in
                 the
                 whole
                 bodie
                 of
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 principal
                 street
                 in
                 the
                 
                 great
                 Citie
                 ,
                 the
                 principal
                 horn
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 the
                 principal
                 Kingdom
                 in
                 the
                 
                   fourth
                   Monarchie
                
                 ,
                 whose
                 head
                 is
                 represented
                 by
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 .
                 This
                 Germane
                 Empire
                 is
                 here
                 called
                 the
                 street
                 ,
                 
                   per
                   excellentiam
                
                 ,
                 becaus
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 principal
                 street
                 in
                 the
                 Empire
                 ,
                 which
                 doth
                 appear
                 hence
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 By
                 reason
                 it
                 is
                 called
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 By
                 reason
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 a
                 figure
                 and
                 Image
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 having
                 
                   seven
                   heads
                
                 ,
                 in
                 regard
                 of
                 the
                 seven
                 Princes
                 Electors
                 ,
                 and
                 ten
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 ten
                 Circles
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 it
                 is
                 distributed
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 By
                 reason
                 that
                 the
                 head
                 of
                 the
                 Germane
                 Empire
                 hath
                 still
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 a
                 Romane
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 the
                 the
                 preeminencie
                 above
                 all
                 other
                 Kings
                 adhering
                 to
                 the
                 Papal
                 State.
                 
              
               
                 Now
                 in
                 this
                 street
                 wee
                 must
                 seek
                 the
                 warr
                 ;
                 and
                 wee
                 shall
                 also
                 finde
                 it
                 ,
                 if
                 wee
                 consider
                 what
                 is
                 passed
                 from
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 fiue
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 
                 year
                 ,
                 until
                 this
                 present
                 hour
                 ,
                 against
                 the
                 true
                 Professors
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Pope
                 indeed
                 hath
                 from
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Reformation
                 ,
                 which
                 hapned
                 by
                 Doctor
                 Luther
                 ,
                 alwaies
                 aimed
                 at
                 this
                 ,
                 how
                 hee
                 might
                 wholly
                 root
                 out
                 and
                 destroie
                 the
                 Professors
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 this
                 effect
                 ,
                 the
                 Counsel
                 of
                 Trent
                 was
                 called
                 in
                 a
                 special
                 manner
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 this
                 would
                 not
                 take
                 place
                 in
                 Germanie
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 Jesuitical
                 Sect
                 prevailed
                 ,
                 and
                 brought
                 things
                 to
                 that
                 pass
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 peaceable
                 and
                 meek
                 hearts
                 of
                 Potentates
                 have
                 given
                 too
                 too
                 much
                 credit
                 ,
                 and
                 yielded
                 to
                 their
                 flatterings
                 ,
                 calumnies
                 ,
                 and
                 deceits
                 .
                 Whereupon
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 eighth
                 begun
                 the
                 persecution
                 ,
                 against
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Protestants
                 in
                 
                   Styria
                   ,
                   Carniola
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Krain
                 :
                 and
                 what
                 success
                 it
                 had
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 thereupon
                 followed
                 in
                 other
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 Empire
                 ,
                 especially
                 in
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 Bohemia
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 hereditarie
                 Lands
                 of
                 the
                 
                 mightie
                 and
                 eminent
                 hous
                 of
                 Austria
                 ;
                 is
                 manifest
                 to
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 is
                 in
                 all
                 these
                 proceedings
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 here
                 described
                 ,
                 nothing
                 els
                 wanting
                 but
                 the
                 last
                 Act
                 ,
                 which
                 shall
                 yet
                 bee
                 put
                 in
                 execution
                 in
                 Silesia
                 .
                 When
                 this
                 Act
                 shall
                 bee
                 finished
                 ,
                 then
                 shall
                 this
                 war
                 ,
                 victorie
                 ,
                 and
                 execution
                 bee
                 at
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 and
                 therewith
                 shall
                 the
                 3
                 ½
                 years
                 begin
                 ,
                 at
                 which
                 time
                 the
                 dead
                 bodies
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 shall
                 lie
                 in
                 the
                 street
                 ,
                 whereof
                 the
                 text
                 speaks
                 .
              
               
                 
                   V.
                   9.
                
                 
                 And
                 som
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 and
                 kindreds
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 tongues
                 and
                 Nations
                 shall
                 see
                 their
                 dead
                 bodies
                 three
                 daies
                 and
                 a
                 half
                 .
              
               
                 Strange
                 people
                 ,
                 forreign
                 Nations
                 ,
                 and
                 people
                 of
                 strange
                 tongues
                 did
                 meet
                 in
                 this
                 Germane
                 war
                 for
                 Religion
                 .
                 And
                 at
                 Munster
                 and
                 Osnabruck
                 were
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 such
                 kinde
                 of
                 people
                 at
                 the
                 Treaties
                 of
                 Peace
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 is
                 said
                 :
                 Som
                 (
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 )
                 
                   shall
                   see
                   the
                   dead
                   bodies
                   of
                   the
                   two
                   Witnesses
                   .
                
                 When
                 the
                 Treatie
                 of
                 Peace
                 shall
                 bee
                 fully
                 executed
                 ,
                 then
                 shall
                 the
                 forreign
                 Nations
                 ,
                 
                 which
                 have
                 mainteined
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 caus
                 ,
                 cleerly
                 discover
                 what
                 they
                 have
                 neglected
                 in
                 that
                 Treatie
                 and
                 conclusion
                 of
                 Peace
                 ,
                 how
                 manie
                 dead
                 bodies
                 they
                 have
                 made
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 manie
                 they
                 have
                 in
                 the
                 hereditarie
                 Provinces
                 ,
                 shut
                 up
                 and
                 excluded
                 by
                 this
                 Pacification
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Exercise
                 of
                 Religion
                 ,
                 from
                 Libertie
                 of
                 Conscience
                 ,
                 from
                 their
                 Privileges
                 ,
                 &c.
                 and
                 how
                 they
                 have
                 wholly
                 cut
                 them
                 off
                 ,
                 and
                 deprived
                 them
                 of
                 all
                 hope
                 ,
                 which
                 before
                 this
                 Pacification
                 they
                 yet
                 had
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 by
                 their
                 victorious
                 arms
                 was
                 at
                 last
                 held
                 forth
                 unto
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 What
                 are
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Professors
                 in
                 the
                 hereditarie
                 Provinces
                 at
                 this
                 time
                 ,
                 els
                 then
                 dead
                 bodies
                 or
                 corps
                 ,
                 which
                 civilly
                 have
                 neither
                 breath
                 ,
                 nor
                 life
                 in
                 them
                 ;
                 nay
                 ,
                 how
                 manie
                 thousand
                 souls
                 shall
                 yet
                 bee
                 killed
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 execution
                 of
                 this
                 Pacification
                 ?
              
               
                 This
                 they
                 shall
                 see
                 three
                 daies
                 and
                 an
                 half
                 .
              
               
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 three
                 years
                 and
                 an
                 half
                 ,
                 from
                 
                 the
                 time
                 that
                 the
                 execution
                 of
                 the
                 Pacification
                 shall
                 bee
                 fully
                 accomplished
                 ,
                 the
                 last
                 Act
                 of
                 the
                 persecution
                 finished
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Ministers
                 expelled
                 ,
                 and
                 deposed
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 hereditarie
                 Principalities
                 of
                 Silesia
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 far
                 ,
                 namely
                 till
                 the
                 3
                 ½
                 years
                 before
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 appointed
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 should
                 this
                 last
                 persecution
                 reach
                 :
                 whereby
                 it
                 appeareth
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 none
                 other
                 intimated
                 in
                 this
                 text
                 ,
                 but
                 this
                 ,
                 whereof
                 mention
                 hath
                 been
                 made
                 in
                 Germanie
                 .
              
               
                 
                   But
                   they
                   shall
                   not
                   onely
                   see
                   the
                   dead
                   bodies
                   of
                   the
                   two
                   Witnesses
                   ,
                   but
                   they
                   shall
                   also
                   have
                   som
                   consideration
                   over
                   them
                   .
                
                 Which
                 the
                 word
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 doth
                 import
                 ,
                 which
                 as
                 Budeus
                 doth
                 prove
                 out
                 of
                 Aristotle
                 ,
                 doth
                 signifie
                 
                   rationem
                   habere
                
                 ,
                 to
                 look
                 to
                 a
                 thing
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 have
                 som
                 care
                 for
                 it
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 doth
                 appear
                 by
                 the
                 text
                 following
                 :
              
               
                 And
                 shall
                 not
                 suffer
                 their
                 dead
                 bodies
                 to
                 bee
                 put
                 in
                 graves
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 the
                 question
                 is
                 ,
                 whether
                 these
                 
                 words
                 are
                 to
                 bee
                 understood
                 of
                 the
                 friends
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Professors
                 of
                 the
                 true
                 Religion
                 ?
                 Commonly
                 these
                 words
                 use
                 to
                 bee
                 referred
                 to
                 the
                 enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Professors
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 expounded
                 ;
                 That
                 in
                 this
                 last
                 persecution
                 there
                 shall
                 bee
                 such
                 crueltie
                 used
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 dead
                 bodies
                 shall
                 not
                 have
                 so
                 much
                 as
                 earth
                 given
                 them
                 to
                 bee
                 buried
                 in
                 .
                 But
                 wee
                 must
                 take
                 notice
                 ,
                 that
                 these
                 words
                 are
                 not
                 
                   propriè
                   ▪
                
                 and
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 meaning
                 of
                 the
                 Letter
                 to
                 bee
                 understood
                 .
                 For
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 eleventh
                 and
                 twelfth
                 verses
                 ,
                 there
                 quickning
                 and
                 rising
                 must
                 bee
                 taken
                 in
                 a
                 civil
                 sens
                 ,
                 so
                 likewise
                 their
                 killing
                 a
                 lying
                 in
                 the
                 street
                 must
                 bee
                 civilly
                 understood
                 .
                 Moreover
                 the
                 tenth
                 vers
                 following
                 doth
                 describe
                 also
                 the
                 enemies
                 by
                 the
                 name
                 
                   of
                   them
                   that
                   dwell
                   upon
                   the
                   earth
                   :
                
                 wherefore
                 wee
                 do
                 infer
                 ,
                 That
                 the
                 forreign
                 Nations
                 will
                 not
                 wholly
                 laie
                 down
                 the
                 sword
                 ,
                 but
                 will
                 have
                 at
                 all
                 times
                 a
                 watchful
                 eye
                 upon
                 the
                 designs
                 of
                 Papists
                 in
                 Germanie
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 will
                 not
                 give
                 waie
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Protestants
                 shall
                 bee
                 totally
                 destroied
                 ,
                 and
                 buried
                 under
                 ground
                 .
              
               
                 Vide
                 Josephum
                 Medum
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   M.
                   Gottlicb
                   .
                   Heyland
                
                 super
                 hunc
                 locum
                 .
                 philipp
                 .
                 Nicolai
                 de
                 R.
                 Christi
                 .
                 p.
                 6.
                 4.
                 
                 
                   Read
                   also
                
                 Wisd
                 .
                 chap.
                 3.
                 vers
                 1.
                 9.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   10.
                
                 
                 And
                 they
                 that
                 dwell
                 upon
                 the
                 earth
                 .
                 
                   That
                   is
                
                 ,
              
               
                 The
                 Papists
                 in
                 general
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 their
                 heaven
                 here
                 upon
                 earth
                 .
              
               
                 Finckius-Can
                 .
                 Theol.
                 Cent.
                 11.
                 can
                 .
                 90.
                 
                 In
                 scriptura
                 S.
                 peccatores
                 appellantur
                 habitatores
                 Terrae
                 ,
                 non
                 autem
                 justi
                 .
                 Hi
                 enim
                 passim
                 appellantur
                 Advenae
                 ,
                 peregrini
                 ,
                 incolae
                 .
                 Ex
                 Hieron
                 .
                 Epist
                 .
                 129.
                 ad
                 Dardanum
                 .
              
               
                 Shall
                 rejoice
                 over
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 merrie
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 send
                 gifts
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 words
                 are
                 taken
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 book
                 of
                 
                   Esther
                   ,
                   chap.
                   9.
                   vers
                   19.
                   22.
                
                 and
                 they
                 have
                 their
                 peculiar
                 sens
                 ,
                 the
                 effect
                 whereof
                 is
                 found
                 in
                 that
                 which
                 doth
                 actually
                 appear
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Because
                   these
                   two
                   Prophets
                   tormented
                   them
                   
                   that
                   dwelt
                   on
                   the
                   earth
                
                 vers
                 5.
                 is
                 said
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 hurt
                 unjustly
                 ;
                 here
                 is
                 attributed
                 unto
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 torment
                 their
                 enemies
                 ,
                 by
                 sifting
                 and
                 searching
                 out
                 their
                 Doctrine
                 and
                 conversation
                 ,
                 by
                 examining
                 and
                 trying
                 all
                 things
                 in
                 them
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Divine
                 Scriptures
                 ,
                 by
                 contradicting
                 their
                 fals
                 Doctrine
                 ,
                 and
                 abominable
                 Idolatrie
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 laying
                 their
                 shameful
                 ,
                 abominable
                 ,
                 Sodomitical
                 life
                 before
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 Thus
                 did
                 Eliah
                 and
                 Micah
                 torment
                 the
                 King
                 
                   Ahab
                   .
                   1
                   King.
                   18.
                
                 v.
                 17
                 ,
                 18.
                 
                 Jeremiah
                 ,
                 the
                 Priests
                 and
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 
                   Jeremiah
                   27.
                
                 vers
                 11.
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Amos
                 the
                 people
                 of
                 
                   Israel
                   ,
                   Amos
                   7.
                
                 vers
                 10.
                 
                 The
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 the
                 Devils
                 .
                 
                   Mattthew
                   8.
                
                 vers
                 29.
                 
                 Which
                 must
                 now
                 bee
                 called
                 ,
                 to
                 do
                 injurie
                 ,
                 to
                 rais
                 sedition
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 oppose
                 the
                 Magistrates
                 ;
                 The
                 fault
                 is
                 in
                 thine
                 own
                 people
                 said
                 the
                 Officers
                 of
                 the
                 Children
                 of
                 
                   Israël
                   ,
                   Exodus
                   5.
                
                 vers
                 16.
                 
                 For
                 this
                 is
                 found
                 most
                 true
                 :
                 
                   Mali
                   cùm
                   injuriam
                   facere
                   non
                   
                   sinuntur
                   injuriam
                   se
                   accipere
                   existimant
                   .
                   As
                
                 Grotius
                 
                   in
                   his
                   Annotation
                   upon
                   Mat.
                   chap
                   ,
                   8.
                   ver
                   .
                   29.
                   writeth
                   .
                
              
               
                 Hitherto
                 hath
                 John
                 written
                 what
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 hath
                 declared
                 unto
                 him
                 by
                 word
                 of
                 mouth
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Hereupon
                   followeth
                   a
                   sudden
                   change
                   in
                   the
                   vision
                   ,
                
                 and
                 thereby
                 is
                 represented
                 a
                 sudden
                 change
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 .
                 In
                 respect
                 that
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 doth
                 end
                 his
                 Prophecie
                 and
                 speech
                 ;
                 and
                 John
                 tronsported
                 in
                 a
                 vision
                 ,
                 seeth
                 before
                 his
                 eies
                 ,
                 what
                 after
                 the
                 issue
                 of
                 of
                 3
                 ½
                 years
                 befel
                 to
                 the
                 Witnesses
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 terrible
                 ,
                 unexspected
                 events
                 ,
                 and
                 alterations
                 suddenly
                 and
                 unawares
                 com
                 to
                 pass
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 beginneth
                 now
                 the
                 third
                 Period
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 of
                 our
                 Lord.
                 
              
               
                 Where
                 the
                 enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 are
                 quelled
                 ,
                 and
                 therewith
                 doth
                 break
                 forth
                 the
                 true
                 peace
                 and
                 tranquillitie
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   11.
                
                 
                 And
                 after
                 three
                 daies
                 and
                 an
                 half
                 the
                 Spirit
                 of
                 life
                 from
                 God
                 entred
                 into
                 them
                 ,
                 &c
                 ,
              
               
               
                 When
                 these
                 3
                 ½
                 daies
                 ,
                 or
                 years
                 com
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ;
                 then
                 also
                 together
                 therewith
                 do
                 exspire
                 the
                 
                   fortie
                   two
                   moneths
                   of
                   treading
                   the
                   holie
                   Citie
                   under
                   foot
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 11.
                 vers
                 .
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 daies
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 clothed
                 with
                 sackcloth
                 ,
                 
                   vers
                   3.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 daies
                 of
                 the
                 Woman
                 in
                 the
                 wilderness
                 ,
                 
                   chap.
                   12.
                   vers
                   6.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 fortie
                 two
                 moneths
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 his
                 blasphemies
                 ,
                 
                   chap.
                   13.
                   vers
                   5.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 Image
                 
                   of
                   King
                
                 Nebuchadnezzar
                 .
                 Dan.
                 
                   chap.
                   2.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 determined
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 four
                 Monarchies
                 .
                 Dan.
                 
                   chapter
                   17.
                   vers
                   12.
                   25.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 daies
                 of
                 
                   Dan.
                   chap.
                   12.
                   vers
                   11.
                   &c.
                   
                
              
               
                 The
                 spirit
                 of
                 life
                 from
                 God
                 entered
                 into
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 chapter
                 37.
                 vers
                 14.
                 of
                 Ezekiel
                 ,
                 God
                 in
                 the
                 behalf
                 of
                 the
                 Jews
                 in
                 the
                 Captivitie
                 of
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 doth
                 use
                 such
                 
                 an
                 expression
                 ,
                 saying
                 :
                 
                   I
                   will
                   put
                   my
                   spirit
                   in
                   you
                   ,
                   and
                   yee
                   shall
                   live
                   ,
                   and
                   I
                   shall
                   place
                   you
                   in
                   your
                   own
                   Land
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
               
                 The
                 same
                 will
                 befal
                 to
                 the
                 exiled
                 ,
                 and
                 oppressed
                 Evangelical
                 Professors
                 ,
                 God
                 will
                 send
                 them
                 an
                 unexspected
                 help
                 by
                 such
                 means
                 ,
                 which
                 never
                 entred
                 into
                 anie
                 man's
                 thoughts
                 .
                 God
                 will
                 revive
                 them
                 again
                 ,
                 bring
                 them
                 into
                 their
                 own
                 Land
                 ,
                 re-establish
                 them
                 in
                 their
                 dignities
                 ,
                 and
                 publick
                 functions
                 ,
                 and
                 give
                 them
                 greater
                 and
                 higher
                 Privileges
                 ,
                 and
                 Liberties
                 ,
                 then
                 they
                 ever
                 had
                 before
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 they
                 stood
                 upon
                 their
                 feet
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Exiled
                 Evangelical
                 Professors
                 do
                 appear
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 take
                 possession
                 of
                 their
                 Land
                 and
                 places
                 .
                 The
                 oppressed
                 also
                 com
                 forth
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 delivered
                 from
                 their
                 heavie
                 yoak
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 great
                 fear
                 fell
                 upon
                 them
                 ,
                 which
                 saw
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 As
                 now
                 there
                 is
                 great
                 joie
                 and
                 exsultation
                 ,
                 amongst
                 the
                 Papists
                 ,
                 about
                 the
                 issue
                 of
                 this
                 war
                 :
                 so
                 there
                 will
                 bee
                 
                 great
                 terror
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 shall
                 see
                 the
                 Exiled
                 return
                 into
                 the
                 hereditarie
                 Provinces
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Oppressed
                 take
                 possession
                 of
                 their
                 former
                 dignities
                 ,
                 and
                 honorable
                 functions
                 .
                 Then
                 will
                 bee
                 a
                 livelie
                 example
                 set
                 before
                 us
                 ,
                 of
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 written
                 in
                 the
                 book
                 of
                 Wisdom
                 ,
                 chap.
                 5.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   12.
                
                 
                 And
                 they
                 heard
                 a
                 great
                 voice
                 from
                 Heaven
                 saying
                 unto
                 them
                 :
                 Com
                 up
                 hither
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 Heaven
                 the
                 Church
                 is
                 understood
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 
                   great
                   voice
                
                 is
                 signified
                 ,
                 that
                 after
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 three
                 years
                 and
                 an
                 half
                 ,
                 a
                 great
                 and
                 chief
                 Instrument
                 ,
                 an
                 high
                 Potentate
                 amongst
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Professors
                 ,
                 shall
                 rise
                 and
                 bee
                 exalted
                 ,
                 who
                 to
                 the
                 great
                 fear
                 ,
                 and
                 terror
                 of
                 Papists
                 ,
                 shall
                 open
                 again
                 a
                 free
                 cours
                 to
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Call
                   with
                   a
                   great
                   voice
                
                 upon
                 the
                 exiled
                 and
                 oppressed
                 ;
                 re-establish
                 them
                 into
                 their
                 publick
                 imployments
                 ,
                 and
                 possessions
                 ,
                 and
                 saie
                 unto
                 them
                 :
                 
                   Com
                   up
                   hither
                
                 .
              
               
               
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 Divine
                 Diploma
                 ,
                 or
                 Letters
                 Patents
                 ,
                 the
                 vocation
                 ,
                 or
                 calling
                 which
                 is
                 published
                 by
                 that
                 High
                 Potentate
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 exiled
                 do
                 obeie
                 ;
                 
                   They
                   ascend
                   up
                   to
                   Heaven
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 they
                 enter
                 into
                 their
                 charges
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 perform
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 committed
                 to
                 their
                 trust
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   a
                   Cloud
                
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 with
                 great
                 autoritie
                 ,
                 respect
                 ,
                 power
                 and
                 glorie
                 .
                 
                   Isa
                   .
                   14.
                
                 vers
                 13.
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 
                   And
                   their
                   enemies
                   beheld
                   them
                
                 :
                 namely
                 ,
                 those
                 that
                 formerly
                 did
                 rejoice
                 at
                 their
                 afflictions
                 and
                 miseries
                 .
              
               
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ,
                 doth
                 signifie
                 
                   contemplari
                   ,
                   ludos
                   spectare
                   vel
                   celebrare
                   ,
                   to
                   see
                   a
                   Comedie
                   ,
                   or
                   plaie
                   .
                
                 The
                 Papists
                 had
                 hitherto
                 acted
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 a
                 Comedie
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 Euangelical
                 Professors
                 ,
                 and
                 tormented
                 them
                 with
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 plagues
                 ;
                 Now
                 they
                 see
                 the
                 event
                 and
                 issue
                 thereof
                 ,
                 wherin
                 doth
                 befal
                 unto
                 them
                 ,
                 what
                 is
                 threatned
                 ,
                 
                   Jer.
                   50.
                
                 vers
                 10
                 ,
                 11
                 ,
                 12
                 ,
                 13.
                 
              
               
               
                 
                   Vers
                   13.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 same
                 hour
                 was
                 there
                 a
                 great
                 Earth-quake
                 .
              
               
                 All
                 the
                 Peace
                 which
                 the
                 Papists
                 do
                 imagine
                 to
                 themselvs
                 ,
                 is
                 now
                 at
                 an
                 end
                 .
                 For
                 immediately
                 the
                 reformation
                 of
                 this
                 Evangelical
                 Potentate
                 causeth
                 an
                 exceeding
                 great
                 insurrection
                 ,
                 and
                 combustion
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   the
                   tenth
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Citie
                   fell
                   .
                
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 Citie
                 is
                 here
                 meant
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 Either
                 
                   the
                   whole
                   Papacie
                
                 ,
                 and
                 thus
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 ten
                 streets
                 hath
                 its
                 fall
                 .
                 Namely
                 ,
                 the
                 Germane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 street
                 where
                 the
                 dead
                 bodies
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 had
                 lien
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 now
                 standing
                 again
                 upon
                 their
                 feet
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Or
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                   Rome
                   it self
                   ,
                
                 which
                 in
                 regard
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 when
                 shee
                 was
                 in
                 her
                 florishing
                 condition
                 ,
                 is
                 counted
                 this
                 daie
                 but
                 the
                 tenth
                 part
                 .
                 As
                 the
                 same
                 is
                 proved
                 by
                 
                   Lipsius
                   lib.
                   3.
                   admirand
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   there
                   were
                   slain
                
                 .
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 cut
                 off
                 and
                 destroid
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                   Earthquake
                
                 .
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 in
                 this
                 war.
                 
              
               
               
                 
                   Seven
                   thousand
                
                 .
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 a
                 great
                 number
                 ,
                 or
                 multitude
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Of
                   men
                
                 .
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 high
                 and
                 great
                 persons
                 ,
                 chief
                 heads
                 and
                 noble
                 families
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 the
                 remnant
                 were
                 affrighted
                 ,
                 and
                 gave
                 glorie
                 to
                 the
                 God
                 of
                 Heaven
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Papists
                 stand
                 amazed
                 ,
                 and
                 do
                 acknowledg
                 the
                 just
                 judgments
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 which
                 hee
                 poured
                 out
                 over
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   14.
                
                 
                 The
                 second
                 wo
                 is
                 past
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 words
                 do
                 not
                 import
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 things
                 ,
                 which
                 have
                 been
                 set
                 down
                 in
                 the
                 aforegoing
                 words
                 ;
                 the
                 second
                 wo
                 is
                 brought
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 :
                 but
                 the
                 overthrow
                 of
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 is
                 thereby
                 especially
                 intimated
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Revelations
                   8.
                   vers
                   13.
                   
                   St
                
                 John
                 beheld
                 and
                 heard
                 an
                 Angel
                 flying
                 thorough
                 the
                 midst
                 of
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 saying
                 with
                 a
                 loud
                 voice
                 :
                 Wo
                 ,
                 wo
                 ,
                 wo
                 to
                 the
                 inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 voices
                 of
                 the
                 Trumpet
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 Angels
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 yet
                 to
                 sound
                 .
              
               
               
                 The
                 first
                 Wo
                 hapned
                 by
                 the
                 Saracens
                 ,
                 and
                 Arabians
                 ;
                 
                   whereof
                   in
                
                 Revel
                 .
                 9.
                 
                   vers
                   first
                   till
                   the
                   twelfth
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   second
                   Wo
                   hapned
                   by
                   the
                   Turks
                   .
                
                 Revelations
                 9
                 vers
                 13.
                 till
                 the
                 19.
                 
              
               
                 Hereunto
                 do
                 agree
                 almost
                 all
                 the
                 Expositors
                 ,
                 and
                 refer
                 this
                 second
                 Wo
                 unanimously
                 to
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 do
                 infer
                 from
                 thence
                 :
                 becaus
                 it
                 is
                 said
                 here
                 ,
                 the
                 second
                 Wo
                 is
                 past
                 ,
                 that
                 immediately
                 after
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 these
                 Revolutions
                 in
                 the
                 
                   Germane
                   Empire
                   ,
                   the
                   Turkish
                   Empire
                   shall
                   have
                   it's
                   fall
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   14.
                
                 
                 Behold
                 the
                 third
                 Wo
                 cometh
                 quickly
                 .
              
               
                 All
                 the
                 three
                 Woes
                 are
                 poured
                 
                   over
                   the
                   Popish
                   Romane
                   Empire
                
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 
                   the
                   third
                   Wo
                
                 is
                 the
                 last
                 ,
                 and
                 beginneth
                 at
                 the
                 sound
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Trumpet
                 .
                 Wherefore
                 ,
                 these
                 words
                 do
                 immediately
                 follow
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   15.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 seventh
                 Angel
                 sounded
                 .
              
               
                 Wherewith
                 beginneth
                 the
                 seventh
                 
                 and
                 last
                 plague
                 poured
                 out
                 over
                 Babel
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 withal
                 is
                 briefly
                 described
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   The
                   great
                   joie
                
                 ,
                 which
                 ariseth
                 in
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Becaus
                   they
                   have
                   gotten
                   an
                   Evangelical
                   head
                   .
                   Vers
                   11.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   Becaus
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                   Rome
                   is
                   destroied
                   ,
                   and
                   Germanie
                   is
                   fallen
                   away
                   from
                   the
                   Papal
                   State.
                   vers
                   13.
                   
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   Becaus
                   the
                   Turkish
                   Empire
                   is
                   com
                   to
                   an
                   end
                   .
                   Vers
                   14.
                   
                
                 
                   4.
                   
                   Becaus
                   the
                   Son
                   of
                   God
                   hath
                   taken
                   possession
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdoms
                   of
                   this
                   world
                   ,
                   and
                   useth
                   his
                   great
                   power
                   ,
                   and
                   reigneth
                   .
                   vers
                   15
                   ,
                   16
                   ,
                   17.
                   
                
              
               
                 This
                 joie
                 is
                 also
                 described
                 in
                 the
                 19.
                 chapter
                 ,
                 vers
                 17.
                 
              
               
                 And
                 upon
                 this
                 joie
                 did
                 David
                 in
                 the
                 spirit
                 reflect
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                
                 93.
                 
                 Psal
                 .
                 The
                 Lord
                 reigneth
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 cloathed
                 with
                 Majestie
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                
                 97.
                 
                 Psal
                 .
                 The
                 Lord
                 reigneth
                 ,
                 let
                 the
                 earth
                 rejoice
                 .
              
               
               
                 
                   And
                   in
                   the
                
                 99.
                 
                 Psal
                 .
                 The
                 Lord
                 reigneth
                 ,
                 bee
                 the
                 people
                 never
                 so
                 impatient
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   The
                   wrath
                   of
                   the
                   Heathen
                
                 :
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 furie
                 and
                 rage
                 of
                 the
                 Papists
                 ;
                 against
                 these
                 the
                 Lord
                 riseth
                 ,
                 becaus
                 
                   the
                   daie
                   of
                   his
                   wrath
                   is
                   com
                
                 ;
                 utterly
                 cutting
                 them
                 off
                 ,
                 and
                 destroying
                 them
                 ,
                 vers
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 This
                 Act
                 is
                 with
                 a
                 double
                 sign
                 confirmed
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Temple
                 of
                 God
                 is
                 opened
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 was
                 seen
                 in
                 his
                 Temple
                 ,
                 the
                 ark
                 of
                 his
                 Testament
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 There
                 were
                 lightnings
                 ,
                 and
                 voices
                 ,
                 and
                 thunderings
                 ,
                 and
                 an
                 Earth-quake
                 ,
                 and
                 great
                 hail
                 .
                 
                   vers
                   19.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 contents
                 of
                 these
                 words
                 are
                 described
                 more
                 at
                 large
                 in
                 the
                 ninteenth
                 and
                 twentieth
                 chapters
                 ;
                 where
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 him
                 the
                 
                   whole
                   Armies
                   which
                   were
                   in
                   heaven
                   do
                   appear
                   ,
                   sitting
                   upon
                   white
                   horses
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 19.
                 v.
                 11.
                 14.
                 
                 Where
                 also
                 
                   the
                   Beast
                   and
                   the
                   Kings
                   of
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                   and
                   their
                   Armies
                   are
                   gathered
                   together
                   to
                   make
                   war
                   ,
                
                 vers
                 19.
                 
                 And
                 are
                 
                 overcom
                 and
                 utterly
                 destroied
                 ,
                 vers
                 20
                 ,
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 dead
                 to
                 bee
                 judged
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 give
                 reward
                 unto
                 the
                 Prophets
                 and
                 Saints
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 This
                 also
                 is
                 rehersed
                 in
                 the
                 twentieth
                 chapter
                 ,
                 vers
                 4
                 ,
                 5
                 ,
                 6.
                 
                 But
                 becaus
                 it
                 is
                 there
                 (
                 ●ccording
                 to
                 the
                 common
                 opinion
                 ,
                 as
                 darkly
                 set
                 down
                 as
                 here
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 himself
                 speaking
                 of
                 this
                 time
                 in
                 the
                 tenth
                 chapter
                 doth
                 call
                 it
                 vers
                 7.
                 
                   the
                   Mysterie
                   of
                   God
                
                 ;
                 And
                 also
                 what
                 the
                 seven
                 thunders
                 have
                 spoken
                 of
                 this
                 Kingdom
                 ,
                 cannot
                 bee
                 written
                 ;
                 wee
                 will
                 herein
                 acquiesce
                 ,
                 and
                 proceed
                 herein
                 to
                 the
                 sixteenth
                 chapter
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 CHAP.
                 XVI
                 .
              
               
                 LIke
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 seven
                 Trumpeting
                 Angels
                 ,
                 seven
                 Judgments
                 are
                 described
                 ,
                 which
                 should
                 com
                 upon
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 in
                 the
                 
                 second
                 period
                 ;
                 So
                 also
                 here
                 in
                 the
                 third
                 part
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 seven
                 plagues
                 ,
                 which
                 by
                 the
                 seven
                 vials
                 should
                 bee
                 poured
                 out
                 over
                 the
                 same
                 .
              
               
                 Where
                 the
                 seventh
                 Judgment
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 seventh
                 Vial
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 do
                 concur
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   fill
                   up
                   the
                   wrath
                   of
                   God.
                
                 Revelations
                 chap.
                 11.
                 vers
                 18.
                 and
                 chap.
                 15.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 seven
                 judgments
                 com
                 upon
                 the
                 Political
                 State
                 ,
                 and
                 shew
                 forth
                 the
                 fall
                 thereof
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 seven
                 Vials
                 are
                 poured
                 out
                 ,
                 over
                 both
                 the
                 Political
                 and
                 Ecclesiastical
                 State
                 ,
                 and
                 describe
                 their
                 punishments
                 .
                 Those
                 begin
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 five
                 .
                 But
                 these
                 begin
                 under
                 the
                 sixth
                 Judgment
                 ,
                 a
                 little
                 before
                 the
                 total
                 ruine
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 
                   the
                   seven
                   plagues
                   proceed
                   from
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                
                 who
                 hath
                 a
                 cup
                 in
                 his
                 hand
                 ,
                 full
                 mixt
                 with
                 
                   red
                   wine
                
                 ,
                 who
                 hitherto
                 to
                 hath
                 poured
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 upon
                 his
                 little
                 flock
                 ;
                 But
                 now
                 the
                 ungodlie
                 
                 shall
                 drink
                 the
                 dregs
                 thereof
                 ,
                 and
                 suck
                 them
                 out
                 .
                 
                   Psal
                   .
                   75.
                
                 vers
                 9
                 ,
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 seven
                 Angels
                 having
                 the
                 seven
                 plagues
                 ,
                 com
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 Tabernacle
                 of
                 the
                 Testimonie
                 of
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 
                   Revelations
                   chap.
                   15.
                   vers
                   5
                   ,
                   6.
                   that
                   is
                   ,
                   from
                   the
                   seat
                   and
                   habitation
                   of
                   God.
                   
                
              
               
                 And
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 four
                 Beasts
                 
                   (
                   that
                   is
                   ,
                   the
                   first
                   Beast
                   ,
                   the
                   Lion
                   of
                   the
                   tribe
                   of
                
                 Judah
                 )
                 gave
                 unto
                 the
                 seven
                 Angels
                 ,
                 seven
                 golden
                 Vials
                 full
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God.
                 
                   vers
                   7.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Angels
                 receiv
                 commandement
                 from
                 God
                 ,
                 
                   to
                   pour
                   out
                   the
                   seven
                   Vials
                   of
                   the
                   wrath
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                
                 chapter
                 16.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Upon
                   the
                   Earth
                   ▪
                
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 who
                 rejoice
                 over
                 the
                 victorie
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 chapter
                 11.
                 vers
                 10.
                 
                 To
                 whom
                 the
                 Devil
                 is
                 com
                 down
                 .
                 Chapter
                 12.
                 vers
                 12.
                 
                 Nay
                 upon
                 the
                 whole
                 world
                 ,
                 which
                 wandred
                 after
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   worshipped
                   the
                   Dragon
                   with
                   the
                   Beast
                   ,
                
                 chapter
                 13.
                 v.
                 4.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 by
                 the
                 word
                 Earth
                 is
                 understood
                 the
                 whole
                 extent
                 ,
                 and
                 latitude
                 of
                 
                 the
                 Romane
                 Popish
                 Empire
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Angels
                 obeie
                 God's
                 Commandement
                 ,
                 and
                 pour
                 out
                 their
                 Vials
                 .
              
               
                 First
                 Upon
                 the
                 Earth
                 .
                 Secondly
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 Sea.
                 Thirdly
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 rivers
                 and
                 fountains
                 .
                 Fourthly
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 Sun.
                 Fifthly
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 seat
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 .
                 Sixthly
                 upon
                 Euphrates
                 .
                 Seventhly
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 Aër
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   1.
                
                 
                 The
                 first
                 Angel
                 went
                 ,
                 and
                 poured
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 Earth
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 fell
                 a
                 noisom
                 and
                 grievous
                 sore
                 upon
                 the
                 men
                 which
                 had
                 the
                 Mark
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 them
                 ,
                 which
                 worshipped
                 his
                 Image
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 Earth
                 here
                 is
                 understood
                 the
                 whole
                 extent
                 ,
                 and
                 latitude
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 vers
                 .
                 But
                 there
                 is
                 reflexion
                 made
                 upon
                 
                   Statum
                   tranquillum
                
                 ,
                 the
                 peaceable
                 condition
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 the
                 
                   Beast
                   coming
                   up
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Earth
                   ,
                
                 Revel
                 .
                 13.
                 vers
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 
                   This
                   Beast
                
                 is
                 the
                 Pope
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 Clergie
                 ,
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 State
                 and
                 Government
                 
                 in
                 the
                 Papacie
                 ,
                 which
                 did
                 not
                 break
                 out
                 by
                 wars
                 ,
                 or
                 outward
                 power
                 and
                 might
                 ,
                 like
                 unto
                 
                   the
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                
                 ,
                 but
                 crept
                 in
                 by
                 little
                 and
                 little
                 ,
                 softly
                 and
                 quietly
                 ,
                 even
                 as
                 the
                 grass
                 and
                 the
                 trees
                 use
                 to
                 grow
                 up
                 of
                 the
                 ground
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Upon
                   this
                   earthlie
                   Beast
                
                 was
                 the
                 first
                 Vial
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 time
                 of
                 Peace
                 ,
                 poured
                 out
                 by
                 the
                 Reformation
                 of
                 Poperie
                 .
                 Now
                 since
                 those
                 who
                 are
                 true
                 Professors
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 do
                 vehemently
                 oppose
                 ,
                 and
                 contradict
                 the
                 Papists
                 ,
                 and
                 reprove
                 them
                 for
                 their
                 shameful
                 conversation
                 ,
                 fals
                 doctrine
                 ,
                 and
                 abominable
                 Idolatrie
                 ;
                 thence
                 doth
                 arise
                 in
                 those
                 that
                 adhere
                 and
                 stand
                 firm
                 to
                 Poperie
              
               
                 
                   A
                   noisom
                   and
                   grievous
                   sore
                
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 a
                 fierce
                 anger
                 ,
                 hatred
                 ,
                 wrath
                 ,
                 and
                 enmitie
                 against
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Professors
                 ,
                 especially
                 ,
                 seeing
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 able
                 to
                 overcom
                 ,
                 and
                 destroie
                 them
                 by
                 force
                 and
                 might
                 ,
                 nor
                 to
                 perswade
                 and
                 seduce
                 them
                 to
                 Poperie
                 again
                 ,
                 by
                 fair
                 and
                 sweet
                 words
                 .
              
               
               
                 
                   Vers
                   3.
                
                 
                 The
                 second
                 Angel
                 poured
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 became
                 as
                 the
                 blood
                 of
                 a
                 dead
                 man
                 ,
                 and
                 everie
                 living
                 soul
                 died
                 in
                 the
                 Sea.
                 
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 the
                 Beast
                 with
                 ten
                 horns
                 is
                 here
                 pointed
                 at
                 ,
                 which
                 riseth
                 up
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 chapter
                 13.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
                 And
                 upon
                 
                   Statum
                   in
                   Imperio
                   Romano
                   turbatum
                
                 .
                 Whereby
                 is
                 signified
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 second
                 Vial
                 shall
                 beee
                 poured
                 out
                 ,
                 over
                 the
                 Political
                 State
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Government
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   formae
                   rerum
                   publicarum
                   tam
                   in
                   universali
                   quàm
                   particulari
                   ,
                
                 shall
                 bee
                 disturbed
                 ,
                 and
                 overthrown
                 .
                 How
                 by
                 these
                 wars
                 in
                 Germanie
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God
                 hath
                 been
                 poured
                 out
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 this
                 hath
                 been
                 accomplished
                 ,
                 is
                 sufficiently
                 known
                 to
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 and
                 everie
                 rational
                 man
                 can
                 make
                 the
                 application
                 .
                 The
                 
                   Statûs
                   Ratio
                
                 ,
                 or
                 reason
                 of
                 State
                 which
                 hath
                 been
                 set
                 up
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 shameful
                 abuse
                 of
                 it
                 hath
                 no
                 small
                 share
                 therein
                 ,
                 whereof
                 a
                 State's-man
                 writeth
                 thus
                 :
                 
                   Justitia
                   cùm
                   esse
                   desiit
                   in
                   mundo
                   ,
                   successit
                   Statûs
                   
                   ratio
                   calamitatum
                   mare
                   .
                
              
               
                 The
                 blood
                 of
                 a
                 dead
                 man
                 intimateth
                 the
                 horrible
                 effusions
                 of
                 blood
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 everie
                 living
                 soul
                 died
                 in
                 the
                 Sea
                 ,
                 is
                 evident
                 in
                 the
                 eies
                 of
                 all
                 men
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Everie
                   living
                   soul
                
                 :
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 
                   all
                   sorts
                   of
                   Nations
                
                 ,
                 people
                 ,
                 and
                 tongues
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 this
                 raging
                 Sea
                 ,
                 and
                 floods
                 of
                 water
                 ,
                 during
                 this
                 war
                 were
                 ingaged
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 people
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 Provinces
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 emptied
                 of
                 men
                 and
                 cattel
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 signification
                 the
                 word
                 all
                 is
                 used
                 ,
                 
                   Exodus
                   9.
                
                 vers
                 6.
                 where
                 it
                 is
                 rendred
                 all
                 the
                 Cattel
                 of
                 the
                 Egyptians
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   4.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 third
                 Angel
                 poured
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 rivers
                 and
                 fountains
                 of
                 water
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 became
                 blood
                 .
              
               
                 Frequens
                 est
                 sacris
                 Literis
                 per
                 flumina
                 significare
                 Imperia
                 ,
                 quod
                 &
                 Graeci
                 Latiníque
                 faciunt
                 .
                 Hugo
                 Grotius
                 ,
                 in
                 Annotatis
                 ,
                 ad
                 V.
                 Testam
                 .
                 Esaiae
                 .
                 c.
                 11.
                 v.
                 15.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 is
                 elswhere
                 compared
                 
                   to
                   a
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                   ,
                   to
                   
                   a
                   Citie
                
                 with
                 its
                 streets
                 :
                 So
                 likewise
                 here
                 
                   to
                   a
                   Sea
                
                 with
                 it's
                 rivers
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   rivers
                
                 are
                 the
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 which
                 although
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 at
                 this
                 present
                 members
                 of
                 the
                 Political
                 State
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 yet
                 they
                 have
                 their
                 tie
                 and
                 dependance
                 upon
                 the
                 Popish
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 :
                 as
                 
                   Spain
                   ,
                   France
                   ,
                   England
                   ,
                   Poland
                   ,
                   Hungarie
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 For
                 
                   the
                   greatest
                   Whore
                   sit's
                   upon
                   manie
                   waters
                   ,
                
                 Revel
                 chap.
                 17.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
                   aud
                   reigneth
                   over
                   the
                   Kings
                   of
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                
                 vers
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 
                   The
                   fountains
                   of
                   water
                
                 are
                 the
                 Kings
                 ,
                 their
                 Roial
                 Council
                 is
                 Parlaments
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 great
                 and
                 prime
                 Lords
                 in
                 those
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 who
                 are
                 interessed
                 in
                 the
                 Government
                 :
                 How
                 this
                 Vial
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God
                 hath
                 been
                 poured
                 out
                 over
                 great
                 Brittanie
                 and
                 the
                 well
                 thereof
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 the
                 river
                 and
                 the
                 head-Spring
                 there
                 became
                 blood
                 ,
                 and
                 doth
                 yet
                 sprout
                 out
                 ,
                 is
                 alas
                 evident
                 to
                 all
                 the
                 world
                 .
                 And
                 although
                 those
                 who
                 are
                 the
                 Fax
                 and
                 
                   Clamor
                   sive
                   Tub●
                
                 in
                 these
                 proceedings
                 ,
                 wee
                 know
                 not
                 
                 how
                 to
                 excuse
                 ;
                 yet
                 wee
                 must
                 by
                 virtue
                 of
                 this
                 cleer
                 text
                 ,
                 saie
                 with
                 the
                 Angel
                 :
                 
                   Lord
                   thou
                   art
                   righteous
                
                 ,
                 becaus
                 thou
                 hast
                 judged
                 thus
                 .
                 How
                 France
                 doth
                 feel
                 the
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God
                 out
                 of
                 this
                 third
                 Vial
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 much
                 more
                 it
                 will
                 bee
                 sensible
                 of
                 it
                 in
                 time
                 to
                 com
                 ,
                 time
                 will
                 discover
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 caus
                 which
                 the
                 Angel
                 maketh
                 mention
                 of
                 here
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 sixth
                 vers
                 ,
                 saying
                 :
                 
                   For
                   they
                   have
                   shed
                   the
                   blood
                   of
                   the
                   Saints
                   and
                   Prophets
                   ,
                   and
                   thou
                   hast
                   given
                   them
                   blood
                   to
                   drink
                   ,
                
                 for
                 they
                 are
                 worthie
                 ;
                 concerneth
                 France
                 more
                 particularly
                 ,
                 becaus
                 there
                 was
                 so
                 much
                 innocent
                 Christian
                 blood
                 shed
                 therein
                 ,
                 in
                 these
                 hundred
                 years
                 last
                 past
                 .
              
               
                 How
                 the
                 other
                 Kingdoms
                 in
                 this
                 Classis
                 shall
                 fare
                 ,
                 time
                 will
                 shew
                 ;
                 chiefly
                 that
                 whose
                 head-spring
                 did
                 flow
                 out
                 the
                 eighth
                 of
                 
                   April
                   ,
                   Anno
                
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 five
                 .
                 The
                 Ecclips
                 of
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 which
                 on
                 the
                 seventh
                 of
                 April
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 two
                 ,
                 
                 will
                 darken
                 the
                 
                   locum
                   Hylegialem
                
                 thereof
                 whereupon
                 ,
                 within
                 a
                 short
                 time
                 it
                 may
                 stop
                 happily
                 the
                 flowing
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 ,
                 and
                 change
                 it's
                 river
                 into
                 blood
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   7.
                
                 
                 And
                 I
                 heard
                 another
                 Angel
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 altar
                 saie
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 A
                 voice
                 is
                 heard
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Thysiasterion
                 ,
                 or
                 place
                 of
                 Sacrifices
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 souls
                 of
                 them
                 that
                 were
                 slain
                 did
                 lie
                 ,
                 whereof
                 wee
                 may
                 read
                 in
                 the
                 sixth
                 chapter
                 ,
                 vers
                 9
                 ,
                 10.
                 that
                 they
                 crie
                 to
                 the
                 Lord
                 for
                 vengeance
                 .
                 The
                 sens
                 and
                 meaning
                 of
                 which
                 words
                 is
                 this
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Martyrs
                 prais
                 God
                 for
                 the
                 hearing
                 of
                 their
                 praiers
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 execution
                 of
                 vengeance
                 ,
                 applauding
                 the
                 Angel
                 saying
                 :
                 
                   Even
                   so
                   ,
                   Lord
                   God
                   Almightie
                   ,
                   true
                   and
                   righteous
                   are
                   thy
                   Judgments
                   .
                
              
               
                 Hence
                 also
                 may
                 bee
                 concluded
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 vengeance
                 shall
                 then
                 begin
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 last
                 war
                 against
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 shall
                 bee
                 finished
                 ,
                 whereof
                 hath
                 been
                 spoken
                 in
                 the
                 11.
                 chap.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   8.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 fourth
                 Angel
                 poured
                 
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 Sun
                 all
                 the
                 Expositors
                 commonly
                 understand
                 the
                 
                   Sun
                   of
                   righteousness
                
                 .
                 Mal.
                 4.
                 vers
                 2.
                 
                 Jesus
                 Christ
                 ,
                 wherewith
                 
                   the
                   Woman
                   is
                   clothed
                
                 ,
                 Revel
                 .
                 chap.
                 12.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 repugnant
                 to
                 the
                 scope
                 and
                 intention
                 of
                 these
                 plagues
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 poured
                 all
                 over
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 upon
                 the
                 
                   Systema
                   mundi
                   Papistici
                
                 ,
                 over
                 the
                 Popish
                 world
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 opposed
                 to
                 the
                 Church-Heaven
                 of
                 the
                 faithful
                 Children
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 wherein
                 the
                 Lord
                 Jesus
                 is
                 the
                 Head.
                 Therefore
                 wee
                 must
                 seek
                 this
                 Sun
                 in
                 the
                 popish
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 and
                 search
                 ,
                 what
                 in
                 the
                 Revelation
                 of
                 John
                 is
                 represented
                 by
                 the
                 Sun
                 in
                 other
                 places
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Sun
                   became
                   black
                   ,
                   as
                   a
                   sackcloth
                   of
                   hair
                   ,
                
                 Revelations
                 6.
                 vers
                 12.
                 whereby
                 the
                 ruine
                 of
                 the
                 Imperial
                 dignitie
                 in
                 the
                 Heathenish
                 Church-heaven
                 ,
                 which
                 happened
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 Constantine
                 the
                 great
                 ,
                 is
                 intimated
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   third
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Sun
                   was
                   smitten
                   ,
                
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 prophesie
                 of
                 the
                 
                 fourth
                 Trumpet
                 .
                 Chapter
                 8.
                 vers
                 12.
                 
                 That
                 is
                 :
                 The
                 smal
                 remainder
                 of
                 the
                 greatness
                 ,
                 and
                 brightness
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 shall
                 wholly
                 bee
                 abolished
                 ,
                 and
                 pass
                 away
                 .
              
               
                 
                   An
                   Angel
                   did
                   stand
                   in
                   the
                   Sun.
                
                 Revelations
                 19.
                 vers
                 17.
                 
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 a
                 great
                 Potentate
                 ,
                 an
                 Evangelical
                 valiant
                 Prince
                 gathered
                 together
                 a
                 great
                 Armie
                 against
                 the
                 Papists
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Citie
                   hath
                   no
                   need
                   of
                   the
                   Sun
                   ,
                   neither
                   of
                   the
                   Moon
                   to
                   shine
                   in
                   it
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 21.
                 vers
                 23.
                 
                 That
                 is
                 :
                 hath
                 no
                 need
                 of
                 anie
                 Temporal
                 Potentate
                 to
                 govern
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 If
                 wee
                 compare
                 these
                 texts
                 with
                 the
                 Sun
                 ,
                 upon
                 which
                 the
                 Angel
                 poureth
                 out
                 the
                 fourth
                 Vial
                 ;
                 wee
                 finde
                 that
                 thereby
                 a
                 great
                 and
                 high
                 head
                 of
                 the
                 State
                 is
                 signified
                 ,
                 who
                 in
                 
                   Systemate
                   Mundi
                   Papistici
                
                 doth
                 uphold
                 all
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 his
                 splendor
                 and
                 government
                 giveth
                 strength
                 unto
                 all
                 ;
                 like
                 as
                 the
                 Sun
                 
                   Systemate
                   Mundi
                   Physico
                
                 by
                 it's
                 light
                 and
                 motion
                 ,
                 doth
                 guide
                 and
                 move
                 the
                 forces
                 of
                 nature
                 .
              
               
               
                 And
                 power
                 was
                 given
                 unto
                 him
                 to
                 scorch
                 men
                 with
                 fire
                 ;
                 And
                 men
                 were
                 scorched
                 with
                 great
                 heat
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 When
                 the
                 Head
                 ,
                 which
                 hath
                 been
                 a
                 mightie
                 support
                 hitherto
                 to
                 the
                 Papal
                 State
                 ,
                 shall
                 lie
                 down
                 and
                 rest
                 ;
                 then
                 the
                 fire
                 of
                 God's
                 wrath
                 will
                 extremely
                 scorch
                 the
                 Papists
                 .
                 
                   The
                   Lord
                   will
                   make
                   them
                   like
                   a
                   fierie
                   oven
                   ,
                
                 Psal
                 .
                 21.
                 vers
                 9.
                 
                 But
                 for
                 all
                 this
                 they
                 will
                 not
                 amend
                 ,
                 nor
                 repent
                 ,
                 and
                 give
                 God
                 the
                 glorie
                 ,
                 but
                 rather
                 continue
                 in
                 blaspheming
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 grow
                 more
                 and
                 more
                 obstinate
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   10.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 fifth
                 Angel
                 poured
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 seat
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 Kingdom
                 was
                 full
                 of
                 darkness
                 .
              
               
                 Assoon
                 as
                 
                   the
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                   was
                   risen
                   up
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Sea
                   ,
                
                 Revelations
                 13.
                 vers
                 1.
                 the
                 Dragon
                 immediately
                 gave
                 him
                 his
                 power
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 seat
                 ,
                 and
                 Citie
                 of
                 residence
                 ,
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 .
              
               
                 Which
                 the
                 Beast
                 hath
                 possessed
                 hitherto
                 ,
                 without
                 beeing
                 disturbed
                 from
                 thence
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   reigned
                   over
                   the
                   Kings
                   of
                   
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                
                 chapter
                 17.
                 vers
                 18.
                 
                 Now
                 the
                 Angel
                 poureth
                 out
                 the
                 fifth
                 Vial
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God
                 
                   upon
                   this
                   seat
                   ,
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                   Rome
                   ,
                
                 as
                 mention
                 hath
                 been
                 made
                 hereof
                 above
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 11th
                 .
                 chap.
                 vers
                 13.
                 that
                 after
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 were
                 ascended
                 up
                 ,
                 
                   there
                   was
                   a
                   great
                   Earth-quake
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   tenth
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Citie
                   fell
                   ,
                   and
                   was
                   destroied
                   .
                
              
               
                 And
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 was
                 full
                 of
                 darkness
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 distruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 shall
                 the
                 Government
                 and
                 power
                 of
                 the
                 Pope
                 ,
                 which
                 hitherto
                 hee
                 hath
                 used
                 ,
                 bee
                 made
                 extremely
                 void
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 his
                 dispatches
                 ,
                 or
                 commissions
                 suspended
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 Papacie
                 shall
                 not
                 yet
                 by
                 this
                 means
                 bee
                 utterly
                 dissolved
                 ,
                 and
                 taken
                 away
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 doth
                 follow
                 afterwards
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Vial
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 war
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 place
                 called
                 in
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 tongue
                 Armageddon
                 .
                 vers
                 16.
                 
                 Whereof
                 i●
                 spoken
                 more
                 at
                 large
                 in
                 the
                 19.
                 chapter
                 vers
                 17.
                 until
                 the
                 21.
                 by
                 this
                 plague
                 the
                 
                 Papists
                 are
                 yet
                 more
                 embittered
                 ,
                 and
                 more
                 and
                 more
                 hardned
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   12.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 sixth
                 Angel
                 poured
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 great
                 river
                 Euphrates
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 water
                 thereof
                 was
                 dried
                 up
                 .
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 By
                 Euphrates
                 are
                 understood
                 the
                 Nations
                 which
                 border
                 thereupon
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Turks
                 .
                 But
                 by
                 the
                 drying
                 up
                 of
                 the
                 water
                 is
                 meant
                 ,
                 the
                 ruine
                 and
                 overthrow
                 of
                 those
                 Nations
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 evident
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 as
                 Isaiah
                 chapter
                 19.
                 vers
                 5.
                 chap.
                 44
                 vers
                 27.
                 
                 Jeremiah
                 chap.
                 48.
                 vers
                 34.
                 chap.
                 50.
                 vers
                 38.
                 chap.
                 51.
                 vers
                 36.
                 
                 Ezekiel
                 chap.
                 30.
                 vers
                 12.
                 chap.
                 31.
                 vers
                 4.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 Application
                 of
                 this
                 text
                 to
                 the
                 ruine
                 of
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 ,
                 doth
                 agree
                 with
                 the
                 eleventh
                 chap.
                 of
                 Isa
                 .
                 vers
                 13.
                 14.
                 whereupon
                 soon
                 followeth
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   second
                   Wo
                
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 is
                 past
                 :
              
               
                 Moreover
                 ,
                 the
                 drying
                 up
                 of
                 Euphrates
                 
                 is
                 a
                 preparation
                 for
                 the
                 great
                 work
                 ,
                 which
                 shall
                 bee
                 performed
                 at
                 the
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Vial.
                 
              
               
                 For
                 as
                 in
                 times
                 of
                 old
                 the
                 red
                 Sea
                 was
                 divided
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 drie
                 waie
                 for
                 the
                 Children
                 of
                 Israël
                 ,
                 when
                 at
                 their
                 going
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 they
                 were
                 pursued
                 by
                 Pharaoh
                 ;
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 pass
                 thorough
                 safe
                 ,
                 and
                 Pharaoh
                 should
                 bee
                 drowned
                 .
                 Exodus
                 14.
                 vers
                 12.
                 until
                 the
                 twentie
                 ninth
                 .
                 And
                 as
                 God
                 did
                 drie
                 up
                 the
                 river
                 of
                 Jordan
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 a
                 waie
                 thorough
                 it
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 Israël
                 could
                 go
                 through
                 it
                 on
                 drie
                 Land
                 ,
                 and
                 enter
                 into
                 the
                 promised
                 Land
                 ;
                 so
                 is
                 here
                 Euphrates
                 spiritually
                 dried
                 up
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 ruined
                 .
              
               
                 That
                 the
                 waie
                 of
                 the
                 Kings
                 of
                 the
                 East
                 might
                 bee
                 prepared
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 this
                 the
                 conversion
                 of
                 the
                 Jews
                 is
                 intimated
                 ;
                 which
                 immediately
                 after
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 shall
                 bee
                 advanced
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 may
                 bee
                 seen
                 by
                 the
                 19.
                 chapter
                 ,
                 vers
                 6
                 ,
                 7.
                 whereunto
                 may
                 bee
                 referred
                 what
                 Isaiah
                 
                 writeth
                 :
                 chapter
                 14.
                 vers
                 10.
                 until
                 the
                 sixteenth
                 .
                 Zach.
                 chap.
                 10.
                 vers
                 11.
                 4.
                 
                 Esr
                 .
                 chap.
                 13.
                 vers
                 47.
                 
              
               
                 Hereupon
                 followeth
                 the
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 and
                 last
                 Vial
                 of
                 the
                 wrath
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 wherewith
                 also
                 the
                 seventh
                 Angel
                 soundeth
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 seventh
                 plague
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 third
                 and
                 last
                 Wo
                 over
                 the
                 Papacie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 doth
                 take
                 effect
                 ,
                 bringing
                 with
                 it
                 the
                 total
                 ruine
                 and
                 destruction
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 preparations
                 of
                 this
                 are
                 described
                 before
                 hand
                 thus
                 :
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   13.
                
                 
                 And
                 I
                 saw
                 three
                 unclean
                 spirits
                 like
                 frogs
                 ,
                 com
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 and
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 the
                 fals
                 Prophet
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 fals
                 Prophet
                 are
                 three
                 companions
                 ,
                 and
                 fellow-Commoners
                 ,
                 who
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 demutation
                 (
                 as
                 it
                 appeareth
                 by
                 the
                 thirteenth
                 chapter
                 )
                 have
                 stuck
                 close
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 have
                 been
                 equally
                 honored
                 and
                 worshipped
                 
                 by
                 those
                 that
                 were
                 under
                 their
                 power
                 :
                 Now
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 their
                 reign
                 they
                 also
                 agree
                 ,
                 and
                 need
                 requiring
                 it
                 ,
                 they
                 send
                 their
                 Ambassadors
                 and
                 Agents
                 abroad
                 ,
                 unclean
                 talkative
                 Spirits
                 ,
                 Spirits
                 of
                 Devils
                 ,
                 working
                 Miracles
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 shall
                 bee
                 destroied
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Papal
                 seat
                 overthrown
                 ,
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 ruined
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Jews
                 converted
                 unto
                 Christ
                 ;
                 The
                 Devil
                 ,
                 the
                 Romane
                 Papacie
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 whole
                 Clergie
                 shall
                 not
                 bee
                 able
                 to
                 conclude
                 anie
                 thing
                 els
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 their
                 end
                 is
                 now
                 at
                 hand
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 will
                 bee
                 utterly
                 destroied
                 :
                 Therefore
                 they
                 trie
                 their
                 utmost
                 endevors
                 ,
                 and
                 call
                 together
                 the
                 best
                 men
                 of
                 their
                 orders
                 ,
                 and
                 such
                 as
                 are
                 most
                 fit
                 for
                 this
                 work
                 ,
                 chiefly
                 those
                 that
                 have
                 made
                 profession
                 in
                 the
                 eleventh
                 Classis
                 ;
                 these
                 they
                 send
                 to
                 the
                 Courts
                 of
                 all
                 Catholick
                 Potentates
                 throughout
                 the
                 whole
                 Romane
                 Popish
                 Empire
                 ,
                 persuading
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Professors
                 of
                 their
                 Religion
                 ,
                 to
                 stir
                 up
                 the
                 
                 utmost
                 of
                 their
                 power
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 join
                 and
                 offer
                 themselvs
                 together
                 with
                 others
                 to
                 the
                 war
                 ,
                 against
                 the
                 Professors
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 that
                 great
                 daie
                 of
                 God
                 Almightie
                 (
                 at
                 the
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Vial.
                 )
              
               
                 The
                 time
                 when
                 Constantine
                 the
                 great
                 destroied
                 the
                 Empire
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 and
                 overthrew
                 the
                 Dragon
                 with
                 the
                 heathenish
                 worship
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 ,
                 is
                 called
                 ,
                 
                   the
                   great
                   daie
                   of
                   his
                   wrath
                   ,
                
                 Rev.
                 c.
                 6.
                 v.
                 17.
                 
              
               
                 But
                 the
                 time
                 here
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Beast
                 and
                 the
                 fals
                 Prophet
                 shall
                 bee
                 cast
                 into
                 the
                 lake
                 of
                 fire
                 and
                 brimstone
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Dragon
                 shall
                 bee
                 shut
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 bottomless
                 pit
                 ,
                 is
                 called
                 :
                 
                   That
                   great
                   daie
                   of
                   God
                   Almightie
                   :
                
                 Above
                 in
                 the
                 11.
                 ch
                 .
                 v.
                 18.
                 at
                 the
                 sound
                 of
                 the
                 Trumpet
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Angel
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 called
                 
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   the
                   dead
                   ,
                   that
                   they
                   should
                   bee
                   judged
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   give
                   a
                   reward
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 By
                 the
                 Prophets
                 in
                 the
                 Old
                 Testament
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 Christ
                 and
                 the
                 Apostles
                 in
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 frequently
                 called
                 ,
                 
                   that
                   daie
                
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 to
                 shew
                 what
                 properly
                 is
                 meant
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 understood
                 by
                 this
                 
                   great
                   daie
                   of
                   God
                
                 ,
                 would
                 require
                 a
                 large
                 and
                 particuliar
                 exposition
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 becaus
                 the
                 Holie
                 Scripture
                 ,
                 especially
                 the
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Prophets
                 do
                 not
                 agree
                 with
                 the
                 common
                 opinion
                 ,
                 usual
                 to
                 prove
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 make
                 out
                 at
                 large
                 at
                 this
                 time
                 ,
                 is
                 contrarie
                 to
                 the
                 scope
                 and
                 intention
                 of
                 this
                 present
                 Treatise
                 ;
                 Therefore
                 it
                 is
                 is
                 thought
                 expedient
                 to
                 defer
                 it
                 till
                 another
                 time
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   15.
                
                 
                 Behold
                 ,
                 I
                 com
                 as
                 a
                 thief
                 ,
                 Blessed
                 is
                 hee
                 that
                 watcheth
                 ,
                 and
                 keepeth
                 his
                 garments
                 ,
                 lest
                 hee
                 walk
                 naked
                 and
                 see
                 his
                 shame
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 is
                 declared
                 the
                 sudden
                 and
                 unexspected
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Vial
                 and
                 plague
                 ,
                 which
                 unawares
                 ,
                 and
                 suddenly
                 shall
                 light
                 upon
                 the
                 Papal
                 State.
                 Therefore
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 himself
                 doth
                 exhort
                 all
                 men
                 to
                 watch
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 stand
                 continually
                 in
                 readiness
                 by
                 serious
                 repentance
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 godlie
                 conversation
                 .
              
               
               
                 And
                 hee
                 gathered
                 them
                 together
                 into
                 a
                 place
                 ,
                 called
                 in
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 tongue
                 ,
                 Armageddon
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 these
                 words
                 is
                 described
                 the
                 place
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Papists
                 shall
                 have
                 the
                 
                   Rendez
                   vous
                
                 of
                 their
                 Armies
                 ,
                 which
                 they
                 shall
                 have
                 gathered
                 against
                 the
                 Professors
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 :
                 The
                 place
                 is
                 called
                 
                   Harmageddon
                   ,
                   Mountain
                   of
                   Lamentations
                
                 ;
                 whereby
                 is
                 intimated
                 the
                 place
                 ,
                 where
                 King
                 Josiah
                 fought
                 a
                 battel
                 unhappily
                 ,
                 where
                 hee
                 was
                 slain
                 .
                 
                   2
                   Chron.
                
                 chapter
                 35.
                 vers
                 24
                 ,
                 25.
                 
                 For
                 which
                 the
                 Jews
                 made
                 manie
                 and
                 great
                 lamentations
                 ,
                 and
                 at
                 last
                 it
                 became
                 a
                 custom
                 ,
                 that
                 when
                 they
                 would
                 mourn
                 for
                 som
                 extraordinarie
                 sad
                 accident
                 ,
                 they
                 used
                 to
                 make
                 mention
                 of
                 this
                 defeat
                 given
                 at
                 Megiddo
                 .
              
               
                 Upon
                 this
                 lamentation
                 of
                 the
                 Jews
                 ,
                 and
                 Custom
                 doth
                 St
                 John
                 here
                 point
                 ,
                 shewing
                 thereby
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Papists
                 will
                 lament
                 and
                 mourn
                 over
                 the
                 issue
                 of
                 this
                 war
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Jews
                 did
                 mourn
                 for
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 King
                 Josiah
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 great
                 
                 overthrow
                 they
                 received
                 at
                 Megiddo
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   17.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 seventh
                 Angel
                 poured
                 out
                 his
                 Vial
                 into
                 the
                 Aër
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 aforegoing
                 Vials
                 have
                 been
                 poured
                 out
                 upon
                 particular
                 places
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 first
                 upon
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 State
                 and
                 Popish
                 Religion
                 in
                 common
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 second
                 upon
                 the
                 Political
                 State
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 means
                 of
                 this
                 Germane
                 war.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 third
                 upon
                 the
                 particular
                 Popish
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Heads
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 fourth
                 upon
                 an
                 High-head
                 ,
                 a
                 strong
                 pillar
                 of
                 the
                 Papacie
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 fifth
                 upon
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 sixth
                 upon
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 ,
                 which
                 keep
                 's
                 a
                 great
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 in
                 subjection
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 an
                 open
                 Antichrist
                 ,
                 sit's
                 in
                 the
                 seat
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 followeth
                 the
                 seventh
                 Vial
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 poured
                 out
                 upon
                 the
                 Aër
                 :
                 And
                 as
                 the
                 Aër
                 doth
                 contein
                 all
                 things
                 ,
                 so
                 likewise
                 this
                 pouring
                 out
                 is
                 universal
                 ,
                 and
                 doth
                 reach
                 the
                 whole
                 Papacie
                 ;
                 
                 nay
                 ,
                 it
                 doth
                 take
                 hold
                 also
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 and
                 his
                 Spirits
                 ,
                 becaus
                 the
                 said
                 Dragon
                 (
                 as
                 heretofore
                 hath
                 been
                 said
                 )
                 hath
                 given
                 up
                 to
                 the
                 Beast
                 his
                 seat
                 ,
                 his
                 Armie
                 ,
                 and
                 great
                 power
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 cooperated
                 in
                 this
                 second
                 Period
                 ,
                 and
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Beast
                 caused
                 himself
                 to
                 bee
                 worshipped
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Dragon
                 is
                 the
                 Devil
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   the
                   Prince
                   of
                   the
                   power
                   of
                   the
                   Aër
                   ,
                
                 Ephesians
                 2.
                 vers
                 2.
                 with
                 the
                 wicked
                 spirits
                 under
                 the
                 heaven
                 .
                 Ephes
                 .
                 chapter
                 6.
                 vers
                 12.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 eighth
                 chapter
                 of
                 Matthew
                 vers
                 29.
                 these
                 spirits
                 do
                 expostulate
                 with
                 the
                 Lord
                 Jesus
                 ,
                 saying
                 :
                 
                   What
                   have
                   wee
                   to
                   do
                   with
                   thee
                   ?
                   art
                   thou
                   com
                   hither
                   to
                   torment
                   us
                   before
                   the
                   time
                   ?
                
                 At
                 the
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 this
                 Vial
                 upon
                 the
                 Aër
                 no
                 expostulation
                 will
                 serv
                 tnrn
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 time
                 is
                 at
                 hand
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 bee
                 accomplished
                 ,
                 what
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 saith
                 ,
                 
                   Matthew
                   24.
                
                 vers
                 29.
                 
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 .
                 The
                 mightie
                 Host
                 of
                 Devils
                 ,
                 which
                 dwell
                 under
                 the
                 Heaven
                 in
                 the
                 Aër
                 ,
                 shall
                 bee
                 
                 moved
                 with
                 a
                 terrible
                 nois
                 and
                 tumult
                 .
                 Then
                 their
                 torments
                 shall
                 begin
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 shall
                 bee
                 cast
                 down
                 from
                 the
                 aër
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 Head
                 the
                 Dragon
                 shall
                 bee
                 shut
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 bottomless
                 pit
                 ,
                 as
                 beneath
                 in
                 Revelations
                 chapter
                 20.
                 vers
                 1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 at
                 the
                 issue
                 of
                 this
                 war
                 may
                 bee
                 seen
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 there
                 came
                 a
                 great
                 voice
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 Heaven
                 from
                 the
                 throne
                 ,
                 saying
                 :
                 It
                 is
                 don
                 .
              
               
                 Here
                 sit's
                 
                   the
                   Ancient
                   of
                   daies
                   upon
                   the
                   fierie
                   flaming
                   seat
                   ,
                
                 Daniel
                 chap.
                 7.
                 v.
                 9.
                 and
                 pronounceth
                 the
                 sentence
                 against
                 the
                 fourth
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 becaus
                 the
                 measure
                 is
                 full
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 determined
                 time
                 over
                 him
                 is
                 run
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 hee
                 break
                 's
                 the
                 rod
                 ,
                 and
                 denounceth
                 the
                 irrevocable
                 judgment
                 ,
                 saying
                 :
              
               
                 It
                 is
                 don
                 :
                 The
                 Beast
                 shall
                 bee
                 slain
                 ,
                 and
                 bee
                 cast
                 into
                 the
                 burning
                 flame
                 ,
                 
                   as
                   in
                   the
                   said
                   place
                   followeth
                   ,
                
                 Dan.
                 7.
                 
                   ver
                   .
                   11.
                
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   18.
                
                 
                 And
                 there
                 were
                 voices
                 and
                 thunders
                 ,
                 and
                 lightnings
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 was
                 a
                 great
                 Earth-quake
                 ,
                 such
                 as
                 was
                 not
                 ,
                 
                 since
                 men
                 were
                 upon
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 so
                 mightie
                 an
                 Earth
                 quake
                 and
                 so
                 great
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 beginneth
                 the
                 Execution
                 :
              
               
                 Upon
                 the
                 Devil
                 and
                 his
                 whole
                 Armie
                 :
              
               
                 Upon
                 his
                 Vicar
                 and
                 what
                 dependeth
                 on
                 him
                 .
              
               
                 Upon
                 the
                 whole
                 Romane
                 Papacie
                 ,
                 and
                 it's
                 Kingdoms
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 Heaven
                 and
                 earth
                 are
                 shaken
                 for
                 the
                 second
                 time
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   the
                   mightie
                   Kingdoms
                   of
                   the
                   Heathen
                   are
                   destroied
                   ,
                
                 Hagg.
                 chapter
                 2.
                 vers
                 22
                 ,
                 23.
                 
              
               
                 
                   In
                   the
                   Aër
                
                 are
                 heard
                 dreadful
                 thunders
                 ,
                 and
                 lightnings
                 ,
                 terrible
                 voices
                 ,
                 lamenting
                 and
                 crying
                 of
                 the
                 Devils
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Upon
                   the
                   earth
                
                 will
                 bee
                 nothing
                 but
                 war
                 ,
                 and
                 rumor
                 of
                 wars
                 ;
                 In
                 all
                 parts
                 shall
                 bee
                 heard
                 tumults
                 ,
                 seditions
                 ,
                 insurrections
                 ,
                 terrible
                 distractions
                 ,
                 and
                 grievous
                 bloodsheds
                 ;
                 
                   such
                   as
                   never
                   were
                   since
                   the
                   beginning
                   of
                   the
                   world
                   to
                   this
                   time
                   ,
                   nor
                   ever
                   were
                   heard
                   of
                   ,
                
                 Daniel
                 chapter
                 12.
                 vers
                 1.
                 
                 Matthew
                 24.
                 v.
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   19.
                
                 
                 And
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 was
                 divided
                 into
                 three
                 parts
                 .
              
               
               
                 By
                 the
                 great
                 Citie
                 is
                 understood
                 ,
                 either
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 seat
                 and
                 Citie
                 of
                 residence
                 for
                 the
                 Beast
                 and
                 his
                 rider
                 :
              
               
                 Or
                 the
                 whole
                 Papal
                 State
                 ,
                 the
                 Citie
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 streets
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 was
                 already
                 by
                 the
                 fifth
                 Vial
                 darkned
                 ,
                 and
                 ruined
                 .
                 Wherefore
                 it
                 is
                 spoken
                 here
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Papacie
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 divided
                 into
                 three
                 parts
                 :
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 accomplishment
                 of
                 these
                 words
                 it
                 will
                 appear
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Pope
                 doth
                 not
                 wear
                 his
                 triple
                 Crown
                 in
                 vain
                 ,
                 for
                 under
                 the
                 same
                 do
                 sit
                 and
                 reign
                 :
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     Dragon
                     .
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Beast
                     .
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     fals
                     Prophet
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 Under
                 the
                 Command
                 of
                 these
                 three
                 Generals
                 ,
                 shall
                 on
                 the
                 Popish
                 side
                 the
                 battel
                 bee
                 set
                 in
                 arraie
                 ▪
                 and
                 led
                 forth
                 .
                 For
                 these
                 three
                 ,
                 ea●h
                 of
                 them
                 have
                 raised
                 their
                 men
                 severally
                 .
                 ver
                 .
                 13.
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 They
                 stand
                 all
                 three
                 in
                 battel-arraie
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 readie
                 to
                 fall
                 on
                 .
              
               
               
                 But
                 what
                 success
                 have
                 they
                 ?
                 The
                 Beast
                 is
                 taken
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 him
                 the
                 fals
                 Prophet
                 ,
                 and
                 both
                 were
                 cast
                 alive
                 into
                 a
                 lake
                 of
                 fire
                 burning
                 with
                 brimstone
                 ,
                 Revelations
                 chapter
                 19.
                 vers
                 20
                 ,
                 21.
                 
                 But
                 the
                 Generalissimus
                 ,
                 the
                 Dragon
                 is
                 laid
                 hold
                 on
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   cast
                   into
                   the
                   bottomless
                   pit
                   ,
                   and
                   shut
                   up
                   .
                
                 Chap.
                 vers
                 1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 
              
               
                 And
                 the
                 Cities
                 of
                 the
                 Nations
                 fell
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Heathenish
                 life
                 and
                 conversation
                 ,
                 the
                 Heathenish
                 Idolatrie
                 ,
                 Sodomie
                 ,
                 and
                 other
                 Heathenish
                 sins
                 ,
                 and
                 abominations
                 ,
                 which
                 hitherto
                 have
                 been
                 practised
                 in
                 the
                 Popish
                 State
                 are
                 at
                 once
                 altogether
                 abolished
                 and
                 utterly
                 removed
                 ,
                 as
                 that
                 nothing
                 more
                 is
                 heard
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 great
                 Babylon
                 came
                 in
                 remembrance
                 before
                 God
                 ,
                 to
                 give
                 unto
                 her
                 the
                 cup
                 of
                 the
                 wine
                 of
                 the
                 fierceness
                 of
                 his
                 wrath
                 .
              
               
                 God
                 sate
                 still
                 hitherto
                 ,
                 and
                 seemed
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 hee
                 knew
                 nothing
                 of
                 the
                 Beast's
                 blaspheming
                 and
                 persecution
                 .
                 But
                 when
                 the
                 determined
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 fortie
                 two
                 moneths
                 were
                 exspired
                 ,
                 hee
                 remember's
                 
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 fill's
                 unto
                 her
                 the
                 cup
                 of
                 the
                 wine
                 of
                 the
                 fierceness
                 of
                 his
                 wrath
                 ,
                 and
                 punishing
                 her
                 ,
                 hee
                 doth
                 reward
                 her
                 according
                 to
                 her
                 deserving
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   20.
                
                 
                 And
                 everie
                 Island
                 fled
                 away
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Mountains
                 were
                 not
                 found
                 :
              
               
                 All
                 whatsoëver
                 had
                 anie
                 relation
                 or
                 dependance
                 on
                 the
                 Papacie
                 ,
                 even
                 the
                 remotest
                 pleces
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 whatsoëver
                 was
                 highly
                 exalted
                 therein
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 seen
                 any
                 more
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 total
                 ruine
                 and
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Papacie
                 is
                 signified
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Vers
                   21.
                
                 
                 And
                 there
                 fell
                 upon
                 men
                 a
                 great
                 hail
                 out
                 of
                 heaven
                 ,
                 everie
                 stone
                 about
                 the
                 weight
                 of
                 a
                 talent
                 ,
                 and
                 men
                 blasphemed
                 God
                 ,
                 becaus
                 of
                 the
                 plague
                 of
                 the
                 hail
                 ;
                 for
                 the
                 plague
                 thereof
                 was
                 exceeding
                 great
                 .
              
               
                 By
                 the
                 great
                 hail-stones
                 are
                 understood
                 the
                 great
                 punishments
                 of
                 God's
                 wrath
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 words
                 (
                 about
                 the
                 weight
                 of
                 a
                 talent
                 )
                 are
                 meant
                 the
                 heaviest
                 and
                 most
                 dreadful
                 Judgments
                 ;
                 the
                 weight
                 of
                 a
                 talent
                 beeing
                 the
                 heaviest
                 and
                 greatest
                 weight
                 ;
                 yet
                 all
                 this
                 
                 notwithstanding
                 men
                 will
                 not
                 know
                 the
                 righteous
                 judgment
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 but
                 by
                 their
                 blasphemies
                 of
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 God
                 are
                 cast
                 into
                 everlasting
                 perdition
                 .
              
               
                 Hitherto
                 the
                 sixteenth
                 Chapter
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 AGainst
                 this
                 plain
                 and
                 cleer
                 exposition
                 ,
                 manie
                 will
                 have
                 different
                 apprehensions
                 ,
                 and
                 esteem
                 these
                 things
                 impertinent
                 ,
                 and
                 incredible
                 Paradoxes
                 .
              
               
                 
                   To
                   these
                   is
                   opposed
                
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 cleer
                 text
                 not
                 beeing
                 forced
                 ,
                 but
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 literally
                 ,
                 or
                 figuratively
                 referred
                 to
                 the
                 times
                 ,
                 so
                 it
                 hath
                 been
                 explained
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 figures
                 and
                 Images
                 ,
                 which
                 make
                 this
                 work
                 difficult
                 and
                 dark
                 ,
                 are
                 cleered
                 out
                 of
                 other
                 places
                 of
                 the
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 or
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Old
                 Testament
                 ,
                 especially
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 from
                 whom
                 the
                 whole
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 is
                 taken
                 ;
                 and
                 are
                 applyed
                 to
                 the
                 civil
                 and
                 Ecclesiastical
                 State
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 text
                 and
                 the
                 time
                 doth
                 require
                 .
              
               
               
                 3.
                 
                 That
                 what
                 is
                 past
                 ,
                 or
                 is
                 now
                 in
                 full
                 action
                 ,
                 cannot
                 bee
                 overthrown
                 by
                 a
                 bare
                 contradiction
                 ,
                 or
                 doubt
                 ;
                 but
                 search
                 should
                 bee
                 made
                 in
                 the
                 Acts
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 to
                 see
                 what
                 things
                 may
                 bee
                 more
                 sutably
                 applyed
                 another
                 waie
                 .
                 Yet
                 so
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Method
                 and
                 Harmonie
                 may
                 n●t
                 bee
                 disturbed
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 that
                 a
                 better
                 waie
                 may
                 bee
                 shewed
                 and
                 offered
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 Text
                 and
                 Method
                 doth
                 shew
                 what
                 is
                 shortly
                 to
                 bee
                 exspected
                 ,
                 especially
                 ,
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 determined
                 time
                 by
                 God
                 over
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 ,
                 wherein
                 the
                 Romane
                 Papacie
                 shall
                 blaspheme
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 war
                 against
                 the
                 Saints
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 fortie
                 two
                 moneths
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Hereupon
                   ariseth
                   the
                   greatest
                   and
                   principal
                   scruple
                   or
                   doubt
                   .
                
              
               
                 Whether
                 the
                 Epocha
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 Apocalyptical
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 bee
                 rightly
                 referred
                 to
                 
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ?
              
               
                 In
                 the
                 
                   Prophetical
                   keie
                
                 ,
                 certain
                 characters
                 and
                 marks
                 have
                 been
                 set
                 down
                 and
                 applied
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 certaintie
                 doth
                 appear
                 ,
                 which
                 wee
                 shall
                 here
                 repeat
                 ,
                 and
                 confirm
                 with
                 more
                 proofs
                 .
              
               
                 As
                 ,
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 First
                 ,
                 becaus
                 the
                 Epocha
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 years
                 of
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Daniel
                 ,
                 chapter
                 12.
                 vers
                 11.
                 is
                 exactly
                 incident
                 into
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 it
                 followeth
                 that
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 must
                 com
                 thirtie
                 years
                 later
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 begin
                 Anno
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 five
                 ,
                 becaus
                 they
                 end
                 together
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Secondly
                 ,
                 becaus
                 by
                 the
                 division
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 into
                 two
                 parts
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 the
                 Romane
                 Eagle
                 got
                 two
                 wings
                 ,
                 and
                 becaus
                 in
                 the
                 verie
                 same
                 year
                 the
                 Septentrional
                 Barbarous
                 Nations
                 invaded
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ;
                 whereby
                 the
                 
                 Woman
                 (
                 the
                 Christian
                 Church
                 )
                 fled
                 into
                 the
                 Wilderness
                 ,
                 wherein
                 shee
                 should
                 bee
                 preserved
                 and
                 nourished
                 ,
                 during
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 or
                 3
                 ½
                 times
                 ,
                 chap.
                 12.
                 vers
                 6.
                 till
                 the
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Thirdly
                 ,
                 Becaus
                 with
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 invasion
                 of
                 these
                 Barbarous
                 Nations
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 the
                 treading
                 under
                 foot
                 of
                 the
                 holie
                 Citie
                 begun
                 ,
                 which
                 should
                 continue
                 fortie
                 and
                 two
                 moneths
                 .
                 
                   Revelations
                   11.
                   vers
                   2.
                
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Fourthly
                 ,
                 becaus
                 by
                 this
                 invasion
                 ,
                 the
                 
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                   rose
                   up
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Sea
                   :
                
                 That
                 is
                 :
                 becaus
                 by
                 this
                 war
                 ,
                 which
                 began
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 was
                 by
                 little
                 and
                 little
                 so
                 divided
                 ,
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 four
                 hundred
                 third
                 year
                 alreadie
                 som
                 horns
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 fully
                 ten
                 horns
                 ,
                 or
                 Kingdoms
                 appeared
                 in
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 All
                 the
                 Historians
                 generally
                 do
                 agree
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 ruine
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 did
                 begin
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 as
                 som
                 of
                 them
                 were
                 quoted
                 in
                 
                   Clavi
                   Apocalypt
                
                 .
                 Now
                 both
                 the
                 antient
                 and
                 later
                 Teachers
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 do
                 conclude
                 by
                 the
                 words
                 of
                 the
                 Apostle
                 
                   Paul
                   ,
                   2
                   Thessalonians
                   2.
                
                 vers
                 6
                 ,
                 7
                 ,
                 8.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 Antichrist
                 should
                 then
                 com
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 should
                 begin
                 to
                 fall
                 .
                 As
                 wee
                 read
                 in
                 
                   Tertulliano
                   in
                   Apologetico
                   c.
                   32.
                   
                   Item
                   de
                   resurrect
                   .
                   carnis
                   .
                   Irenaeo
                   lib.
                   5.
                   adversus
                   Haereses
                   .
                   Hieronymo
                   quaest
                   .
                   2.
                   ad
                   Algasiam
                   .
                   Chrysost
                   .
                   Homil.
                   4.
                   in
                   Thes
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Hence
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 
                   Joannes
                   Cluverius
                   in
                   Comentario
                   posthumo
                   in
                   Apol.
                   Tom.
                   111.
                
                 writeth
                 thus
                 :
                 
                   Totius
                   Negotii
                   cardo
                   versatur
                   in
                   inveniendo
                   exordio
                   Antichristi
                   ;
                   quod
                   in
                   ruinam
                   Imperii
                   Romani
                   incidere
                   ,
                   ostendimus
                   .
                
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 The
                 
                   Beast
                   with
                   two
                   horns
                
                 ,
                 the
                 Antichristian
                 Pope
                 of
                 Rome
                 came
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Earth
                 quietly
                 ,
                 about
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 
                   Revelations
                   13.
                
                 vers
                 11.
                 when
                 hee
                 arrogated
                 unto
                 himself
                 the
                 Primacie
                 and
                 preeminencie
                 ,
                 over
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 
                 and
                 civil
                 State.
                 Before
                 the
                 Nicene
                 Synod
                 which
                 was
                 held
                 in
                 three
                 hundred
                 twentie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 the
                 preeminencie
                 of
                 the
                 Bishop
                 of
                 Rome
                 over
                 other
                 Churches
                 was
                 not
                 known
                 .
                 Wherefore
                 
                   Aeneas
                   Sylvius
                   in
                   Epistola
                   288.
                
                 writeth
                 .
                 
                   Ante
                   Nicaenum
                   Concilium
                   quisque
                   sibi
                   vivebat
                   ,
                   &
                   ad
                   Romanam
                   sedem
                   parvus
                   habebatur
                   respectus
                   .
                
                 Besides
                 ,
                 the
                 succeeding
                 Popes
                 ,
                 
                   Liberius
                   I.
                   Felix
                   II.
                
                 and
                 Damasus
                 did
                 not
                 seek
                 anie
                 such
                 matter
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Nay
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   three
                   hundred
                   ninetieth
                   year
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   third
                   Council
                   of
                
                 Carthage
                 ,
                 Can.
                 26.
                 
                   this
                   Canon
                   was
                   made
                
                 :
                 Ut
                 primae
                 sedis
                 Episcopus
                 non
                 appelletur
                 Princeps
                 Sacerdotum
                 aut
                 summus
                 Sacerdos
                 ,
                 aut
                 aliquid
                 hujusmodi
                 ,
                 sed
                 tantùm
                 primae
                 sedis
                 Episcopus
                 .
                 Tom.
                 Concil
                 .
                 p.
                 544.
                 
              
               
                 Innocent
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 who
                 in
                 the
                 four
                 hundred
                 second
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 succeeded
                 Anastasius
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 that
                 made
                 an
                 Act
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Hereticks
                 should
                 bee
                 compelled
                 to
                 imbrace
                 the
                 Catholick
                 faith
                 :
                 And
                 hath
                 also
                 attributed
                 
                 unto
                 himself
                 Autoritie
                 and
                 power
                 ,
                 not
                 onely
                 over
                 the
                 common
                 people
                 ;
                 but
                 also
                 over
                 the
                 Highest
                 Civil
                 Autoritie
                 in
                 Christendom
                 ,
                 in
                 that
                 hee
                 excommunicated
                 Arcadius
                 the
                 Emperor
                 at
                 Constantinople
                 ,
                 when
                 hee
                 removed
                 Chrysostome
                 from
                 his
                 function
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 like
                 manner
                 hee
                 did
                 vehemently
                 bestir
                 himself
                 to
                 obtain
                 the
                 Primacie
                 for
                 the
                 Romane
                 Church
                 ,
                 and
                 especially
                 hee
                 endevored
                 to
                 get
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 Bishops
                 ,
                 and
                 Churches
                 in
                 Africa
                 .
                 The
                 like
                 was
                 practised
                 also
                 by
                 
                   Zosimus
                   .
                   Bonifacius
                   1.
                   
                   Celestine
                   1.
                
                 whereof
                 
                   Daniel
                   Paraeus
                   in
                   Medullâ
                   Hist
                   .
                   Eccles
                   .
                   universali
                   pag.
                   200.
                   
                
                 Whence
                 it
                 is
                 that
                 
                   Socrates
                   lib.
                   7.
                   
                   Hist.
                   Eccles
                   .
                   cap.
                   3.
                
                 where
                 relating
                 ,
                 how
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 Celistine
                 the
                 1.
                 it
                 fared
                 with
                 the
                 Novatians
                 ,
                 hee
                 addeth
                 these
                 words
                 :
                 
                   Episcopatus
                   Romanus
                   non
                   aliter
                   atque
                   Alexandrinus
                   ,
                   quasi
                   extra
                   Sacerdotii
                   fines
                   egressus
                   ,
                   ad
                   secularem
                   Principatum
                   jam
                   antè
                   delapsus
                   erat
                   .
                
              
               
                 In
                 like
                 manner
                 Sericius
                 ,
                 who
                 after
                 
                 Damasus
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 eightie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 until
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 eighth
                 year
                 was
                 Bishop
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 who
                 held
                 the
                 Priests
                 ,
                 who
                 companied
                 with
                 their
                 married
                 wives
                 ,
                 uncapable
                 of
                 the
                 Ministerie
                 .
              
               
                 
                   As
                   wee
                   read
                   hereof
                   in
                   his
                   first
                   Epistle
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 7.
                 and
                 Epist
                 .
                 4.
                 c.
                 6.
                 
                 Tom.
                 1.
                 
                 Concil
                 .
                 page
                 530.
                 534.
                 
                 In
                 Jure
                 Canonico
                 Distin
                 .
                 82.
                 
                 And
                 in
                 concilio
                 Taurinatensi
                 
                   in
                   the
                   three
                   hundred
                   ninetie
                   seventh
                   year
                   of
                   our
                   Lord
                   was
                   determined
                   .
                
                 chap.
                 7.
                 qui
                 in
                 Ministerio
                 genuerunt
                 filios
                 ,
                 nè
                 ad
                 majores
                 gradus
                 ordinum
                 permittantur
                 ,
                 Synodi
                 decrevit
                 autoritas
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   Concilio
                   Carthaginensi
                
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 eighth
                 year
                 
                   sub
                   Anastasio
                
                 was
                 concluded
                 on
                 .
                 
                   Cap.
                   3.
                
                 
              
               
                 Placuit
                 Episcopos
                 ,
                 &
                 Presbyteros
                 ,
                 &
                 Diaconos
                 ,
                 secundùm
                 propria
                 priora
                 vel
                 prima
                 statuta
                 etiam
                 ab
                 uxoribus
                 continere
                 .
                 Quod
                 nisi
                 fecerint
                 ,
                 ab
                 Ecclesiastico
                 removeantur
                 officio
                 .
                 Tom.
                 1.
                 
                 Concil
                 .
                 p.
                 517.
                 
                 Vid.
                 Distinct
                 .
                 84.
                 cap.
                 3
                 ,
                 4
                 ,
                 5.
                 
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 eleventh
                 chapter
                 wee
                 have
                 
                 seen
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 shall
                 bee
                 fought
                 against
                 ,
                 overcom
                 and
                 killed
                 :
                 which
                 as
                 hath
                 been
                 proved
                 above
                 ;
                 is
                 hitherto
                 com
                 to
                 pass
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 last
                 Act
                 is
                 now
                 shortly
                 to
                 bee
                 exspected
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Silesia
                 .
                 Whether
                 now
                 this
                 bee
                 performed
                 in
                 this
                 ,
                 or
                 in
                 the
                 next
                 following
                 year
                 ,
                 thereupon
                 their
                 raising
                 again
                 will
                 follow
                 ,
                 after
                 3
                 ½
                 years
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 becaus
                 the
                 seventh
                 Trumpet
                 shall
                 sound
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 and
                 between
                 it
                 and
                 the
                 raising
                 again
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 ,
                 two
                 accidents
                 happen
                 ,
                 as
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 And
                 the
                 ending
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 Wo
                 :
                 therefore
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 may
                 well
                 bee
                 raised
                 again
                 ,
                 before
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 shall
                 begin
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 Modicum
                 nec
                 Praetor
                 curat
                 nec
                 Propheta
                 .
              
               
               
                 Unto
                 this
                 may
                 also
                 bee
                 added
                 these
                 following
                 reasons
                 as
                 secondarie
                 Arguments
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Prophesie
                 of
                 the
                 Apostle
                 Peter
                 ,
                 whereof
                 Augustin
                 .
                 lib.
                 18.
                 c.
                 53.
                 and
                 54.
                 de
                 Civit.
                 Dei.
                 writeth
                 :
              
               
                 That
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 in
                 his
                 time
                 did
                 report
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Apostle
                 Peter
                 had
                 thought
                 that
                 the
                 Christian
                 Religion
                 should
                 continue
                 but
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 five
                 years
                 :
                 Which
                 Augustine
                 holdeth
                 to
                 bee
                 a
                 Fiction
                 ,
                 wherewith
                 the
                 Heathen
                 would
                 cast
                 a
                 reproch
                 upon
                 the
                 Christian
                 Religion
                 .
                 But
                 if
                 this
                 bee
                 well
                 considered
                 ,
                 it
                 may
                 well
                 prove
                 so
                 indeed
                 ,
                 that
                 Peter
                 did
                 declare
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Christian
                 Religion
                 ,
                 should
                 ,
                 for
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 five
                 years
                 without
                 interruption
                 ,
                 bee
                 propagated
                 untill
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Antichrist
                 should
                 com
                 ,
                 who
                 should
                 suppress
                 the
                 same
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 in
                 the
                 thirtieth
                 year
                 of
                 his
                 age
                 was
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 baptized
                 ,
                 whereon
                 hee
                 entred
                 into
                 the
                 Ministerie
                 ,
                 and
                 
                 began
                 to
                 preach
                 :
                 These
                 thirtie
                 years
                 beeing
                 added
                 unto
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 five
                 years
                 ,
                 make
                 up
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Antichrist
                 came
                 forth
                 ,
                 
                   the
                   holie
                   Citie
                   was
                   trodden
                   under
                   foot
                   ,
                   the
                   two
                   Witnesses
                   were
                   cloathed
                   with
                   sackcloth
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   woman
                
                 (
                 the
                 Church
                 )
                 
                   fled
                   into
                   the
                   Wilderness
                
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 six
                 thousand
                 years
                 from
                 the
                 Creation
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 do
                 exspire
                 with
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 as
                 was
                 made
                 apparent
                 in
                 
                   Clavi
                   Apocalypt
                
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 That
                 also
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 years
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 from
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 until
                 the
                 deluge
                 :
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 since
                 the
                 Birth
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 reckoned
                 thus
                 far
                 do
                 end
                 alike
                 .
                 So
                 as
                 there
                 the
                 wicked
                 world
                 was
                 punished
                 ,
                 and
                 cut
                 off
                 by
                 the
                 Deluge
                 ,
                 so
                 here
                 the
                 enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 shall
                 bee
                 destroied
                 with
                 fire
                 and
                 brimstone
                 ,
                 
                   Revelations
                   19.
                
                 vers
                 20.
                 
                 
                   Dan.
                   7.
                
                 vers
                 11.
                 
              
               
               
                 4.
                 
                 The
                 Romane
                 Monarchie
                 began
                 at
                 that
                 time
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 
                   Eccentricitas
                   Solis
                
                 was
                 the
                 greatest
                 ;
                 and
                 whereby
                 som
                 Astrologers
                 conclude
                 
                   cum
                   Georgio
                   Joachimo
                   Rhetico
                
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 same
                 shall
                 decaie
                 and
                 end
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 said
                 Eccentricitas
                 shall
                 bee
                 least
                 .
                 And
                 becaus
                 som
                 Astronomers
                 do
                 refer
                 that
                 to
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 third
                 year
                 ,
                 which
                 com's
                 verie
                 nigh
                 to
                 our
                 term
                 ,
                 I
                 thought
                 good
                 to
                 make
                 here
                 mention
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 leaving
                 
                   vim
                   probandi
                
                 to
                 the
                 trial
                 of
                 the
                 Reader
                 .
                 Dolingius
                 conclude's
                 in
                 suo
                 Antichristo
                 Tymbogeronte
                 verie
                 well
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Daniel
                 :
                 chapter
                 6.
                 vers
                 27.
                 that
                 by
                 this
                 revolution
                 the
                 Saints
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 High
                 shall
                 possess
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Two
                 Prophesies
                 of
                 the
                 Turks
                 ,
                 concerning
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 which
                 this
                 present
                 young
                 Turkish
                 Emperor
                 is
                 the
                 last
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 hee
                 under
                 whom
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 shall
                 have
                 it's
                 final
                 period
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 the
                 first
                 Prophecie
                 doth
                 Franciscus
                 
                 Sansoninus
                 
                   make
                   mention
                   in
                   a
                   little
                   book
                   ,
                   which
                   hee
                
                 Anno
                 1570.
                 
                   published
                   in
                   Print
                   ,
                   wherein
                   hee
                   made
                   a
                   collection
                   of
                   som
                   Prophesies
                   ,
                   among
                   which
                   also
                   this
                   is
                   set
                   down
                   ,
                   as
                
                 Joannes
                 Wolsius
                 .
                 Tom.
                 2.
                 lect
                 .
                 memor
                 .
                 p.
                 803.
                 
                   writeth
                   :
                   That
                   under
                   the
                   fifteenth
                   Turkish
                   Emperor
                   ,
                   the
                   Turkish
                   Empire
                   shall
                   have
                   an
                   end
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Antonius
                   Torquatus
                   Medec
                   .
                   D.
                   Professor
                   .
                   Ferrariensis
                   ,
                   &
                   Astrologus
                   insignis
                
                 maketh
                 also
                 mention
                 hereof
                 among
                 his
                 Prophesies
                 ,
                 which
                 hee
                 adscribed
                 to
                 Matthias
                 ,
                 King
                 of
                 Hungaria
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 four
                 hundred
                 eightïeth
                 year
                 ,
                 when
                 hee
                 writeth
                 thus
                 :
              
               
                 The
                 Ottoman
                 hous
                 shall
                 in
                 13.
                 14.
                 or
                 15.
                 heads
                 
                   (
                   Wolfius
                   Tom.
                   2.
                   pag.
                   896.
                
                 calleth
                 it
                 ,
                 ramum
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 branch
                 or
                 bough
                 :
                 )
                 diminish
                 and
                 decaie
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 not
                 go
                 beyond
                 that
                 number
                 ;
                 For
                 after
                 this
                 shall
                 hee
                 by
                 a
                 terrible
                 chance
                 bee
                 defeated
                 and
                 cut
                 off
                 :
                 After
                 this
                 Turkish
                 Emperor's
                 death
                 there
                 shall
                 arise
                 among
                 their
                 Princes
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 that
                 relate
                 to
                 
                 the
                 Ottoman
                 Familie
                 such
                 a
                 dissention
                 ,
                 and
                 combustion
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 shall
                 pitifully
                 cut
                 one
                 another's
                 throats
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 bee
                 horribly
                 spoiled
                 ,
                 and
                 destroied
                 by
                 forreign
                 Nations
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 This
                 number
                 of
                 15
                 heads
                 must
                 bee
                 computed
                 from
                 the
                 first
                 Ottoman
                 ,
                 not
                 
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   heads
                
                 of
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Emperors
                 ,
                 who
                 have
                 reigned
                 ,
                 for
                 there
                 are
                 a
                 great
                 manie
                 more
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 but
                 
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   members
                   ,
                   or
                   branches
                   of
                
                 the
                 Ottoman
                 Familie
                 .
                 Ottomannus
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Ozman
                   Gazi
                
                 is
                 the
                 root
                 and
                 Origine
                 of
                 this
                 house
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 
                   stipes
                   communis
                
                 .
                 Hee
                 was
                 by
                 the
                 King
                 of
                 Persia
                 established
                 in
                 the
                 possession
                 of
                 Carmania
                 ,
                 and
                 dignified
                 with
                 the
                 roial
                 title
                 .
              
               
                 
                   From
                   this
                   did
                   spring
                
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Urchan
                   Gasi
                
                 ,
                 who
                 died
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 three
                 hundred
                 fiftieth
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Murat
                 ,
                 who
                 took
                 Adrianople
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtieth
                 year
                 :
                 and
                 died
                 
                   Anno
                   1390.
                
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Bajaze●
                   1.
                
                 whom
                 Tamerlan
                 carried
                 away
                 prisoner
                 .
              
               
               
                 4.
                 
                 
                   Solyman
                   1.
                
                 otherwise
                 called
                 Calepinus
                 :
                 After
                 him
                 reigned
                 his
                 two
                 brothers
                 ,
                 namely
                 Musa
                 who
                 was
                 killed
                 by
                 
                   Mahomet
                   .
                   Mahomet
                   1.
                
                 died
                 
                   Anno
                   1422.
                
                 
                 These
                 three
                 Brothers
                 belong
                 to
                 one
                 Member
                 ,
                 or
                 branch
                 ,
                 nay
                 ,
                 som
                 do
                 not
                 compute
                 Solyman
                 and
                 Musa
                 at
                 all
                 ,
                 becaus
                 Solyman
                 was
                 Musa
                 ,
                 and
                 Musa
                 by
                 Mahomet
                 suddenly
                 dispossest
                 of
                 the
                 Imperial
                 Government
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Murat
                 
                   2d
                   died
                
                 Anno
                 1450.
                 
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 Mahomet
                 2d
                 who
                 took
                 
                   Constantinople
                   Anno
                   1453
                
                 ,
                 and
                 died
                 1481.
                 
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 Bajazet
                 2d
                 was
                 poisoned
                 by
                 his
                 son
                 Selim
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 twelfth
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 Selim
                 1.
                 died
                 Anno
                 1520.
                 
              
               
                 9.
                 
                 Solyman
                 2d
                 died
                 at
                 Ziget
                 ,
                 in
                 Hungaria
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 six
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 10.
                 
                 Selim
                 
                   2d
                   died
                
                 Anno
                 1575.
                 
              
               
                 11.
                 
                 Murat
                 .
                 3d
                 born
                 of
                 a
                 Jewish
                 woman
                 
                   Solomon
                   Swiccard
                
                 in
                 his
                 Itinerarie
                 relateth
                 ,
                 died
                 
                   Anno
                   1595.
                
                 
              
               
                 12.
                 
                 Mahomet
                 
                   3d
                   died
                
                 Anno
                 1603.
                 
              
               
               
                 13.
                 
                 Achmet
                 1.
                 died
                 Anno
                 1617.
                 
              
               
                 Whereupon
                 was
                 Mustaff
                 ,
                 brother
                 of
                 this
                 Achmet
                 ,
                 chosen
                 
                   Anno
                   1617.
                
                 
                 And
                 becaus
                 hee
                 was
                 found
                 to
                 bee
                 of
                 so
                 soft
                 a
                 disposition
                 ,
                 that
                 hee
                 was
                 unfit
                 to
                 govern
                 ,
                 the
                 Mufties
                 and
                 the
                 principal
                 Bassas
                 partly
                 by
                 fair
                 means
                 ,
                 and
                 partly
                 by
                 threatnings
                 ,
                 wrought
                 so
                 far
                 with
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 hee
                 resigned
                 the
                 Empire
                 .
              
               
                 14.
                 
                 These
                 set
                 up
                 Osman
                 or
                 Ottoman
                 .
                 2d
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 Achmet
                 .
                 This
                 same
                 caused
                 not
                 Mustaff
                 to
                 bee
                 strangled
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 usual
                 ;
                 but
                 onely
                 restrained
                 him
                 .
                 Wherefore
                 ,
                 when
                 
                   Anno
                   1622.
                
                 this
                 Osman
                 was
                 in
                 a
                 tumult
                 thrust
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Imperial
                 Seat
                 ,
                 and
                 strangled
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Janizaries
                 found
                 this
                 Mustaff
                 under
                 restraint
                 ,
                 it
                 happened
                 that
                 they
                 exalted
                 him
                 the
                 second
                 time
                 unto
                 the
                 Imperial
                 Crown
                 .
                 But
                 becaus
                 hee
                 liked
                 not
                 the
                 the
                 emploiment
                 ,
                 hee
                 resigned
                 it
                 to
                 Osman
                 his
                 brother
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 Murath
                 the
                 second
                 Son
                 of
                 Achmet
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 Imperial
                 dignitie
                 
                   Anno
                   1622
                
                 ,
                 and
                 died
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fortieth
                 year
                 .
              
               
               
                 To
                 him
                 succeeded
                 Ibrahim
                 the
                 third
                 son
                 of
                 Achmet
                 ,
                 the
                 20th
                 of
                 
                   Februarie
                   1640.
                
                 
                 Hee
                 and
                 his
                 brother
                 Osman
                 had
                 the
                 same
                 misfortune
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 both
                 strangled
                 with
                 three
                 of
                 his
                 Sultanaes
                 in
                 
                   Sept.
                   Anno
                   1648.
                
                 by
                 the
                 rebellious
                 Janizaries
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 three
                 brothers
                 ,
                 Sons
                 of
                 Achmet
                 belong
                 to
                 one
                 branch
                 .
              
               
                 15.
                 
                 Achmet
                 second
                 Son
                 of
                 Ibrahim
                 ,
                 an
                 uncircumcised
                 child
                 of
                 six
                 years
                 of
                 age
                 ,
                 was
                 set
                 upon
                 the
                 Imperial
                 Seat
                 ,
                 in
                 
                   Sept
                   :
                   1648.
                
                 and
                 made
                 the
                 Head
                 over
                 manie
                 barbarous
                 Nations
                 ,
                 and
                 will
                 bee
                 (
                 if
                 this
                 Prophesie
                 hold's
                 )
                 the
                 last
                 Emperor
                 of
                 the
                 Ottoman
                 Government
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 second
                 Prophesie
                 is
                 described
                 by
                 Bartholomew
                 Georgieviez
                 
                   in
                   his
                   Epitome
                   ,
                   and
                   after
                   him
                   by
                
                 Philippus
                 Lonicerus
                 
                   in
                   his
                   Turkish
                   Chronicl
                
                 .
                 lib.
                 3.
                 
                   in
                   the
                   beginning
                
                 ,
                 pag.
                 204.
                 
                 
                   As
                   also
                   by
                
                 Adam
                 Nachen
                 Moser
                 in
                 Prognostico
                 Theolog.
                 lib.
                 3.
                 pag.
                 65.
                 seqq
                 .
                 Wolfius
                 Tom.
                 2.
                 lect
                 .
                 mem
                 .
                 pag.
                 293.
                 
                 Christoph.
                 Besoldus
                 in
                 consider
                 .
                 legis
                 Sectae
                 Sarac
                 .
                 pag.
                 47.
                 
                   which
                   is
                   to
                   this
                   effect
                
                 .
              
               
               
                 Our
                 (
                 Turkish
                 )
                 
                   Emperor
                   shall
                   com
                   ,
                   and
                   take
                   from
                   a
                   Heathenish
                
                 (
                 so
                 they
                 call
                 the
                 Christians
                 )
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 King
                 ,
                 or
                 Prince
                 ,
                 his
                 Kingdom
                 ,
                 hee
                 will
                 bring
                 under
                 his
                 power
                 ,
                 and
                 conquer
                 a
                 red
                 Apple
                 .
              
               
                 
                   In
                   case
                   the
                   Christians
                   in
                   the
                   seventh
                   year
                   shall
                   not
                   draw
                   their
                   swords
                   ,
                   hee
                   shall
                   reign
                   over
                   them
                   twelv
                   years
                   ,
                
                 build
                 houses
                 ,
                 plant
                 Vineyards
                 ,
                 hedg
                 in
                 gardens
                 ,
                 beget
                 children
                 .
                 But
                 after
                 twelv
                 years
                 ,
                 when
                 hee
                 hath
                 had
                 the
                 red
                 apple
                 under
                 his
                 power
                 ,
                 the
                 Christians
                 shall
                 draw
                 their
                 swords
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 themselvs
                 into
                 a
                 posture
                 of
                 defence
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 the
                 Turk
                 to
                 flight
                 .
              
               
                 
                   By
                   the
                   red
                   Apple
                   is
                   understood
                   the
                   Oriental
                   ,
                   or
                   Constantinopolitan
                   Empire
                   ,
                
                 becaus
                 the
                 occidental
                 was
                 long
                 before
                 exspired
                 .
                 By
                 the
                 twelv
                 years
                 are
                 signified
                 twelv
                 times
                 under
                 twelv
                 Turkish
                 heads
                 ,
                 who
                 should
                 reign
                 after
                 the
                 taking
                 of
                 Constantinople
                 .
                 Now
                 Constantinople
                 was
                 taken
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 third
                 year
                 by
                 Mahomet
                 the
                 second
                 :
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 twelv
                 years
                 ,
                 
                 or
                 times
                 are
                 computed
                 in
                 manner
                 following
                 :
              
               
                 The
                 first
                 under
                 Mahomet
                 the
                 second
                 until
                 1483.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 second
                 under
                 Bajazet
                 the
                 second
                 until
                 1512.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 third
                 under
                 Selim
                 the
                 first
                 until
                 1520.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 fourth
                 under
                 Solyman
                 the
                 second
                 until
                 1566.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 fifth
                 under
                 Selim
                 the
                 second
                 nntil
                 1575.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 sixth
                 under
                 Murat
                 the
                 third
                 until
                 1595.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 seventh
                 under
                 Mahomet
                 the
                 third
                 until
                 1603.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 eighth
                 under
                 Achmet
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 until
                 1617.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 ninth
                 under
                 Osman
                 the
                 second
                 ,
                 until
                 
                   Zomaii
                   1622.
                
                 
              
               
                 The
                 tenth
                 under
                 Murat
                 the
                 fourth
                 ,
                 until
                 1640.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 eleventh
                 under
                 Ibrahim
                 ,
                 until
                 1648.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 twelfth
                 under
                 Achmet
                 the
                 second
                 the
                 present
                 Emperor
                 until
                 the
                 end
                 .
              
               
               
                 
                   By
                   the
                   words
                   in
                   case
                   the
                   Christians
                   in
                   the
                   seventh
                   year
                   shall
                   not
                   draw
                   their
                   swords
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 is
                 signified
                 ,
                 that
                 under
                 the
                 seventh
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 namely
                 Mahomet
                 the
                 third
                 ,
                 who
                 
                   Anno
                   1595.
                
                 came
                 to
                 the
                 Imperial
                 Crown
                 ,
                 the
                 Turks
                 shall
                 bee
                 in
                 danger
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 case
                 the
                 Christians
                 should
                 not
                 then
                 take
                 their
                 opportunitie
                 ,
                 to
                 emploie
                 their
                 strength
                 ;
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Empire
                 should
                 attein
                 unto
                 the
                 twelfth
                 time
                 .
                 But
                 what
                 good
                 success
                 the
                 Christians
                 had
                 during
                 the
                 reign
                 of
                 this
                 Mahomet
                 the
                 third
                 ,
                 may
                 bee
                 seen
                 in
                 the
                 Hungarian
                 Chronicles
                 of
                 
                   Jerome
                   Ortelius
                
                 ;
                 where
                 it
                 appeareth
                 that
                 
                   Anno
                   1595
                   Sigismund
                   Bathori
                
                 Prince
                 of
                 Transilvania
                 ,
                 did
                 defeat
                 
                   Ferrat
                   Bassa
                
                 in
                 the
                 Moneths
                 of
                 March
                 ,
                 and
                 Maie
                 ,
                 twice
                 one
                 after
                 another
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 
                   Sinan
                   Bassa
                
                 in
                 the
                 moneth
                 of
                 September
                 ,
                 whom
                 ,
                 when
                 in
                 the
                 Moneth
                 of
                 October
                 hee
                 returned
                 with
                 great
                 power
                 ,
                 hee
                 put
                 to
                 flight
                 ,
                 and
                 pursued
                 most
                 fiercely
                 ,
                 and
                 took
                 several
                 strong
                 holds
                 from
                 him
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 26th
                 of
                 
                   October
                   ,
                   1596.
                
                 the
                 Christians
                 
                 also
                 obteined
                 at
                 first
                 the
                 victorie
                 neer
                 Erla
                 ;
                 where
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Emperor
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Ibrahim
                   Bassa
                
                 were
                 put
                 to
                 flight
                 ,
                 and
                 if
                 the
                 Christians
                 had
                 not
                 neglected
                 their
                 opportunitie
                 ,
                 by
                 plundering
                 and
                 dividing
                 the
                 spoil
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 Turkish
                 Camp
                 ;
                 then
                 this
                 Prophesie
                 might
                 have
                 been
                 accomplished
                 .
                 Wherefore
                 it
                 shall
                 com
                 to
                 pass
                 under
                 this
                 childe
                 ,
                 
                   as
                   beeing
                   the
                   twelfth
                
                 ,
                 whereof
                 wee
                 shall
                 know
                 the
                 certaintie
                 by
                 the
                 event
                 .
              
               
                 Now
                 seeing
                 these
                 two
                 Prophesies
                 may
                 bee
                 verie
                 well
                 applied
                 to
                 this
                 purpose
                 ,
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 but
                 relate
                 them
                 here
                 ,
                 especially
                 ,
                 becaus
                 the
                 Turks
                 do
                 remember
                 the
                 same
                 very
                 often
                 ,
                 with
                 great
                 trouble
                 and
                 lamentations
                 ,
                 and
                 men
                 of
                 note
                 do
                 put
                 much
                 weight
                 upon
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 things
                 of
                 great
                 moment
                 .
                 But
                 wee
                 shall
                 leav
                 them
                 for
                 what
                 they
                 are
                 ,
                 becaus
                 none
                 can
                 see
                 upon
                 what
                 grounds
                 ,
                 these
                 and
                 such
                 like
                 Prophesies
                 are
                 built
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 are
                 the
                 motives
                 and
                 reasons
                 ,
                 which
                 lead
                 to
                 a
                 conjecture
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 time
                 
                 which
                 God
                 hath
                 determined
                 ,
                 and
                 indulged
                 to
                 the
                 rage
                 and
                 furie
                 of
                 the
                 enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 is
                 now
                 running
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 with
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord.
                 
              
               
                 Whereby
                 it
                 doth
                 evidently
                 appear
                 :
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 application
                 of
                 the
                 Characters
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 numbers
                 of
                 years
                 (
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 and
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 ,
                 is
                 punctually
                 and
                 without
                 anie
                 force
                 incident
                 to
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 and
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 years
                 cannot
                 bee
                 applied
                 to
                 anie
                 other
                 year
                 ,
                 neither
                 before
                 nor
                 after
                 ,
                 then
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 foundation
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 at
                 Jerusalem
                 was
                 destroied
                 by
                 God
                 himself
                 :
                 As
                 it
                 appeareth
                 in
                 
                   Clavi
                   Apocalypt
                
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 That
                 when
                 the
                 Epocha
                 of
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 years
                 is
                 
                 referred
                 to
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ,
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 must
                 of
                 necessitie
                 begin
                 from
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 becaus
                 both
                 numbers
                 must
                 together
                 run
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 as
                 may
                 bee
                 read
                 in
                 Daniel
                 chap.
                 12.
                 v.
                 7.
                 and
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 Characters
                 and
                 Arguments
                 formerly
                 alleged
                 do
                 sufficiently
                 prove
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 must
                 begin
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 
                   Beast
                   with
                   ten
                   horns
                   is
                   risen
                   up
                
                 from
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 until
                 the
                 four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 .
                 Becaus
                 
                   Anno
                   395.
                
                 the
                 first
                 division
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 hapned
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 Beast
                 got
                 two
                 horns
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 five
                 all
                 the
                 ten
                 horns
                 in
                 the
                 Beast
                 appeared
                 .
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 That
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Histories
                 ,
                 not
                 anie
                 year
                 betwixt
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 and
                 four
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 can
                 bee
                 found
                 
                 out
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Characters
                 may
                 bee
                 so
                 punctually
                 and
                 suitably
                 applied
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 .
              
               
                 Wherefore
                 wee
                 have
                 good
                 reason
                 to
                 stand
                 to
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 fifth
                 year
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 exspect
                 the
                 issue
                 with
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 year
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 ;
                 especially
                 ,
                 becaus
                 the
                 killing
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 ,
                 besides
                 all
                 this
                 ,
                 doth
                 eventually
                 prove
                 the
                 thing
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 first
                 Objection
                 .
              
               
                 BUt
                 if
                 perhaps
                 som
                 bodie
                 should
                 still
                 conceiv
                 ,
                 notwithstanding
                 the
                 forementioned
                 grounds
                 ,
                 whereby
                 it
                 is
                 made
                 out
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 numbers
                 have
                 their
                 accomplishment
                 in
                 the
                 year
                 one
                 thousand
                 six
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 fifth
                 ,
                 yet
                 that
                 wee
                 ought
                 not
                 so
                 precisely
                 to
                 set
                 all
                 our
                 exspectation
                 upon
                 that
                 year
                 ,
                 him
                 I
                 shall
                 leav
                 to
                 his
                 opinion
                 .
                 But
                 wish
                 him
                 to
                 consider
                 withal
              
               
               
                 1.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 Angel
                 Daniel
                 ,
                 chap.
                 12.
                 vers
                 7.
                 
                   held
                   up
                   his
                   right
                   hand
                   ,
                   and
                   his
                   left
                   hand
                   unto
                   Heaven
                   ,
                   and
                   swore
                   by
                   him
                   that
                   liveth
                   for
                   ever
                   ,
                   that
                   it
                   shall
                   bee
                   for
                   a
                   time
                   ,
                   times
                   and
                   a
                   half
                   ,
                
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 .
                 And
                 that
                 from
                 the
                 abominable
                 desolation
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 ,
                 till
                 that
                 time
                 ,
                 there
                 shall
                 bee
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 ninetie
                 years
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 himself
                 Revel
                 .
                 chap.
                 10.
                 vers
                 5
                 ,
                 6.
                 
                   lifted
                   up
                   his
                   hand
                   to
                   Heaven
                   ,
                   and
                   swore
                   by
                   him
                   that
                   liveth
                   for
                   ever
                   and
                   ever
                   ,
                   who
                   created
                   Heaven
                   and
                   the
                   things
                   that
                   therein
                   are
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   things
                   that
                   therein
                   are
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   sea
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   things
                   which
                   are
                   therein
                   ,
                   that
                   there
                   shall
                   bee
                   time
                   no
                   longer
                   .
                
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 there
                 shall
                 bee
                 no
                 delaie
                 ,
                 
                   Luke
                   12.
                   45.
                   
                   Hebrews
                   10.
                   37.
                
                 or
                 that
                 anie
                 other
                 time
                 should
                 com
                 between
                 but
                 in
                 the
                 daies
                 of
                 the
                 voice
                 of
                 the
                 seventh
                 Angel
                 ,
                 when
                 hee
                 shall
                 sound
                 the
                 Trumpet
                 ,
                 the
                 Mysterie
                 of
                 God
                 should
                 bee
                 accomplished
                 ,
                 as
                 hee
                 hath
                 declared
                 unto
                 his
                 Servants
                 and
                 Prophets
                 .
              
               
               
                 
                   These
                   things
                   saith
                   the
                   Son
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   who
                   hath
                   his
                   eies
                   like
                   unto
                   a
                   flame
                   of
                   fire
                   ,
                
                 Revel
                 .
                 chap.
                 2.
                 vers
                 18.
                 
                 
                   These
                   things
                   saith
                   hee
                   that
                   is
                   holie
                   ,
                   hee
                   that
                   is
                   true
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 3.
                 vers
                 7.
                 
                 
                   These
                   things
                   saith
                   the
                   Amen
                   ,
                   the
                   faithful
                   and
                   true
                   witness
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 3.
                 vers
                 14.
                 
                 Who
                 would
                 not
                 then
                 believ
                 him
                 ?
                 Seeing
                 then
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 God's
                 eternal
                 decree
                 Antichrist
                 shall
                 rage
                 no
                 longer
                 then
                 3
                 ½
                 times
                 ,
                 or
                 one
                 thousand
                 two
                 hundred
                 sixtie
                 years
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 these
                 are
                 exspired
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Mysterie
                 of
                 God
                 shall
                 immediately
                 bee
                 fulfilled
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Angel
                 and
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 do
                 testifie
                 with
                 a
                 great
                 Oath
                 :
                 Wee
                 have
                 no
                 reason
                 to
                 doubt
                 of
                 the
                 event
                 ,
                 but
                 good
                 reason
                 to
                 look
                 up
                 ,
                 and
                 lift
                 up
                 our
                 heads
                 ,
                 
                   for
                   our
                   Redemption
                   draweth
                   nigh
                
                 .
                 Luke
                 21.
                 vers
                 28.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 second
                 Objection
                 .
              
               
                 IT
                 may
                 bee
                 also
                 objected
                 ,
                 that
                 such
                 things
                 ought
                 not
                 to
                 bee
                 dived
                 and
                 
                 searched
                 into
                 ,
                 becaus
                 they
                 are
                 meer
                 Mysteries
                 &
                 hidden
                 things
                 ,
                 wherein
                 a
                 great
                 manie
                 by
                 their
                 extravagancies
                 have
                 lost
                 themselvs
                 ,
                 insomuch
                 ,
                 that
                 even
                 the
                 greatest
                 Divines
                 ,
                 and
                 scholars
                 are
                 very
                 warie
                 and
                 cautious
                 how
                 to
                 meddle
                 with
                 the
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 therefore
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 and
                 should
                 remain
                 a
                 Book
                 sealed
                 ,
                 till
                 such
                 time
                 that
                 the
                 accomplishment
                 of
                 things
                 doth
                 reveal
                 it
                 ;
                 But
                 especially
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 bee
                 observed
                 ,
                 what
                 answer
                 Christ
                 returned
                 to
                 his
                 Disciples
                 upon
                 their
                 curious
                 question
                 concerning
                 the
                 restauration
                 of
                 the
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 
                   Israël
                   ,
                   Acts
                   1.
                
                 vers
                 7.
                 when
                 hee
                 said
                 :
                 
                   It
                   is
                   not
                   for
                   you
                   to
                   know
                   the
                   times
                   or
                   seasons
                   ,
                   which
                   the
                   Father
                   hath
                   put
                   in
                   his
                   own
                   power
                   .
                
              
               
                 Whereupon
                 wee
                 answer
                 :
                 that
                 the
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 is
                 indeed
                 full
                 of
                 Mysteries
                 ,
                 which
                 will
                 remain
                 Mysteries
                 and
                 hidden
                 things
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 accomplishment
                 doth
                 discover
                 ,
                 and
                 reveal
                 them
                 to
                 us
                 ,
                 and
                 till
                 wee
                 by
                 the
                 application
                 of
                 Histories
                 ,
                 and
                 events
                 ,
                 see
                 before
                 our
                 eies
                 the
                 effect
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 by
                 
                 this
                 and
                 that
                 thing
                 hath
                 been
                 meant
                 .
                 But
                 it
                 doth
                 not
                 follow
                 therefore
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Revelation
                 ought
                 to
                 bee
                 laid
                 aside
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 wee
                 ought
                 not
                 at
                 all
                 to
                 search
                 what
                 hath
                 been
                 already
                 fulfilled
                 ,
                 or
                 is
                 shortly
                 to
                 bee
                 exspected
                 ,
                 chiefly
                 concerning
                 the
                 fulfilling
                 of
                 the
                 determined
                 time
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 shall
                 bee
                 destroied
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Church
                 bee
                 brought
                 to
                 a
                 quiet
                 and
                 peaceable
                 condition
                 .
                 Whereas
                 Daniel
                 did
                 the
                 like
                 ,
                 and
                 did
                 observ
                 by
                 Books
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 years
                 whereof
                 the
                 Lord
                 spoke
                 &c.
                 
                   Daniel
                   9.
                
                 vers
                 2.
                 
                 And
                 St
                 John
                 writeth
                 concerning
                 his
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 chapter
                 1.
                 vers
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Blessed
                   is
                   hee
                   that
                   readeth
                   ,
                   and
                   they
                   that
                   hear
                   the
                   words
                   of
                   this
                   Prophesie
                   ,
                   and
                   keep
                   those
                   things
                   ,
                   which
                   are
                   written
                   therein
                   .
                
              
               
                 For
                 the
                 Revelation
                 is
                 a
                 book
                 of
                 Memorable
                 Acts.
                 Wherein
                 is
                 foretold
                 ,
                 how
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 things
                 shall
                 befal
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 under
                 which
                 the
                 Church
                 doth
                 subsist
                 ;
                 Now
                 manie
                 things
                 have
                 
                 been
                 already
                 fulfilled
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 five
                 hundred
                 fiftie
                 years
                 by-past
                 ;
                 and
                 if
                 wee
                 compare
                 the
                 Histories
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 things
                 hapned
                 in
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 Revelation
                 ;
                 wee
                 shall
                 discover
                 cleerly
                 ,
                 how
                 far
                 the
                 accomplishment
                 reacheth
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 wee
                 may
                 exspect
                 ,
                 ere
                 long
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 things
                 represented
                 are
                 no
                 more
                 Mysteries
                 ,
                 and
                 hidden
                 things
                 ,
                 but
                 cleer
                 and
                 accomplished
                 Acts
                 unto
                 us
                 .
                 But
                 hee
                 that
                 forbeareth
                 to
                 read
                 this
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 not
                 versed
                 in
                 the
                 Old
                 and
                 New
                 Romane
                 Histories
                 ,
                 and
                 knoweth
                 not
                 how
                 to
                 distinguish
                 the
                 times
                 of
                 the
                 Revolutions
                 and
                 changes
                 ,
                 but
                 confoundeth
                 the
                 Apocalyptical
                 numbers
                 ,
                 and
                 doth
                 make
                 manie
                 Epoches
                 ,
                 (
                 whereas
                 they
                 comprehend
                 nothing
                 but
                 relata
                 and
                 Correlata
                 )
                 or
                 carelesly
                 passeth
                 by
                 the
                 application
                 of
                 the
                 numbers
                 as
                 an
                 hidden
                 Mysterie
                 (
                 which
                 indeed
                 is
                 the
                 main
                 keie
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Revelation
                   :
                
                 )
                 To
                 him
                 must
                 the
                 Revelation
                 needs
                 bee
                 full
                 of
                 Mysteries
                 and
                 obscurities
                 ,
                 and
                 remain
                 a
                 
                 sealed
                 and
                 unopened
                 Revelation
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 why
                 manie
                 learned
                 men
                 of
                 note
                 (
                 wee
                 do
                 not
                 speak
                 of
                 all
                 )
                 have
                 been
                 much
                 mistaken
                 in
                 their
                 expositions
                 ;
                 The
                 causes
                 amongst
                 others
                 have
                 been
                 these
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 antient
                 Interpreters
                 in
                 the
                 primitive
                 times
                 have
                 applied
                 to
                 their
                 times
                 ,
                 manie
                 things
                 ,
                 which
                 yet
                 as
                 then
                 had
                 no
                 relation
                 to
                 them
                 .
                 The
                 Modern
                 Interpreters
                 do
                 follow
                 their
                 steps
                 ,
                 (
                 not
                 minding
                 so
                 much
                 the
                 Historie
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Autoritie
                 of
                 the
                 Interpreters
                 ,
                 whereby
                 they
                 lead
                 themselves
                 and
                 others
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 waie
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Secondly
                 ,
                 the
                 Method
                 and
                 Harmonie
                 is
                 not
                 observed
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 Revelation
                 all
                 things
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 in
                 good
                 order
                 ,
                 what
                 from
                 time
                 to
                 time
                 should
                 com
                 to
                 pass
                 ,
                 the
                 Synchronismes
                 or
                 concurrencies
                 of
                 times
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 ,
                 one
                 after
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Revolutions
                 and
                 changes
                 in
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 and
                 civil
                 States
                 ,
                 are
                 exactly
                 and
                 punctually
                 distinguished
                 ;
                 even
                 as
                 an
                 excellent
                 and
                 
                 well-versed
                 Historian
                 is
                 wont
                 to
                 do
                 in
                 the
                 description
                 of
                 humane
                 actions
                 ;
                 but
                 contrarie
                 to
                 all
                 this
                 the
                 Interpreters
                 do
                 pervert
                 ,
                 overturn
                 ,
                 and
                 disturb
                 the
                 Method
                 ,
                 seek
                 and
                 finde
                 out
                 by-waies
                 of
                 error
                 the
                 things
                 as
                 relata
                 belong
                 to
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 ,
                 they
                 set
                 down
                 as
                 following
                 one
                 another
                 .
                 What
                 shall
                 com
                 to
                 pass
                 after
                 the
                 fall
                 of
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 they
                 do
                 place
                 before
                 it
                 ,
                 oftentimes
                 not
                 knowing
                 themselvs
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 stick
                 ,
                 or
                 how
                 they
                 shall
                 winde
                 themselvs
                 out
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Besides
                 they
                 mistake
                 and
                 confound
                 the
                 States
                 one
                 with
                 another
                 ,
                 not
                 observing
                 where
                 mention
                 is
                 made
                 of
                 the
                 Ecclesiastical
                 ,
                 or
                 civil
                 State
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 manie
                 times
                 they
                 applie
                 Monastical
                 matters
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 actions
                 of
                 Antichrist
                 ,
                 to
                 that
                 which
                 in
                 the
                 Revelation
                 is
                 spoken
                 of
                 the
                 civil
                 State.
                 And
                 hence
                 it
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 more
                 one
                 doth
                 read
                 Expositors
                 ,
                 the
                 more
                 one
                 is
                 confounded
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 that
                 therefore
                 the
                 Revelation
                 
                 should
                 bee
                 a
                 book
                 shut
                 up
                 ,
                 is
                 contrarie
                 to
                 the
                 letter
                 of
                 the
                 cleer
                 text
                 ;
                 for
                 ,
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     seven
                     Epistles
                     were
                     never
                     sealed
                     .
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Lamb
                     opened
                     the
                     book
                     sealed
                     ,
                     Revel
                     .
                     chap.
                     6.
                     and
                     8.
                     
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     third
                     was
                     a
                     little
                     open
                     book
                     ,
                     chap.
                     10.
                     vers
                     2.
                     8.
                     
                  
                   
                     4.
                     
                     
                       And
                       in
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                    
                     Revelation
                     
                       the
                       Son
                       of
                       God
                       saith
                       to
                    
                     John
                     :
                     Seal
                     not
                     the
                     sayings
                     of
                     the
                     Prophesie
                     of
                     this
                     book
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     time
                     is
                     at
                     hand
                     .
                     
                       chap.
                       22.
                       ver
                       .
                       10.
                    
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 And
                 although
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Daniel
                 was
                 commanded
                 to
                 close
                 up
                 ,
                 and
                 seal
                 the
                 book
                 of
                 his
                 Prophesie
                 ,
                 chap.
                 12.
                 vers
                 4.
                 9.
                 yet
                 no
                 longer
                 till
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 end
                 ;
                 for
                 afterwards
                 the
                 said
                 Prophesie
                 was
                 unsealed
                 by
                 the
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John.
                 Therefore
                 it
                 is
                 added
                 :
                 Man
                 shall
                 run
                 to
                 and
                 fro
                 ,
                 and
                 knowledg
                 shall
                 bee
                 increased
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   answer
                   our
                   Saviour
                   Christ
                   gave
                   ,
                
                 Acts
                 1.
                 vers
                 7.
                 is
                 very
                 impertinently
                 
                 applied
                 ,
                 and
                 objected
                 to
                 this
                 purpose
                 .
                 For
                 hee
                 speaketh
                 there
                 of
                 times
                 and
                 seasons
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 
                   de
                   tempore
                   occasionato
                   sive
                   tempestivo
                
                 ,
                 as
                 Ausonius
                 declareth
                 it
                 ,
                 when
                 a
                 good
                 opportunitie
                 is
                 presented
                 ,
                 to
                 go
                 on
                 in
                 a
                 business
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 Gospel
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 ,
                 chapter
                 2.
                 vers
                 4.
                 when
                 Christ
                 saith
                 ,
                 
                   Mine
                   hour
                   is
                   not
                   yet
                   com
                
                 ;
                 and
                 yet
                 nevertheless
                 within
                 a
                 little
                 while
                 hee
                 doth
                 supplie
                 Wine
                 ,
                 But
                 here
                 wee
                 consider
                 the
                 time
                 in
                 general
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 determined
                 upon
                 the
                 Blasphemies
                 and
                 persecution
                 of
                 the
                 Antichrist
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 what
                 year
                 it
                 should
                 begin
                 or
                 end
                 ,
                 but
                 wee
                 do
                 not
                 compute
                 the
                 daie
                 or
                 hour
                 ,
                 wherein
                 hee
                 shall
                 bee
                 overthrown
                 .
                 Besides
                 Christ
                 doth
                 speak
                 of
                 the
                 times
                 and
                 seasons
                 ,
                 which
                 the
                 Father
                 hath
                 put
                 in
                 his
                 own
                 power
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 not
                 revealed
                 :
                 Here
                 wee
                 consider
                 the
                 years
                 which
                 the
                 Father
                 hath
                 not
                 reserved
                 as
                 a
                 secret
                 to
                 his
                 own
                 power
                 ,
                 but
                 revealed
                 to
                 us
                 by
                 his
                 Son.
                 
              
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 third
                 objection
                 .
              
               
                 THe
                 strongest
                 and
                 chiefest
                 objection
                 is
                 :
                 That
                 in
                 general
                 all
                 the
                 Divines
                 and
                 States-men
                 write
                 ,
                 and
                 hold
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 ,
                 and
                 Romane
                 Papacie
                 shall
                 continue
                 until
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 be
                 removed
                 ,
                 and
                 come
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 comming
                 of
                 Christ
                 to
                 the
                 last
                 Judgment
                 .
              
               
                 Answer
                 .
                 The
                 Revelation
                 of
                 St
                 John
                 doth
                 intimate
                 no
                 such
                 thing
                 ,
                 but
                 contradicteth
                 it
                 plainly
                 .
                 For
                 after
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 the
                 Citie
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 chapter
                 18.
                 
                 
                   There
                   was
                   heard
                   a
                   great
                   joie
                   in
                   heaven
                   ,
                
                 chapter
                 19.
                 vers
                 first
                 till
                 the
                 ninth
                 .
                 The
                 heaven
                 is
                 opened
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 who
                 chapter
                 6.
                 vers
                 2.
                 at
                 the
                 opening
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 seal
                 
                   went
                   forth
                   conquering
                   and
                   to
                   conquer
                   upon
                   a
                   white
                   hors
                   ,
                
                 presenteth
                 himself
                 here
                 again
                 upon
                 a
                 white
                 hors
                 
                   as
                   a
                   Conqueror
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 vers
                 11
                 ,
                 12
                 ,
                 15
                 ,
                 16.
                 
                 
                   Whom
                   the
                   Armies
                   which
                   
                   are
                   in
                   heaven
                   follow
                   upon
                   white-horses
                   ,
                   cloathed
                   in
                   fine
                   linnen
                   ,
                   white
                   and
                   clean
                   .
                
                 vers
                 14.
                 
                 These
                 are
                 the
                 Martyrs
                 ,
                 
                   to
                   everie
                   one
                   of
                   whom
                   are
                   given
                   white
                   robes
                   ,
                
                 chapter
                 6.
                 vers
                 11.
                 
                 Nay
                 ,
                 
                   These
                   are
                   they
                   which
                   came
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   tribulation
                   ,
                   and
                   have
                   washed
                   their
                   robes
                   ,
                
                 chap.
                 7.
                 vers
                 14.
                 
                 
                   These
                   are
                   they
                   that
                   are
                   called
                   and
                   chosen
                   and
                   faithful
                   .
                
                 Chap.
                 17.
                 vers
                 14.
                 
                 Against
                 these
                 are
                 gathered
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Kings
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 armies
                 to
                 make
                 war
                 against
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 end
                 and
                 issue
                 of
                 this
                 war
                 is
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 him
                 the
                 fals
                 Prophet
                 (
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 Romane
                 Empire
                 and
                 Popedom
                 )
                 shall
                 bee
                 taken
                 ,
                 and
                 both
                 cast
                 alive
                 into
                 a
                 lake
                 of
                 fire
                 burning
                 with
                 brimstone
                 .
                 chapter
                 19.
                 vers
                 19
                 ,
                 20.
                 
                 But
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 as
                 their
                 General
                 hath
                 quarters
                 given
                 him
                 in
                 this
                 war
                 ,
                 hee
                 is
                 laid
                 hold
                 on
                 ,
                 and
                 cast
                 into
                 the
                 bottomless
                 pit
                 ,
                 and
                 shut
                 up
                 ,
                 wherein
                 hee
                 remain's
                 bound
                 a
                 thousand
                 years
                 ,
                 that
                 hee
                 should
                 deceiv
                 the
                 Nations
                 no
                 more
                 ,
                 nor
                 bee
                 able
                 to
                 stir
                 them
                 up
                 
                 against
                 the
                 Church
                 .
                 Chapter
                 20.
                 vers
                 1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 mean
                 while
                 the
                 faithful
                 Children
                 of
                 God
                 have
                 their
                 rest
                 .
                 
                   Hebr.
                   4.
                
                 vers
                 1.
                 like
                 as
                 
                   God
                   did
                   rest
                   the
                   seventh
                   daie
                   from
                   all
                   his
                   works
                   ,
                
                 vers
                 4.
                 
                 But
                 the
                 last
                 Judgment
                 and
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 is
                 afterwards
                 described
                 ,
                 chap.
                 20.
                 vers
                 11.
                 till
                 the
                 15th
                 .
              
               
                 Hereunto
                 agreeth
                 the
                 Prophesie
                 of
                 Daniel
                 ,
                 chap.
                 2.
                 vers
                 34
                 ,
                 35.
                 where
                 the
                 Image
                 ,
                 which
                 representeth
                 the
                 four
                 Monarchies
                 is
                 seen
                 ,
                 so
                 long
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 stone
                 smite's
                 the
                 Image
                 upon
                 his
                 feet
                 ,
                 (
                 not
                 at
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 ;
                 for
                 then
                 the
                 feet
                 and
                 toes
                 were
                 not
                 as
                 yet
                 ,
                 but
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 thereof
                 )
                 and
                 break
                 's
                 it
                 to
                 pieces
                 .
                 
                   But
                   the
                   stone
                
                 ,
                 that
                 smite's
                 the
                 Image
                 ,
                 becom's
                 a
                 great
                 mountain
                 (
                 after
                 the
                 breaking
                 and
                 grinding
                 of
                 the
                 four
                 Monarchies
                 to
                 dust
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 a
                 Kingdom
                 that
                 shall
                 break
                 to
                 pieces
                 ,
                 and
                 grinde
                 to
                 dust
                 all
                 these
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 represented
                 by
                 the
                 great
                 Image
                 ,
                 vers
                 44
                 ,
                 45.
                 
              
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 7th
                 chapter
                 vers
                 1.
                 till
                 the
                 
                 8th
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 four
                 Beasts
                 are
                 described
                 the
                 four
                 Monarchies
                 ,
                 which
                 Daniel
                 beheld
                 ,
                 vers
                 9.
                 
                   till
                   the
                   thrones
                   were
                   cast
                   down
                   ,
                
                 as
                 the
                 words
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 Original
                 .
              
               
                 
                   For
                   the
                   ancient
                   of
                   daies
                   did
                   sit
                   ,
                
                 vers
                 9.
                 not
                 for
                 the
                 universal
                 and
                 last
                 judgment
                 which
                 hath
                 been
                 committed
                 unto
                 the
                 Son
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 Chap.
                 5.
                 v.
                 22.
                 but
                 for
                 the
                 particular
                 judgment
                 over
                 the
                 enemies
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 in
                 the
                 fourth
                 Monarchie
                 ,
                 over
                 the
                 fourth
                 Beast
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 Popedome
                 ,
                 which
                 
                   Daniel
                   beheld
                   even
                   till
                   the
                   Beast
                   was
                   slain
                   ,
                   and
                   his
                   bodie
                   destroied
                   and
                   given
                   to
                   the
                   burning
                   flame
                
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 power
                 of
                 the
                 other
                 beasts
                 came
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 vers
                 11
                 ,
                 12.
                 
                 For
                 a
                 set
                 time
                 was
                 determined
                 over
                 them
                 ,
                 how
                 long
                 each
                 of
                 them
                 should
                 last
                 ;
                 The
                 Saints
                 shall
                 bee
                 given
                 into
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 fourth
                 Beast
                 (
                 so
                 long
                 as
                 the
                 Woman
                 rideth
                 on
                 the
                 Beast
                 )
                 
                   until
                   a
                   time
                   ,
                   and
                   times
                   and
                   the
                   dividing
                   of
                   time
                   ,
                
                 vers
                 25.
                 
                 And
                 when
                 these
                 3
                 ½
                 times
                 ,
                 
                   Anno
                   1655
                   ▪
                
                 shall
                 com
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 ,
                 the
                 Judgment
                 of
                 
                 the
                 judgment
                 of
                 the
                 Ancient
                 shall
                 sit
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 his
                 power
                 is
                 taken
                 away
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 it
                 wholly
                 is
                 abolished
                 ,
                 and
                 come's
                 to
                 an
                 end
                 .
                 Vers
                 26.
                 
                 But
                 the
                 world
                 therewith
                 is
                 not
                 destroied
                 ,
                 
                   but
                   the
                   Kingdom
                   and
                   dominion
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   greatness
                   under
                   the
                   whole
                   Heaven
                   shall
                   bee
                   given
                   to
                   the
                   people
                   of
                   the
                   Saints
                   of
                   the
                   most
                   High
                   ,
                   whose
                   Kingdom
                   is
                   an
                   everlasting
                   Kingdom
                   ,
                   and
                   all
                   dominions
                   shall
                   serv
                   and
                   obeie
                   him
                   .
                
                 Vers
                 27.
                 compare
                 vers
                 13
                 ,
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 words
                 of
                 St
                 
                   Paul
                   ,
                   2
                   Thes
                
                 .
                 chap.
                 2.
                 vers
                 8.
                 where
                 hee
                 writeth
                 :
                 
                   And
                   the
                   Lord
                   shall
                   destroie
                   him
                   with
                   the
                   brightness
                   of
                   his
                   coming
                
                 ;
                 are
                 expounded
                 in
                 the
                 Revelations
                 chap.
                 19.
                 vers
                 11.
                 till
                 21.
                 
                 But
                 what
                 may
                 bee
                 the
                 true
                 meaning
                 and
                 sens
                 of
                 these
                 words
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ;
                 I
                 leav
                 to
                 the
                 consideration
                 of
                 judicious
                 Divines
                 .
                 It
                 seem's
                 ,
                 they
                 do
                 not
                 speak
                 of
                 the
                 universal
                 and
                 last
                 Judgment
                 ,
                 which
                 St
                 John
                 describeth
                 in
                 his
                 Revelation
                 .
                 chap.
                 20.
                 vers
                 11
                 ,
                 12
                 ,
                 13
                 ,
                 14.
                 
                 Nay
                 ,
                 the
                 text
                 
                 doth
                 not
                 bear
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 two
                 Acts
                 in
                 the
                 said
                 19.
                 chapter
                 ,
                 vers
                 11.
                 till
                 21.
                 and
                 chapter
                 20.
                 vers
                 11.
                 till
                 15.
                 shall
                 bee
                 counted
                 for
                 one
                 ,
                 or
                 reduced
                 together
                 to
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 ;
                 Becaus
                 it
                 appeareth
                 that
                 one
                 thousand
                 years
                 are
                 interposed
                 .
              
               
                 For
                 the
                 two
                 great
                 Guests
                 ,
                 the
                 Beast
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 fals
                 Prophet
                 are
                 one
                 thousand
                 years
                 before
                 lodged
                 in
                 the
                 Inn
                 ;
                 in
                 the
                 Lake
                 of
                 fire
                 burning
                 with
                 brimstone
                 ,
                 then
                 the
                 Hoast
                 ,
                 the
                 Devil
                 come's
                 ,
                 who
                 after
                 the
                 one
                 thousand
                 years
                 is
                 associated
                 to
                 them
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 .
                 chapter
                 20.
                 vers
                 4.
                 
                 Whereupon
                 immediately
                 vers
                 11.
                 the
                 last
                 Judgment
                 is
                 held
                 .
              
               
                 Wee
                 are
                 here
                 led
                 into
                 the
                 Mysteries
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 wee
                 will
                 not
                 too
                 much
                 presume
                 ,
                 to
                 penetrate
                 ,
                 nor
                 search
                 too
                 far
                 into
                 them
                 ;
                 but
                 wee
                 turn
                 and
                 address
                 our
                 selvs
                 ,
                 both
                 with
                 ears
                 and
                 hearts
                 to
                 the
                 Son
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 who
                 standeth
                 at
                 the
                 door
                 ,
                 knocketh
                 and
                 calleth
                 ;
                 
                   If
                   anie
                   man
                   hear
                   my
                   voice
                   
                   and
                   open
                   the
                   door
                   ,
                   I
                   will
                   com
                   into
                   him
                   ,
                   and
                   will
                   sup
                   with
                   him
                   ,
                   and
                   hee
                   with
                   mee
                   .
                   To
                   him
                   that
                   overcometh
                   ,
                   will
                   I
                   grant
                   to
                   sit
                   with
                   mee
                   in
                   my
                   Throne
                   ,
                   even
                   as
                   I
                   also
                   overcame
                   ,
                   and
                   am
                   set
                   down
                   with
                   my
                   Father
                   in
                   his
                   throne
                   .
                
                 Revelations
                 c.
                 3.
                 vers
                 20
                 ,
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 Blessed
                 is
                 now
                 hee
                 that
                 readeth
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 that
                 hear
                 the
                 words
                 of
                 this
                 Prophesie
                 ,
                 and
                 keep
                 those
                 things
                 which
                 are
                 written
                 therein
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 time
                 is
                 at
                 hand
                 .
                 
                   Chap.
                   1.
                   vers
                   .
                   3.
                
                 
              
               
                 Elessed
                 is
                 hee
                 that
                 keepeth
                 the
                 sayings
                 of
                 of
                 the
                 Poophesie
                 of
                 this
                 book
                 .
                 
                   c.
                   22.
                   v.
                   7.
                
                 
              
               
                 Nay
                 ,
                 blessed
                 are
                 they
                 ,
                 that
                 do
                 his
                 Commandements
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 have
                 right
                 to
                 the
                 tree
                 of
                 life
                 ,
                 and
                 may
                 enter
                 in
                 thorow
                 the
                 gates
                 into
                 the
                 Citie
                 .
                 
                   v.
                   14.
                
                 
              
               
                 To
                 him
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 was
                 ,
                 and
                 which
                 is
                 to
                 com
                 ,
                 the
                 Almightie
                 bee
                 glorie
                 and
                 dominion
                 for
                 ever
                 and
                 ever
                 .
                 Amen
                 .
                 
                   Revel
                   .
                   chap.
                   1.
                   v.
                   6.
                   8.
                   
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               A
               List
               of
               the
               things
               which
               are
               shortly
               to
               com
               to
               pass
               ,
               collected
               out
               of
               the
               XI
               .
               and
               XVI
               .
               Chapters
               of
               the
               REVELATION
               .
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 THe
                 last
                 
                   Actus
                   reformationis
                   sive
                   evacuationis
                
                 of
                 the
                 Evangelical
                 Protestant
                 Churches
                 ,
                 which
                 will
                 appear
                 in
                 
                   Silesia
                   .
                   chap.
                   11.
                   v.
                   7.
                   
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 3
                 ½
                 years
                 following
                 thereon
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 dead
                 bodies
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 Witnesses
                 lie
                 in
                 the
                 street
                 .
                 
                   v.
                   9.
                
                 till
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 continuance
                 of
                 wars
                 in
                 those
                 Kingdoms
                 ,
                 wherein
                 the
                 innocent
                 blood
                 of
                 the
                 Martyrs
                 is
                 avenged
                 .
                 
                   chap.
                   16.
                   v.
                   4.
                
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 The
                 sudden
                 fall
                 of
                 the
                 strong
                 pillar
                 of
                 the
                 Papacie
                 .
                 
                   vers
                   8.
                
                 
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 exaltation
                 of
                 an
                 Evangelical
                 Protestant
                 head
                 .
                 
                   chap.
                   11.
                   v.
                   12.
                
                 
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 A
                 Reformation
                 in
                 Germanie
                 .
                 
                   v.
                   11.
                   12.
                
                 
              
               
                 
                 7.
                 
                 
                   The
                   destruction
                   of
                   the
                   Citie
                   of
                   Rome
                   .
                
                 chap.
                 11.
                 v.
                 13.
                 c.
                 16.
                 vers
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 
                   The
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Turkish
                   Empire
                   .
                
                 chap.
                 11.
                 v.
                 14.
                 c.
                 16.
                 v.
                 12.
                 
              
               
                 9.
                 
                 The
                 controversie
                 of
                 the
                 Jews
                 .
                 
                   c.
                   16.
                   v.
                   12.
                
                 
              
               
                 10.
                 
                 The
                 great
                 endevors
                 of
                 the
                 Papists
                 ,
                 and
                 gathering
                 of
                 all
                 their
                 utmost
                 power
                 .
                 
                   c.
                   16.
                   vers
                   13.
                   c.
                   19.
                   v.
                   16.
                   
                
              
               
                 11.
                 
                 
                   The
                   ruine
                   of
                   the
                   whole
                   Papacie
                   .
                
                 chap.
                 16.
                 vers
                 18.
                 
                   till
                   the
                
                 21.
                 c.
                 19.
                 v.
                 20.
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 12.
                 
                 The
                 accomplishment
                 of
                 the
                 Mysterie
                 of
                 God.
                 
                   c.
                   10.
                   v.
                   7.
                
                 
              
               
                 By
                 which
                 means
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     Devil
                     is
                     cast
                     and
                     shut
                     up
                     in
                     the
                     bottomless
                     pit
                     .
                     
                       chap.
                       20.
                       v.
                       1
                       ,
                       2
                       ,
                       3.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Son
                     of
                     God
                     taketh
                     the
                     possession
                     of
                     the
                     Kingdom
                     ,
                     and
                     reigneth
                     .
                     
                       chap.
                       11.
                       v.
                       15.
                       c.
                       11.
                       v.
                       6.
                       &c.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               And
               the
               Church
               liveth
               in
               peace
               and
               tranquillitie
               .
            
             
               FINIS
               .
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A45748-e600
           
             The
             occasion
             of
             this
             discours
             and
             the
             end
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Gener
             meus
             per
             duas
             Hebdomadas
             abfuit
             Wratislaviam
             missus
             &
             Brigam
             ,
             nihil
             affert
             praeter
             terrores
             ,
             per
             Pacem
             ,
             quae
             derelictis
             ,
             &
             à
             Pace
             exclusis
             nihil
             praeter
             novas
             Conscientiae
             carnificinas
             allatura
             metuitur
             ;
             &
             prodromi
             non
             absunt
             .
             Tractatus
             Germanicos
             (
             de
             Periodicis
             Apocalypticis
             ad
             finem
             decurrentibus
             )
             en
             communico
             tibi
             :
             faxit
             Deus
             ut
             haec
             nè
             pereant
             ;
             neque
             in
             alienas
             veniant
             manus
             .
             Sed
             eâ
             lege
             ut
             Judicium
             de
             his
             expromas
             .
             hujus
             enim
             eliciendi
             causâ
             nobis
             ista
             communicari
             voluit
             autor
             ,
             ut
             quisquis
             legeret
             ,
             judicet
             simul
             ,
             &
             censuram
             addat
             .
             Audivi
             de
             isto
             libello
             jam
             nuper
             veram
             esse
             Apocalypse●n
             Apocalypsin
             :
             &
             quod
             maximè
             solabitur
             (
             si
             rem
             acu
             tetigerit
             )
             quod
             à
             termino
             tam
             propè
             absimus
             .
             Communica
             quaeso
             vestris
             ;
             si
             quos
             Josephos
             Medes
             habetis
             ;
             sed
             erit
             in
             vestratem
             linguam
             transferendum
             .
          
           
             Observation
             of
             the
             Providence
             of
             God
             to
             caus
             this
             book
             to
             bee
             published
             at
             this
             time
             .
          
           
             1
             Cor.
             10.
             13.
             
          
           
             2
             Cor.
             1.
             5.
             
          
           
             1
             Pet.
             1.
             7.
             
          
           
             For
             the
             support
             of
             the
             Bohemian
             Exiles
             with
             comfort
             .
          
           
             For
             several
             uses
             to
             us
             also
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               confirm
               us
               in
               the
               exspectation
               of
               the
               fulfilling
               of
               the
               Apocalyptical
               promises
               .
            
          
           
             Isa
             .
             59.
             19.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             put
             us
             in
             minde
             of
             God's
             waie
             ,
             by
             which
             hee
             will
             finish
             his
             work
             .
          
           
             Isa
             .
             54.
             15
             ,
             16
             ,
             17.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             put
             us
             in
             minde
             of
             our
             dutie
             ,
             in
             order
             to
             God's
             work
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             warn
             us
             not
             to
             bee
             secure
             ,
             but
             exspect
             a
             trial
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Treatise
             expounding
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             what
             esteem
             is
             to
             bee
             had
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             Mat.
             25.
             6.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             interpetation
             of
             Apocalyptical
             Mysteries
             .
          
           
             In
             respect
             of
             outward
             events
             ,
             that
             to
             shew
             their
             fulfilling
             is
             not
             all
             which
             is
             intended
             by
             the
             Spirit
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             there
             is
             a
             manifestation
             of
             the
             Mysterie
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             intended
             thereby
             ,
             above
             the
             Historical
             events
             .
          
           
             Colos
             .
             1.
             26
             ,
             27.
             
          
           
             And
             what
             the
             keie
             of
             that
             Mysterie
             is
             in
             general
             .
          
           
             Ephes
             .
             1.
             23.
             
          
           
             And
             the
             prospective
             which
             may
             bee
             had
             thereof
             in
             the
             Apocalyptical
             dispensation
             .
          
           
             Which
             is
             of
             two
             sorts
             .
          
           
             The
             Rules
             of
             Interpretation
             ,
             relating
             to
             the
             Matter
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             a
             scriptural
             Prophesie
             .
          
           
             Mat.
             2.
             15.
             23.
             
          
           
             The
             right
             use
             of
             these
             Rules
             .
          
           
             The
             evils
             attending
             the
             non-observing
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             That
             there
             is
             a
             neerer
             prospect
             of
             the
             Mysterie
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             to
             bee
             had
             ,
             then
             by
             these
             Rules
             .
             
               Colos
               .
               2.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             1
             Cor.
             1.
             24.
             
          
           
             Revel
             .
             19.
             10.
             
          
           
             Yet
             not
             so
             as
             not
             to
             bee
             liable
             to
             bee
             tried
             by
             these
             Rules
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             grand
             principle
             of
             our
             Faith
             is
             ,
             concerning
             Christ
             ,
             to
             which
             all
             the
             Interpretation
             of
             these
             visions
             must
             bee
             made
             proportionate
             .
          
           
             What
             to
             bee
             look't
             upon
             in
             the
             Prophesie
             ,
             to
             finde
             the
             proportion
             it
             hath
             to
             that
             principle
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             matter
             and
             scope
             of
             everie
             rational
             discours
             is
             to
             bee
             observed
             ,
             and
             found
             out
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Title
             of
             the
             book
             ,
             shewing
             the
             matter
             and
             scope
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Preface
             shewing
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Conclusion
             which
             doth
             speak
             still
             the
             same
             matter
             and
             scope
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             par●s
             of
             the
             matter
             ,
             as
             they
             reach
             the
             main
             Scope
             .
          
           
             The
             division
             of
             the
             book
             .
          
           
             The
             substance
             of
             the
             first
             vision
             .
          
           
             The
             difference
             of
             the
             first
             and
             second
             vision
             .
          
           
             The
             substance
             of
             the
             second
             vision
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             third
             vision
             .
          
           
             And
             wherefore
             the
             whole
             Book
             is
             to
             bee
             reduced
             to
             three
             visions
             .
          
           
             And
             what
             the
             summe
             of
             the
             third
             vision
             is
             .
          
           
             The
             visions
             shewing
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             Mysterie
             of
             God
             have
             a
             respect
             to
             four
             times
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Before
             she
             Church
             fli●'s
             into
             the
             Wilderness
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Whiles
             shee
             is
             in
             the
             wildernes
             .
          
           
             The
             Mysterie
             of
             iniquitie
             appears
             ,
             which
             hath
             two
             parts
             .
          
           
             One
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             another
             of
             the
             Whore.
             
          
           
             And
             the
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             though
             in
             the
             Wilderness
             ,
             yet
             also
             upon
             Sion
             ,
             appear's
             in
             like
             manner
             .
          
           
             The
             Judgments
             of
             God
             in
             his
             last
             wrath
             is
             poured
             out
             upon
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             Mysterie
             of
             the
             Whore
             and
             her
             judgment
             appear's
             also
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Whiles
             shee
             is
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             Wilderness
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             After
             that
             shee
             is
             com
             out
             of
             the
             Wilderness
             ,
             during
             the
             time
             of
             her
             Reign
             with
             Christ
             .
          
           
             The
             brief
             summe
             of
             the
             whole
             Mysterie
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             set
             forth
             in
             the
             two
             last
             visions
             of
             the
             Revel●tion
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             things
             which
             at
             present
             are
             most
             considerable
             therein
             ,
             which
             are
             ▪
             
          
           
             The
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           
             The
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Lamb.
             
          
           
             The
             comparison
             of
             the
             Government
             of
             ●he
             and
             of
             the
             Lamb.
             
          
           
             The
             discoverie
             of
             the
             fals
             Prophet
             .
          
           
             The
             discoverie
             of
             the
             two
             witnesses
             .
          
           
             The
             comparison
             of
             the
             fals
             Prophet
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             two
             Witnesses
             .
          
           
             The
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Whore.
             
          
           
             Vers
             5.
             
          
           
             The
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Bride
             .
          
           
             Revel
             .
             19.
             vers
             8.
             
          
           
             The
             manner
             of
             the
             warfare
             .
          
           
             Chap.
             19.
             12
             ,
             13.
             
          
           
             Heb.
             4.
             4.
             
          
           
             Revel
             .
             19.
             20.
             
          
           
             Hebr.
             12.
             26.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A45748-e4760
           
             42
             moneths
             .
             at
             the
             rate
             of
             30.
             daies
             .
             1260.
             daies
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A45748-e9660
           
             (
             the
             two
             Witnesses
             .
             )